Home

to get the file

1. 1 25 SCPI programming e 1 29 Optional command words essent enne 1 29 Query commands E 1 29 Output Connections O tp t connectors 2 2 Triax e eH RERO ED e OH IRE 2 2 Ground ON FARM 2 3 LO and GUARD banana eene 2 3 INTERLOCK e eee eee cre eeepc ter eer err rere 2 4 Output configurations 2 4 40 24 2 5 Triax inner shield eee tenentes iret eerie 2 7 Triax OW 3 SEE ns 2 7 GUAT epee 2 8 Guard OVELVIEW nee me e OD ae ree D Ee eH rH 2 8 Triax Cable Guard 2 9 Banana Jack Guard tenet Maina ORE 2 12 Floating the current SQUICE M 2 13 Connections to DUT iet eere Uere Eee ees 2 15 Supplied triax Cable 2 15 B sic Connectons eei REPRE OH HERO EREE OE ERE REIS CHE RUE 2 15 Shields and guarding p n 2 16 Banana Jack Guard connections 2 19 Floating current source connections 2 19 Using a test Tixture aei eee ee 2 20 Custom built test fixture 2 20 DC Curre
2. Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 17 E amp F Operation of the Model 622x starts at point A in the flowchart where it waits for an external trigger Pressing STEP takes Model 7001 7002 out of idle and places operation at point B in the flowchart For the first pass through Model 7001 7002 the scanner does not wait at point B Instead it closes the first channel point C After the relay settles Model 7001 7002 outputs a trigger pulse and opera tion loops back to point B where it waits for an input trigger With the Model 622x at point A the output trigger pulse from Model 7001 7002 triggers a measurement of DUT 1 point E After the source current is ready the Model 622x outputs a trigger pulse and then loops back to point A where it waits for another input trigger The trigger applied to Model 7001 7002 from the Model 622x closes the next channel in the scan which then triggers the Model 622x to output the sweep point current to that DUT This process continues until all 10 channels are scanned Return to Section 8 topics 8 18 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 8 topics 9 Limit Test and Digital Section 9 topics Limit test page 9 2 Overview page 9 2 Programming limit testing page 9 2 SCPI commands limit testing page 9 3 Digital I O port page 9 5 Digital I O connector page 9 5 5V output
3. 14 6 Sense command 14 7 Source command summary 14 8 Status command summary nennen eren 14 13 System command summary essere ener nennen nene 14 14 Trace command summary 14 16 Trigger command summary sess nee nennen ens 14 17 Units command summary 2 24 4 nre 14 18 15 Table 15 1 16 Table 16 1 Table 16 2 17 Table 17 1 Table 17 2 Table 17 3 Table 17 4 Table 17 5 Table 17 6 Table 17 7 Table 17 8 Table 17 9 B Table B 1 C Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table C 5 Table C 6 Table C 7 D Table D 1 Table D 2 220 Language DDC emulation commands eese nennen enne enne 15 2 Performance Verification Recommended test equipment 2 16 4 DC c rrent output Limits ete 16 7 Calibration Recommended calibration equipment eese 17 4 Calibration Ment Em 17 6 Front panel current calibration summary 2 17 8 Remote current calibration summary seen 17 16 Calibration commands esses eere 17 20 CAL PROT SENS command parameter ranges 2 22222 17 22 CAL PROT SOUR command parameter ranges eee 17 22 Calibration errors eee
4. eene ener 10 29 Small LAN system using a hub 2 10 30 Isolated LAN system using two NICs Network Interface Cards 10 30 Enterprise wide or internet network system 10 31 RJ 45 Ethernet cable male male essere 10 31 Model 6221 Ethernet connector esee 10 32 Example software typical main screen 2 10 36 Typical instrument connection setup wizard sse 10 37 Typical virtual front panel eene 10 38 Status Structure Model 622x status mode structure sess 11 3 16 61 e 11 5 Status byte and service request 11 7 Standard event Status erecto piede 11 12 Operation event status ssssssseeseeeeeeeeeneeeneeneeeeene 11 14 Measurement event status 224 0 11 16 Questionable event status oo cccccccccccssssccccecsesececceceesssececesessseseceseseneeeecesenaes 11 17 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes ASCH data TOrmat 1 e 13 5 JEEE 754 data formats rne tome P ee rhet 13 6 Model 6220 key press codes oo eee eeeeecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeescecaeceaecaessaceaeseeseeseetees 13 10 Model 6221 key press c
5. 7 Filter circuit examples eene netten ertet ente ette rsen cete ib ide den E 8 List of Tables 1 Table 1 1 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 4 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 6 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 7 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 8 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Getting Started Front panel default settings DC Current Source Operation Source ranges and maximum outputs ssessseeeeeeneeneneen eren DC output commands IDEE pee EO eee Sweeps Logarithmic sweep points 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 enne enne nennen nnne nnne nere Sweep configuration menu Sweep example parameters 2 Staircase sweep commands linear and logarithmic esses Custom list sweep commands eeeesseseeeeeeeeneeee nennen nennen Sweep status model bits eene stese ieie Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Measurement unit commands 204 40 Error status codes and messages commands et ere tre RE Pulse Delta commands 1 Differential Conductance commands eese Averaging
6. eee o 5 15 Measurement Units 5 16 Volts ohms power or conductance eee eeeeeeseceeeceeteeeeeceteeeeeeeaeeeteeeaeeeeeeee 5 16 Setting measurement units 2 2 5 17 Display readings M 5 17 Error and status messages eee eret 5 18 PI M 5 20 e de dae EE 5 20 Basic measurement process 5 20 Model 622x measurement process sese 5 21 Config ration Settings enion reiki Hoes earr EEn Etere staps 5 24 AfMINE Me 5 24 Triggering SEQUENCE M 5 25 Gs cii Pen 5 27 Setup commands ES 5 30 Puls Delt sciri TE EEE EE E E oe 5 32 Model 6221 measurement Process seen 5 32 Pulse Delta outputs eee terret tetas eese bab eb 5 35 Configuration settings 5 39 PLOCESS MC 5 42 Trggering SeqU DCe tC RE Ser E 5 43 Oye cio m 5 44 Setup commands tette etd bae snis PEs oiber be i sei dg 5 49 Differential Conductance 5 reset niep eee the ren creen Rein nba cbe 5 51 Basic measurement process 5 51 Model 622x measurement process sese 5 51 Configuration settings
7. 2107 Triax Cable Input Cable Black Channel 1 WARNING The voltage levels on the Guard and High terminals are the same safet Green i hazard exists when vouar kiate WARNING Connect test fixture to a known the OUTPUT is 30V Test Fixture safety earth ground using 18 rms 42V peak or 7 7 AWG or larger wire Note The triax cable and input cable shown in this drawing supplied with the Keithley Models 622x and 2182 2182A Configuring communications For both front panel and remote operation the RS 232 of the Model 2182 2182A must be enabled on and the selected communications interface for the Model 622x must be the GPIB or the Ethernet Model 6221 only Model 2182 2182A communications Configure the Model 2182 2182A for RS 232 communications as follows On the Model 2182 2182A press the SHIFT key and then the RS 232 key to access the RS 232 menu From this menu configure the RS 232 as follows 1 Select ON for the RS 232 interface 2 Select the 19 2K baud rate 3 Select the NONE setting for flow control Details on setting communications are provided in the User s Manual for the Model 2182 21824 see Interface selection and configuration on page 10 3 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 11 Model 622x communications For Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance the M
8. B 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Introduction MPOTO C 2 eene aee nies Sst es A eet RS C 3 Bus LIMES C 4 Data neren DUI C 5 Bus management limes tertie C 5 Handshake e 5 Bus commands 6 Uniline commands rete C 9 Universal multiline commands C 9 Addressed multiline commands seen enne C 10 Address commands c ccccccesssssccececesececcecesuececeeceensceceeceusseceeceessueeeeceensaees C 10 Unaddress commands rettet etie tee ere eR E Me EN OERE C 11 Common commands cccccesesssccececssseceececeaececeecsesececeeceensseeeeesessneseeeceseaaes C 11 SCPL comands ecrit re S 11 Command codes 002 0 22 2 2 0000000000000000000000000000 12 Typical command sequences 12 IEEE command groups eene rerio sene 14 Interface function codes 15 IEEE 488 SCPI Conformance Information InttoductlOn 32 eret en RR
9. A As By Ay A A A B Reading Reading 1 2 Conversion A 5 B By Bs B B5 Filter Type Repeating As B Bi B Filter Window 1 B B B B B A A A A A A B B B B Count 5 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 A Bi Bi Reading Reading 1 2 Return to Section 6 topics 6 8 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Filter setup and control When the averaging filter is enabled the FILT annunciator turns on and bit B8 Filter Settled of the Operation Event Register resets to 0 see Section 11 for details on status structure For front panel operation the AVG key toggles the state of the averaging filter The filter can be configured while it is enabled or disabled The filter is configured from the average configuration menu as follows NOTE The noise window cannot be set from the front panel It can only be set using remote programming 1 Press the CONFIG key and then press the AVG key to access the filter configuration menu Use the editing controls to make selections 2 Fromthe TYPE menu item select the MOVING or REPEAT filter and press ENTER 3 From the COUNT menu item set the filter count 2 to 300 and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display state Remote programming Averaging filter The commands for averag
10. Va dR dV dl 60uV 20uV 40uV 20pA 40uV 20 Model 622x measurement process When using the Model 2182 2182A with the Model 622x a more sophisticated process is used to perform differential measurements The delta measurement process is used to eliminate the effects of thermal EMFs and a 3 point moving average calculation algorithm is used to provide more accurate readings This differential measurement process is shown in Figure 5 14 The Model 622x is configured to output a stepped sweep with a specified Delta which is the differen tial current dl As shown in the illustration Delta is added to and subtracted from each subsequent step in the sweep The solid line in Figure 5 14 is the actual out put of the Model 622x As shown each differential voltage calculation dV Calc uses the three previous Model 2182 2182A A D measurement conversions Keep in mind that dl Delta is the same for all calc points With dl known and dV calculated the Model 622x can also calculate display and store the differential conductance dG or differential resistance dR for each calc point Return to Section 5 topics 5 52 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual A D Rdg B lt dV Calc 1 Ato C gt lt dV Calc 4 D to F Figure 5 14 Differential Conductance measurement process dV Calc 5
11. 7 6 Duty cycle rit teer rhe Orne rhet here eed 7 7 ATI AG UNICI 7 7 Phase marker ies Ad A EH eek 7 9 DURATION 55 ods csieb 7 10 Arbitrary Waveforms eise eerte iei peine ete eei 7 10 Using the external low jitter trigger mode eene 7 10 Front panel wave function operation 7 14 Using the wave function menu eene eene nennen 7 14 Generating sine 7 16 Generating square Wave 2222 4 1 001 7 17 Generating a ramp waveform sees enne nennen 7 18 Generating an arbitrary waveform sese 7 19 Using the external trigger mode sese 7 20 Remote wave function operation 7 21 Programming sine WayeS eere nnne entere netten nnne 7 22 Programming square Waves 0 cee eeceseesceeeeeeceseeeeeeseescecaeesaesaecsesseeteeeeeeeees 7 23 Programming ramp waveforms 22 1 001 7 24 Programming arbitrary waveforms sese 7 25 Programming an externally triggered waveform sees 7 26 SCPI commands wave functions eese 7 27 Triggering Tugger models tre etre tre ee Er Re uri 8 2 Front panel trigger model sese 8 2 Remote
12. i gt VauanD Low Impedance Voltmeter H Jack Guard 1 Vour IxR 10 x 10 100V VauanD Vout 1MV 100V 1mV Floating the current source Using an external source in the test system may require that the Model 622x current source float off Earth Ground An example of such a test system is shown in Figure 2 10 which includes an external voltage source Notice that Output Low of the voltage source is connected to earth ground Return to Section 2 topics 2 14 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual For the test circuit shown in Figure 2 10 the Model 622x current source must be configured to float off Earth Ground As shown Output Low of the Model 622x is floating 10V above Earth Ground If Output Low of the Model 622x was instead connected to Earth Ground the voltage source would be shorted through Earth Ground In order to float the current source Output Low must be disconnected from Earth Ground The floating configurations are shown in Figure 2 4B and Figure 2 5B See Triax output low on page 2 7 for details on selecting the floating configuration WARNING When floating the Model 622x an electric shock hazard may exist between Output Low of the Model 622x and Chassis The chassis of the Model 622x must be connected to Earth Ground Use the chassis ground screw on the rear panel for connection to a known safety Earth Ground The test circuit must be surrounded by a safety
13. 10 29 Ethernet COMDECUONS E 10 31 Ethernet Settings Pme 10 33 Using the example software 22 10 35 12 13 14 15 16 Status Structure OVERVIEW iecit A A tuu A EE 11 2 Clearing registers and queues sess enne nennen ene 11 4 Programming and reading registers 11 5 Programming enable registers essere 11 5 Reading registers M OUR 11 6 Status byte and service request SRQ essere 11 7 Stat s Dyte register 11 7 Service request enable register sess 11 8 Serial polling and SRQ 11 9 Status byte and service request commandis esee 11 9 Status register 665 E 11 10 Register bit descriptions edente teret ie eter ESE 11 10 e 11 20 O tp t queUe 11 20 Error queue 11 20 Common Commands COMMON commands m 12 2 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes DISPlay Subsystem Leer nant ens 13 2 lug E E DIOdIJuM M 13 4 FORMat lt type gt lt length gt eene 13 4 FORMat ELEMents item list 13 7 FORMat BORDer name rasieren aiani enne nnne tenente nen tenen ennt 13 8 SYS Tem keypress COGes iieri ette
14. 1 11 Menti editing Keys munnan e a E E A eid 1 21 Output Connections Triax connector and ground point 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeecseeseecaecaesaeceeceeeeeeseeeeaeeees 2 2 LO and GUARD banana jacks 2000 2 3 INTEREOCR eee testet 2 4 Output configurations triax inner shield connected to Output Low 2 6 Output configurations triax inner shield connected to Cable Guard 2 6 Unguarded triax cable inner shield connected to Output Low see Figure 2 4 2 2 10 Guarded triax cable inner shield connected to Cable Guard see Figure 2 5 22 ener 2 11 DUT mounting plate unguarded and guarded sese 2 12 Using banana jack Guard to measure voltage see 2 13 Floating the Model 622x current source 2 14 Basic connections to DUT 22 22 20 ritiene nete otros esa saepe ees 2 16 Noise shield nete ru ERE eut eee eret RE 2 17 rug 2 17 Cable Guard connections triax inner shield connected to Cable Guard 2 18 Connections for noise shield safety shield and guarding 2 18 Banana Jack Guard connections eese 2 19 Floating current source connections 2 nennen 2 20 Custom built test fixture ener entrent 2 21 DC Current So
15. 2 Turn on the Model 6221 and test equipment and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding 3 Select the sine wave function by pressing the WAVE key 4 Setthe Model 6221 amplitude AMPL to 20mA on the 20mA range and set the frequency FREQ to 1kHz Turn on the output 5 Verify that the counter frequency reading is between 0 9999kHz and 1 0001kHz 6 After testing first turn off the output then disconnect the test equipment Figure 16 5 Connections for waveform function frequency accuracy Shielded Frequency Counter Enclosure Measure 1kHz Sine Wave Function Input Note If the frequency counter has a 50Q input impedance the 500 resistor should not be necessary Return to Section 16 topics 17 Calibration Section 17 topics Introduction page 17 2 Calibration requirements page 17 3 Environmental conditions page 17 3 Warm up period page 17 3 Line power page 17 3 Recommended calibration equipment page 17 4 Calibration equipment connections page 17 4 Restoring factory defaults page 17 4 Calibration summary and considerations page 17 5 Calibration summary page 17 5 Calibration considerations page 17 5 Calibration procedures page 17 5 Front panel calibration page 17 5 Using the calibration menu page 17 5 Front panel calibration procedure page 17 6 Remote calibration page 17 14 SCPI commands calibration page 17 20 Calibration dates count and password page
16. NOTE Error status events 950 through 962 pertain to the KI 220 Language which is covered in Section 15 The status regis ters that are affected by the listed error status events are ex plained in the Model 220 230 Programming Manual available for download at www keithley com Table B 1 Status and error messages Status Model Code Description Register Bit Reference 430 Query DEADLOCKED Standard B2 page 11 11 420 Query INTERMINATED Standard B2 page 11 11 410 Query INTERRUPTED Standard B2 page 11 11 363 Input buffer overrun Standard page 11 11 350 Queue overflow Standard page 11 11 314 Save recall memory lost Standard page 11 11 260 Expression error Standard B4 page 11 11 241 Hardware missing Standard B4 page 11 11 230 Data corrupt or stale Standard B4 page 11 11 225 Out of memory Standard B4 page 11 11 224 Illegal parameter value Standard B4 page 11 11 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Error and Status Messages B 3 Status Model Code Description Register Bit Reference 223 much data Standard B4 page 11 11 222 Parameter data out of range Standard B4 page 11 11 221 Settings conflict Standard B4 page 11 11 220 Parameter error Standard B4 page 11 11 213 Init ignored Standard B4 page 11 11 211 Trigger ignored Standard B4 page 11 11 210 Trigger err
17. NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while a sweep is armed or running Attempting to do so will generate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed Using the sweep configuration menu To configure sweeps press CONFIG then SWP and then make your selections from Table 4 2 below See the detailed procedures for each sweep type in the fol lowing paragraphs Table 4 2 Sweep configuration menu Menu selection Description TYPE Select sweep type STAIR Set START STOP STEP DELAY LOG Set START STOP NO OF POINTS DELAY CUSTOM Set POINTS ADJUST POINTS AUTO COPY SWEEP COUNT Choose sweep count FINITE Enter desired of sweeps INFINITE Continuously repeating sweeps SOURCE RANGING BEST Select source ranging Use best range based on maximum sweep step AUTO Auto range based on individual sweep step FIXED Always stay on fixed source range COMPLIANCE ABORT Select compliance abort mode NO Do not abort sweep if compliance reached YES Abort sweep if compliance reached Select AUTO COPY ON to automatically copy delay and compliance values to all sweep points Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 11 Performing a linear staircase sweep 1 Configure source functions a b If desired set the bias current output current prior to the start of the sweep by pressing the DC key and then setting the current to the desired value
18. rdg amps Temperature Coefficient C 0 18 C amp 28 50 C Settling Time 1 of final value Typical Noise peak peak RMS 5 0 1Hz 10Hz 0 02 200fA 0 02 200fA 0 02 2pA 0 01 20pA 0 005 200pA 0 005 2nA 0 005 20nA 0 005 200nA 0 01 2HA 400 80 4 0 8 20 4 200 40 2 04 20 4 200 40nA 2 04 10 2uA 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS OUTPUT RESISTANCE gt 10 0 2nA 20nA range OUTPUT CAPACITANCE 10pF lt 100pF Filter 2nA 20nA range LOAD IMPEDANCE Stable into 100uH typical CURRENT REGULATION Line 0 0175 of range Load 0 0176 of range VOLTAGE LIMIT Compliance Bipolar voltage limit set with single value 0 1V to 105V in 0 01 V programmable steps Accuracy for 0 1V to 20V 0 1 20mV accuracy for 20V to 105V 0 1 100mV MAX OUTPUT POWER 11W four quadrant source or sink operation GUARD OUTPUT Maximum Load Capacitance 10nF Maximum Load Current 1mA for rated accuracy Accuracy 1mV for output currents lt 2mA excluding output lead voltage drop PROGRAM MEMORY offers point by point control and triggering e g Sweeps Number of Locations 64K EXTERNAL TRIGGER TTL compatible EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT and OUTPUT Max Trigger Rate 1000 s LTR _ REVISIONS FORM 28777A SBG 6220 2182 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS DUT RESISTANCE Up t
19. sss 8 14 Trigger link output pulse specifications sse 8 14 DUT t st Re 8 15 Trigger link connections oe noceret eene t hepar 8 15 Operation model for triggering example 2 8 16 9 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 10 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 Figure 10 13 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 13 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Figure 13 3 Figure 13 4 16 Figure 16 1 Figure 16 2 Figure 16 3 Figure 16 4 Figure 16 5 Limit Test and Digital T O Limit 1 test 9 2 Digital O port ischemia eb eet 9 5 Digital I O port simplified schematic 2 9 6 Controlling externally powered relays sse 9 7 NAND pate Control tette etri Ei 9 8 Remote Operations 488 connector erret bre e bene ERR ERR E Fa 10 19 Multi unit connections eene nennen nemen nennen nennen nennen nene 10 20 IEEE 488 Ethernet 6221 only and RS 232 connector locations 10 21 RS 232 10 ede she arae epa etude ba 10 27 Direct 6221 connection to
20. 4 For compliance x T or F TCMPL In compliance FCMPL Not in compliance IEEE 754 single precision format REAL 32 or SREal will select the binary IEEE 754 single precision data format Figure 13 2A shows the normal byte order format for each data element For example if three data elements are selected the data string for each reading con version is made up of three 4 byte data blocks Note that the data string for each reading conversion is preceded by a 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 Figure 13 2 does not show the byte for the terminator that is attached to the end of each data string Note that the byte order of the data string be sent in reverse order see FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt on page 13 7 Return to Section 13 topics 13 6 DISPlay FORMat SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 754 double precision format REAL 64 or DREal selects the binary IEEE754 double precision data format and is shown in Figure 13 2B normal byte order shown This format is similar to the single precision format except that it is 64 bits long Figure 13 2 IEEE 754 data formats A Single precision data format 32 data bits Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 S sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 8 f fraction bits 23 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte
21. IDN Returns serial number revision level of the main frame SYSTem ABOard SNUMber Returns SN for the analog board SYSTem ABOard REVision Returns revision of the analog board SYSTem DBOard SNUMber Returns SN for the digital board SYSTem DBOard REVision Returns revision of the digital board SYSTem VERSion Returns version of SCPI standard e g 1999 0 Beeper and keyclick Beeper With the beeper enabled a beep will be issued to acknowledge the following actions Ashort beep is issued when a front panel key is pressed Forthe Model 6221 a short beep is also issued when the rotary knob is turned or pressed When an error occurs a slightly longer beep is issued Alonger beep is issued when a setup is saved from the front panel Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 17 Perform the following steps to control the beeper 1 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU 2 Using the Menu navigation keys see page 1 20 place the cursor on BEEPER and press ENTER 3 Place the cursor on DISABLE or ENABLE and press ENTER Beeper enabled is the default setting 4 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Remote programming The following command controls the beeper SYSTem BEEPer STATe b Enable or disable the beeper b ON or OFF Default setting is beeper ON Keyclick With keyclick enabled a click sound will be issued
22. Parameters lt NDN gt Bxx x Hx Qx lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hexadecimal format x 0 to FFFF Octal format x 0 to 177777 Decimal format Note Power up and STATus PRESet resets all bits of all enable registers to 0 CLS has no effect Programming example program and read registers This command sequence programs and reads the measurement registers Regis ters are read using the binary format which directly indicates which bits are set The command to select format FORMat SREGister is documented in Table 11 2 FORM SREG BIN Selects binary format to read registers STAT MEAS ENAB 512 Enables BFL buffer full STAT MEAS COND Reads Measurement Condition Register STAT MEAS Reads Measurement Event Register Return to Section 11 topics 11 20 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Queues The Model 622x uses two queues that are first in first out FIFO registers Output queue Used to hold reading and response messages Error queue Used to hold error and status messages The Model 622x status model Figure 11 1 shows how the two queues are struc tured with the other registers Output queue The output queue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instru ment For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the output queue When data is placed in the output queue the messa
23. Update spec per Meeting AD RKN Ver 5 Update 12 1 03 used for Engineering Sample Audit Ver 6 Update 04 8 04 per Eng Sample Audit RKN Ver 7 Update 05 14 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Ver 8 Update 05 20 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Ver 9 Update 06 07 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Trigger rate changed to 1000 s common mode added 50 60Hz at 250Vrms Rev A Update 06 08 04 release version of Ver5 RKN INTERNAL SPECIFICATIONS Arbitrary Function generation min frequency can be 1uHz with loss of frequency accuracy Jitter definition is the amount of variation in the period 2nA 20nA ranges use the same sense resistor thus noise is the same between the two ranges For Guard accuracy greater than 2mA load current accuracy is approximately 0 5mV mA of load current or about 50mV max at 100mA load current Low current range 20uA and below 1 settling time specs are limited by ability to verify performance All typical noise and settling time specifications are only spot checked by the cal and verify system at these conditions and limits a RMS Noise 10Hz 20MHz limit checked to 5x typical due to cal system noise floor limitations b Fast mode settling time 100mA Check limit of 3us c Fast mode settling time 20mA Check limit of 3us d Fast mode settling time 2mA Check limit of 3us e Fast mode settling time 200uA Check limit of 4us f Fast mode settling time 20uA Check limit of
24. enable or disable P address Subnet mask Ethernet gateway MAC address of the 6221 This fixed address for the 6221 cannot be changed Ethernet settings can be made from the front panel using the COMM menu see Table 10 1 for the communications menu and Configuring the Model 6221 Ether net interface on page 10 5 for more information or via remote see Remote interface configuration commands on page 10 6 TCP IP protocol The TCP IP Protocol is the protocol the Model 6221 uses to communicate over the Ethernet connection to the PC The Model 6221 TCP IP settings may be con figured either manually through the Model 6221 COMM menu or via remote or through the use of a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server when connected to a local area network LAN The IP settings consist of an IP address subnet mask and gateway address A Network Administrator is required to provide the IP settings addresses if the connection is made to a LAN If the network will be isolated from the LAN the con nection can be made without a Network Administrator Refer to Manual IP config uration on page 10 34 below for information on manual configuration of IP settings Using DHCP for automatic IP configuration The Model 6221 supports DHCP If a DHCP server is present on the network it will automatically provide the correct settings to the Model 6221 if the 6221 is powered up while connected to the network Note howev
25. AID Rdg G 7OUA A D Rdg 2182 21824 voltage measurement conversion dV Calc Calculate differential voltage dV using last three A D Rdgs 60pA Hn 4 Start Ste Step 10pA dV Calc 3 Stop 500A A D Rdg E Stop Delta al 2 unnm Delta i unin Sweep with OVA Delta dl Sweep with 20pA Delta dl 40 mimm 1 1 dV Calc St 1 av Cale SOLA mimm Step Y i i 20 4 A i 1 Step 9 dV Calc i 4 1 i 10 i i A 1 i Step i i Start nayan i i 1 Step i 1 time 20 7 i dV Calc 42 B to D dV Calc 5 E to G gt dV Calc 3 C to E gt 4 dV Calc 6 F to H gt dV Calculations The following equations are used by the 622x to calculate differential voltage dV To calculate dV points A through H are 2182 2182A voltage measurements A D readings A B 2 C B 2 dV 1 5 e 1 0 dE E F 2 G F 2 av 42 TOL ay 29230670 2 F G 2 H G 2 av eg UC DVLA REDI a D E 2 F E 2 T 1 8 e 1 4 1 5 dG dR Calculations With dl known dl Delta and dV calculated the 622x can then calculate differential conductance dG or differential resistance dR With G units selected readings are calculated as follows dG dl d
26. CALC1 CALC1 NONE CONTrol lt name gt Set buffer control NEXT or NEVer NEV Query buffer control FEED Query buffer feed 5 Timestamp for buffer readings FORMat lt name gt Select timestamp format ABSolute or DELTa ABS FORMat Query timestamp format DATA Request all readings in buffer V TYPE Query type of readings stored in buffer Returns SELected lt start gt lt count gt NONE DELT DCON or PULS Request list of stored readings Requires a starting value and the number of readings count Notes 1 SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the TRACe commands The listed defaults are power on defaults 2 Buffer size is set to the number of delta readings to be performed 3 The default parameter is one half the set buffer size TRACe POINts 2 Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 17 Table 14 10 Trigger command summary Command Description SCPI INITiate Trigger initiation 8 IMMediate Initiate one trigger cycle OFF ABORt Reset trigger system 8 ARM Arm layer commands 8 SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 SOURce lt name gt Select event detector IMMediate TIMer BUS TLINk BSTest PSTest NSTest or MANual SOURce Query selected event detector SIGNal Bypass ARM control source TIMer n Set timer interval seconds 0 to 99999 99 0 1 1msec res
27. Model 6221 When Pulse Delta is started from the Model 6221 it outputs a low I Low current pulse After the programmed Source Delay of the Model 6221 expires an output trigger is sent to the Model 21824 to start its operations Source Delay is used to allow the pulse to settle NOTE The programmed Pulse Width and Source Delay determines the integration time for Model 2182A measurements The integration time for the Mod el 2182A is automatically set when Pulse Delta is armed Model 2182A The Model 2182A performs a measurement conversion A D 1 and an output trigger is sent back to the Model 6221 Model 6221 At the start of the next line cycle the Model 6221 outputs the programmed high I High current pulse After the Source Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182A Model 2182A The Model 2182A performs a measurement conversion A D 2 and an output trigger is sent back to the Model 6221 Model 6221 At the start of the third line cycle the Model 6221 again out puts the programmed low I Low current pulse After the Source Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182A Model 2182A If measuring the second low pulse the Model 2182A per forms another measurement conversion A D 3 and Pulse Delta is then calculated by the Model 6221 The Model 2182A sends an output trigger to the Model 6221 to start the next Pulse Delta cycle if Pulse Delta count is 71 Oth
28. es RR en eh ees D 2 Applications Calibration source esses eene nnne E 2 Resistivity measurements esses eene nene neret terere nene E 3 Diode characterization E 4 Transistor characterization cccccccccccesssccececessaececcecssaececcecseseaeceecesseaeececsesaaeeeecs E 5 External user supplied filter sese E 7 Typical filter circuits EE 8 Filter circuit considerations sese E 9 Suggested filter circuit components 2 E 10 Compliance overshoot prevention 2 eren E 11 Calculating overshoot ener E 11 Effect of compliance setpoint on settling times eene E 12 Preventing compliance overshoot ceceesceeeeeesseeenceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseees E 12 List of Illustrations 1 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 3 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 4 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Getting Started Models 6220 and 6621 front panels 1 8 Model 622x rear panel tette etait tatg
29. rac onc AS 26 c OUTPUT 108Vok CAT DIGITAL I O LINE FUSE CU EC LNE E RATING IEEE 488 SESE RET TRIGGER Eod tinkac 100 OR 1 IEEE 488 Connector for IEEE 488 GPIB operation Use a shielded cable such as the Model 7006 7007 or 7008 2 OUTPUT 3 lug female triax connector for current source output Mates to the supplied triax cable 237 ALG 2 Will also mate to any triax cable terminated with a 3 slot male triax connector 3 ETHERNET 6221 only RJ45 female connector for Ethernet operation Use an RJ45 male male cable for connec tion Two status LEDs are located at the top of the connector These LEDs indicate status of the Ethernet see Section 10 for details 4 DIGITAL I O Male DB 9 connector Four pins for digital output one pin for Start of Test SOT trigger and one for external voltage VEXT input 5 RS 232 Female DB 9 connector For RS 232 operation use a straight through not null modem DB 9 shielded cable for connection to the PC For Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance use the supplied serial cable CA 351 for connections between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 2182A 6221 Return to Section 1 topics 1 12 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 6 LO and GUARD Banana safety jacks for output low and banana jack Guard 7 TRIGGER LINK Eight pin micro DIN connector for sending
30. 9 8 SCPI commands force digital I O pattern sse 9 9 10 Remote Operations Selecting and configuring an interface 2 10 2 Interfaces e 10 2 Date M 10 3 Interface selection and configuration esee 10 3 Programming SYNLAK Eee Erie EE 10 12 Command Words essersi apeti e sedes 10 12 Program MESSAGES iuueni 10 15 Response messages 10 17 GPIB interface cune rre Ee ere heh r eee 10 19 GPIB bus standards 2 1 10 19 GPIB BUS connections eterni PE e E 10 19 Primary address RC 10 21 General IEEE 488 bus commands 2 0401 10 22 Front panel GPIB operation sese 10 24 RS 232 10tetface reference scettr ltr ee nite 10 25 Sending and receiving data sse 10 25 RS 232 settings E 10 25 5 232 10 27 Ethernet interface reference scent eem Enea 10 29 Etbernet standards i i ehe e rete sir 10 29 Typical Ethernet Systems ree nte
31. B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO n RSE Idle WStop Arm Trig WStrt Swp SwpA SwpD Cal B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Operation Condition Register Operation Event Register To Operation Summary Bit OSB of 1 1 Register Operation Idle Filt WStop Arm Trig WStrt Swp SwpA SwpD Cal B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 2 1 BO Register RSE RS 232 Errors Trig Waiting for trigger event amp Logical AND Idle Idle state WStrt Wave Started _ Filt Averaging filter settled Swp Sweeping OR Logical OR WStop Wave stopped SwpA Sweep Aborted Arm Waiting for arm event SwpD Sweep Done Cal Calibrating Measurement event status The used bits of the measurement event register Figure 11 6 are described as follows Bit BO Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that delta reading exceeds the selected range of the Model 2182A Error status codes 301 Bit B1 Interlock Int Set bit indicates that the interlock is asserted indi cating that the output can be turned on Error status codes 111 Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 15 Bit B2 Over Temperature Temp Set bit indicates that the internal temperature limit has been exceeded Check that the
32. Figure 11 4 Standard event status ESR PON URQ CME DDE QYE B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Standard Event Status Register To Event Summary Bit ESB of Status Byte Register Standard Event ESE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Status Enable 15 8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register PON Power On QYE Query Error URQ User Request OPC Operation Complete CME Command Error EXE Execution Error amp Logical AND DSE Device Specific Error OR Logical OR Operation event status The used bits of the operation event register Figure 11 5 are described as follows Bit BO Calibrating CAL Set bit indicates that the Model 622x is calibrating Error status code 121 Bit B1 Sweep Done SwpD Set bit indicates that a sweep Delta Differential Conductance or a pulse sweep for Pulse Delta is finished Error status code 122 Bit B2 Sweep Aborted SwpA Set bit indicates that a sweep Delta Differential Conductance or a pulse sweep for Pulse Delta has been aborted Error status code 123 Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 13 Bit B3 Sweeping Swp Set bit indicates that a sweep Delta Differen tial Conductance or a pulse sweep for Pulse Delta is running Status code 124 Device sweeping Error status cod
33. LINE Set trigger out line 1 to 6 EVENTS Select arm out events TRIG LAYER EXIT Select ON or OFF TL ENTER Select ON or OFF TRIG LAYER Configure trigger layer TRIGGER IN Set trigger in events IMMEDIATE Immediate trigger TRIGGER LINK Select trigger link and line 1 to 6 EVENT DETECT BYPASS Set event bypass ONCE or NEVER TRIGGER OUT Set trigger out events LINE Set trigger out line 1 to 6 EVENTS Set trigger output events SOURCE Select ON or OFF DELAY Select ON or OFF Return to Section 8 topics 8 8 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Configuring triggering The following is a typical example of using trigger configuration to fine tune sweeps For further details on the steps for sweep configuration see Front panel sweep operation on page 4 10 When setting trigger model parameters keep the following in mind The arm layer controls the entire sweep The trigger layer controls individual sweep steps 1 Press CONFIG then TRIG to enter the trigger configuration menu 2 Select ARM LAYER Press ENTER then set your parameters as follows a ARM IN Choose the ARM IN EVENT set TIMER interval if using timer TLINK line 1 6 and EVENT DETECT BYPASS ONCE or NEVER b ARM OUT Set the LINE 1 6 and EVENTS TRIG LAYER EXIT ON or OFF TL ENTER ON or OFF 3 From the main trigger configuration menu select TRIGGER LAYER then press ENTER and set your parameters as follows a TRIGG
34. esee emet eari renoir iese 5 55 ATONE PLOCESS M 5 56 Triggering SCQUENCE M 5 58 o cio EL 5 59 Setup commands 5 64 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Ayera ging filter eo eR 6 2 Averaging filter characteristics esses ene 6 2 Filter setup and control sess enne nennen 6 8 Remote programming Averaging filter 6 8 Matli iei tied ed de ae MIU BREED es ee 6 9 mX b and m X b reciprocal 6 9 Configuring and controlling mX b and m X b esses 6 9 Remote programming 6 10 ule EP 6 11 Isidorum M t 6 12 Storing readings 2 i eire tite hier ei ete tees 6 14 Recall 6 14 Remote programming Buffer sss 6 15 Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 2 SECHON OVerVIeW soie od aer eei e e ORE PDA OR EH 7 2 Wave function overview 7 2 Wave function characteristics eene etre entente 7 3 Setting waveform parameters 2 7 4 Amplitude rer eite eO es 7 5 RANING seorg M 7 5 Frequency i cog IRR GR REIR BERI 7 6 I M
35. ferential voltage dV is then calculated by the Model 622x The Model 2182 2182A outputs trigger pulse back to the Model 622x to output the next stepped current level Figure 5 6 shows the data reading flow process from the Model 2182 2182A to the Model 622x Figure 5 15 Differential Conductance triggering sequence 2182 2182A dv AID Rdg 3 Calc Note Time periods not drawn to scale 622x 2182 Diff gt 2182A Cond Trigger Delay Delay 2182 2182A A D Rdg 622x 622x 1 Output 2182 I Source i Trigger 2182A Output Trigger 2182A gt Trigger Start Delay 2182 2182 2182 Supt Output Trigger ate Trigger Trigger Trigger 622x 2182 Diff 2182A Cond Output Delay Trigger 2182 2182A A D Rdg 2 First dV Calcuation Cycle gt Operation NOTE Differential Conductance readings from the Mod el 2182 2182A will be unfiltered Noisy readings can be filtered by the Model 622x before sending them into the buffer See Section 6 for details Operation front panel The system configuration for front panel stand alone operation is shown in Figure 5 2A on page 5 5 Return to Section 5 topics 5 60 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 1 Connections are shown in the following illustrations All power must be removed from all components in the system be
36. Arm and trigger the waveform to enable the output The Model 6221 will wait for an external trigger pulse on the specified trigger link line and start the waveform within 1s SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform SOUR WAVE INIT Enable output wait on external triggers To stop the Model 6221 from responding to triggers and immediately stop any waveform being generated by turning the source output off send this command SOUR WAVE ABOR Stop generating waveforms Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only SCPI commands wave functions 7 27 Commands for wave functions are listed in Table 7 4 Additional information for each command is provided in notes that follow the tables Table 7 4 Waveform function commands Command Description Default SOURce 1 WAVE FUNCtion lt name gt Selects wave function SIN name SlINusoid SQUare RAMP or ARBitraryX SOURce 1 WAVE DCYCle lt NRf gt Sets duty cycle 50 lt NRf gt 0 to 100 SOURce 1 WAVE AMPLitude lt NRE gt Sets amplitude 1e 3 lt NRf gt 2e 12 to 0 105 A peak SOURce 1 WAVE FREQuency NRf Sets frequency 4 1e3 lt NRf gt 0 to 1e5 Hz SOURce 1 WAVE OFFset lt NRf gt Sets offset 5 0 lt NRf gt 0 105 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 WAVE RANGing lt name gt Selects ranging mode 9 BEST lt name gt BEST or FlXed SOURce 1 WAVE PMARk lt NR gt Sets marker phase 180 lt NRf
37. Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker talk only serial poll unaddressed to talk on L4 LAG SR1 Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen on TAG RL1 Service Request capability PPO Remote Local capability DC1 No Parallel Poll capability DT1 Device Clear capability CO Device Trigger capability E1 No Controller capability TEO Open collector bus drivers LEO No Extended Talker capability No Extended Listener capability The codes define Model 622x capabilities as follows SH Source Handshake Function SH1 defines the ability of the instrument to initiate the transfer of message data over the data bus AH Acceptor Handshake Function AH1 defines the ability of the instrument to guarantee proper reception of message data transmitted over the data bus T Talker Function The ability of the instrument to send data over the bus to other devices is provided by the T function Instrument talker capabilities T5 exist only after the instrument has been addressed to talk L Listener Function The ability for the instrument to receive device depen dent data over the bus from other devices is provided by the L function Listener capabilities L4 of the instrument exist only after it has been addressed to listen SR Service Request Function SR1 defines the ability of the instrument to request service from the controller Return t
38. For filter count 10 settled filtered readings begin with the 10th averaged reading The Filter Settled status bit B8 of the Operation Status Register indicates if the reading is settled or not The bit will set 1 when the first settled filtered reading occurs For details on status structure see Section 11 Delta and Pulse Delta As shown in Table 6 1 the moving average filter can be be used with Delta and Pulse Delta Keep in mind that when using the averaging filter a settled filter reading is not available until after the filter stack is filled The filter count sets the filter stack size When Delta or Pulse Delta is started the filter stack is allowed to fill before the first filtered Delta or Pulse Delta reading is stored in the buffer Therefore the total number of Delta or Pulse Delta cycles that are performed is calculated as follows Total Number of Cycles Moving Filter Count Cycle Count Example Assume the filter count for the moving average filter is set to 10 and Delta is configured to perform 25 cycles readings When Delta is started the fol lowing operations are performed 1 The asterisk annunciator turns on and the first 10 Delta cycles fill the stack of the moving average filter with Delta readings 2 Bit B8 Filter Settled of the Operation Event Register sets to 1 to indicate that the filter is settled See Section 11 for details on status registers NOTE Up to this point no readings have bee
39. Frequency variable resistor FVR 2 3 Front panel GPIB operation 10 24 Front panel summaries 1 7 Functionality verification Calculating limits 16 4 17 4 Environmental conditions 16 3 17 3 Line power setting 16 3 17 3 Recommended test equipment 16 4 17 4 Test considerations 16 5 17 5 Warm up period 16 3 17 3 Fuse replacement 1 15 General IEEE 488 bus commands 10 22 GET group execute trigger 10 23 Getting Started 4 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 16 1 17 1 GPIB adapter 1 6 GPIB cables 1 5 GPIB interface 10 2 10 4 GPIB status indicators 10 24 Ground points 2 3 GTL go to local 10 23 GUARD banana jack 2 3 Guarded mounting plate 2 11 Guarding 5 10 Guards 2 8 2 16 Handshake lines C 5 Handshake sequence C 6 Heat sink 1 12 Idle and initiate 8 4 IEEE 488 5 7 Connector 10 19 10 31 IEEE 488 bus overview C 1 IEEE 488 documentation requirements D 2 IEEE 754 double precision format 13 6 IEEE 754 single precision format 13 5 IFC interface clear 10 22 Input cables 1 5 Inspection 1 4 Interface available 10 2 configuration 10 3 selection 10 3 Interface function codes C 15 Interface selection 1 22 Ethernet 1 23 GPIB and language 1 23 RS 232 1 23 Interlock 2 4 2 21 Internal sweep table 5 12 Isolated LAN system using two NICs 10 30 Keyclick 1 17 Key press codes 13 10 13 11 Keys Function 1 9 Operation 1 9 Output control 1 10 Range 1 10 Special 1 9 KI 220 Language 15 1 Languages 10 3 Leakage cur
40. Model 6221 measurement process Pulse Delta measurements For Pulse Delta the Model 6221 outputs current pulses Current pulses that have a short pulse width are ideal to test a low power DUT that is heat sensitive By default Pulse Delta uses a 3 point repeating average algorithm to calculate readings Each Pulse Delta reading is calculated using A D measurements for a low pulse a high pulse and another low pulse The Model 6221 outputs the pulses and the Model 2182A performs the A D measurements As shown in Figure 5 9 every three pulses yields a single Pulse Delta voltage reading Figure 5 9 Pulse Delta 3 point measurement technique 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D B E Y Hight Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Reading Reading Reading 1st 2nd Nth 62xx l Source 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D A D A D A D A C D X Z l Low i Low High Low i Low High Low i Low High Low m dL a av m ae SL m I ist Pulse Delta 2nd Pulse Delta Nth Pulse Delta Interval Interval i Interval AG 2Y X Z 1st Pulse Delta Reading Nth Pulse Delta Reading 2 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 33 In cases where the high pulse will cause heating of the DUT the measurement at the second low pulse could be adversely affected by the heat caused by the high pulse In that case the measurement at the second
41. Press the WAVE key to arm the wave function Press TRIG to turn on the output and start generating the waveform The output will turn off after the currently set duration period has expired If the duration is set to infinite press the EXIT key to stop gen erating the waveform and turn the output off Return to Section 7 topics 7 18 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Generating a ramp waveform 1 If you intend to use fixed ranging manually set the range high enough to accommodate both the amplitude and offset setting 2 Configure the waveform as follows a j Press CONFIG then WAVE to enter the wave function configuration menu Select TYPE then press ENTER Select RAMP then press ENTER to choose a square wave To add a DC offset select OFFSET from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the offset as desired To set the duty cycle select DUTY CYCLE from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the duty cycle as desired To use the phase marker select PHASE MARKER set the STATE to ON use OUTPUT POINT to set the phase setting and OUTPUT LINE to set the trigger line Again from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu choose RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED or FIXED as desired From the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select DURATION then set the desired waveform duration From the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select AMPL UNIT then set the desired amplitude units PEAK or RMS Press EXIT to return
42. Rear panel s mmarles 5 2 Ier rette a SERERE UR HERE HE R ee eee 1 7 Heat sink and cooling vents essen nennen ener en 1 12 li vou M 1 14 Line power connection eeseesssseseeee eene eene enne entere nennen 1 14 Power up sequence ios OH ORE de de 1 15 Beeper and Key Click 1 16 Source preset e 1 17 Disabling the front panel 2 22 1 17 ee DES 1 18 CONFIG MENUS pp 1 18 Direct access menus ieee haces eO RID Pd Eni 1 19 Editing 1 20 Source and compliance editing 2 2 1 20 Menu navigation 1 20 Password ERE Ebr e acest tees 1 22 nterface selection m 1 22 GPIB and language 5 3 esesee d RR EROR E UR URS 1 23 5 232 1 23 Ethernet Model 6221 only osasista kien nene 1 23 Error and status messages 1 24 Defaultsettings H t 1 24 Front panel Setups a oane ia nente ete nent 1 24 Remote operation Setups
43. Source ranges Each source range has 596 overrange capability Each source range and its maxi mum output is listed in Table 3 1 A source range can be selected manually or autorange can be used Manual ranging A fixed source range can be selected manually using the RANGE A and y keys When selecting a fixed range select the lowest best possible range that will accommodate the output current For example if sourcing 12mA select the 20mA range Autorange For front panel operation the AUTO key is a single action control When pressed the best range is selected for the displayed source value For remote operation autorange is always active when it is enabled The Model 622x will automatically select the best lowest source range for the source value NOTE More information on Autorange is provided page 3 13 The commands for manual ranging and autorange are listed in Table 3 2 Table 3 1 Source ranges and maximum outputs Source Max Source Max Source Max Range Output Range Output Range Output 2nA 2 1nA 2 2 1 2mA 2 1mA 20nA 21nA 20A 21 20mA 21mA 200nA 210nA 200 210 100mA 105mA Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 3 Compliance The compliance setting limits the output voltage of the Model 622x The voltage compliance limit can be set from 0 1V to 105V in 10mV steps The output will not exceed the progr
44. Trigger link output pulse specifications Signal Complete TTL High 3 4V Typical TTL Low 0 25V Typical 5 5 Zu Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 15 External trigger example In asimple test system you may want to close a switching channel and source the current to a DUT connected to that channel Using sweeps the current to each DUT can be set to a different value Such a test system is shown in Figure 8 7 This example uses a Model 622x to source current to 10 different DUTs switched by a Model 7158 low current card in a Model 7001 or 7002 switch sys tem Figure 8 7 DUT test system DUT 1 E 2 E i 622 DUT 3 9 o DUT 10 27 7158 Low Current Card The trigger link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 8 8 The trig ger link of the Model 622x is connected to the trigger link IN or OUT of the switching mainframe Note that with the default trigger settings of both the switch ing mainframe and the Model 622x line 1 is an input and line 2 is an output Thus the trigger lines for one of the instruments must be changed Figure 8 8 Trigger link connections 7001 or 7002 Switch System Model 622x Model 6221 Shown INTERLOCK e e wur M Trigger Link Trigger Trigger Link Cable Link 8501 Return to Sectio
45. When using the serial poll sequence of the Model 622x to obtain the status byte also known as serial poll byte B6 is the RQS bit See Serial polling and SRQ on page 11 9 for details on using the serial poll sequence When using the STB command Table 11 3 to read the status byte B6 is the MSS bit Service request enable register The generation of a service request is controlled by the service request enable register This register is programmed by the user and is used to enable or disable the setting of bit BG RQS MSS by the status summary message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the status byte register As shown in Figure 11 3 the summary bits are logically AND ed amp with the corresponding enable bits of the service request enable register When a set 1 summary bit is AND ed with an enabled 1 bit of the enable register the logic 1 output is applied to the input of the OR gate and therefore sets the MSS RQS bit in the status byte register The individual bits of the service request enable register can be set or cleared by using the SRE common command To read the service request enable register use the SRE query command The service request enable register clears when power is cycled or a parameter value of 0 is sent with the SRE command i e SRE 0 The commands to program and read the SRQ enable register are listed in Table 11 3 Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Stat
46. on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have ceased to exist LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restores local operation of the instrument Pressing the LOCAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to normal if a user defined message was displayed If the LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inoperative Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 25 RS 232 interface reference Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using eight data bits one stop bit and no par ity When using the RS 232 interface the unit will not respond to DDC or general GPIB commands See Appendix B for RS 232 error messages RS 232 settings The procedure to select and configure the RS 232 interface is provided in Interface selection and configuration on page 10 3 Make sure the controller you connect to the Model 622x also uses these settings NOTE You can break data transmissions by sending a C or X character string to the Model 622x This clears any pending operation and discards any pending output Baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the Model 622x and the programming terminal communicate You can choose from one of the following rates 115 2k 57 6k 38 4k 19 2k 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 or 300 Th
47. on the output but it will not start the waveform Once armed and triggered in the this mode the unit will wait for an external trigger pulse on the specified trigger link line before starting the waveform Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 13 Figure 7 5 Waveform retriggering Output Waveform Trigger Accepted Waveform Aborts and Restarts Trigger Pulses A Waveform Aborts in Restart Mode Default Output Waveform Trigger Ignored Waveform Completes is Trigger Pulses B Waveform Completes in Ignore Mode Return to Section 7 topics 7 14 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Front panel wave function operation NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while wave is armed or running Attempting to do so will generate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed Using the wave function menu To configure wave functions press CONFIG then WAVE then make your selec tions from Table 7 2 See the detailed procedures for each wave function type Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 15 Table 7 2 Wave function configuration menu Menu selection Description TYPE Select waveform type SINE Select sine wave SQUARE Select square wave RAMP Select ramp wave ARBx Select user defined arbitrary wave Where x 0 to 4 OFFS Enter DC
48. or DREal parameters The response to a read command can be returned in either the ASCii or binary format Read commands are covered on page 5 15 All other queries are returned in ASCii regardless of the selected format Over the RS 232 interface only the ASCII format is allowed Return to Section 13 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes 13 5 NOTE Regardless of which data format for output strings is selected the instrument will only re spond to input commands using the ASCII for mat ASCII data format The ASCII data format is in a direct readable form for the operator Most program ming languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats How ever some speed is compromised to accommodate the conversion Figure 13 1 shows an example ASCII string that includes all the data elements Figure 13 1 also shows the byte order of the data string Data elements not speci fied by the ELEMents command are not included in the string Figure 13 1 ASCII data format UNITs 2 SOURce COMPliance 1 23456789E 03VDC 0 000SECS 1 2345e 06ADC 1 23456789E 03VDC xCMPL 00001RDNG T READing TSTamp AVOLtage RNUMber An overflow reading is displayed as 9 9E37 2 Units for delta readings VDC DC Volts Q z Ohms Watts S Siemens The average voltage data element is only available for Differential Conductance
49. page 7 10 Frequency 1mHz to 100kHz page 7 5 Amplitude 1pA to 105mA peak page 7 5 Range 2nA to 100mA page 7 5 Offset 0 to 105 page 7 6 Duty cycle 0 to 100 page 7 7 Phase marker 0 to 360 page 7 9 Duration 100ns to 999999 999s page 7 10 Arbitrary wave Frequency 1mHz to 100kHz page 7 5 Amplitude 1pA to 105mA peak page 7 5 Range 2nA to 100mA page 7 5 Offset 0 to 105mA page 7 6 Number of points 2 to 65 535 Phase marker 0 to 360 page 7 9 Duration 100ns to 999999 999s page 7 10 Return to Section 7 topics 7 3 7 4 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Setting waveform parameters Editing parameters The AMPL and FREQ keys also function as left arrow and right arrow keys respectively when editing a numeric value or scrolling through menu Examples Press FREQ while editing the 1 s digit on 001000 000 Hz line Press FREQ again while the 0 is flashing and the cursor moves to the 0 1 place Press AMPL and the 100 s place is flashing for Amplitude Press AMPL to edit the sign or FREQ to edit the 10 s place Amplitude and offset editing The Model 6221 amplitude and offset menus are coupled and follow special rules for editing To change amplitude press the AMPL key use the arrow keys to select a digit and use the knob to change the value The range up and down arrows are used to change the amplitude range Once you have selected
50. parameters also changes others The following is a list of coupled commands When SPAN or CENTer changes SPAN SPAN CENTer CENTer STOP CENTer SPAN 2 STARt CENTer SPAN 2 SWEep POINts SWEep POINts STEP SPAN SWEep POINts 1 When STARt or STOP changes STARt STARt STOP 2 STOP CENTer STARt STOP 2 SPAN STARt SWEep POINts SWEep POINts STEP SPAN SWEep POINIs 1 When SWEep POINts changes STARt STARt STOP STOP CENTer CENTer SPAN SPAN STEP SPAN SWEep POINIs 1 When STEP changes STARt STARt STOP STOP CENTer CENTer SPAN SPAN SWEep POINts SPAN STEP 1 When spacing is set to LOG POINts DECADE SWEep POINts 1 SPAN in decades Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 23 Sweep status model events Three status model events are available for monitoring sweep progress all of which set bits in the Operation Condition Register see Section 11 for complete details on the status model Table 4 6 summarizes the sweep status bits in the Operation Condition Register Table 4 6 Sweep status model bits Bit Status event 1 122 Sweep done 2 123 Sweep aborted 3 124 Device sweeping The Device Sweeping event is set at each point in the sweep so queries of the Operation event register STAT OPER EVEN will continue to show this bit set throughout the entire sweep Note howe
51. time and pulse off time during a Pulse Delta cycle For example for a 25 duty cycle the pulse would be on high for one quarter of the cycle and off OmA low for three quarters of the cycle Pulse Delta cycles with a short duty cycle can be sourced to prevent heat from adversely affecting the measurement of low power DUT When using a OmA low level which is the default the duty cycle for the Pulse Delta cycle is calculated as follows PulseWidth PulseDeltaCycle 108 DutyCycle Where DutyCycle Duty cycle expressed as a percent PulseWidth User specified Pulse Width in seconds PulseDeltaCycle Time period in seconds for each Pulse Delta cycle see Pulse Delta cycle time period Pulse Delta cycle time period Sweep output The time period for each Pulse Delta cycle is the same as the sweep delay time that is set by the user when configuring the sweep Fixed output The Pulse Delta cycle interval is expressed as the number of power line cycles PLC This PLC value must be converted into time seconds as follows For 60Hz line power Pulse Delta cycle time period Interval setting PLC x 16 667ms For 50Hz line power Pulse Delta cycle time period Interval setting PLC x 20ms Example For 60Hz line power the Pulse Delta cycle time period for an Interval setting of 5 PLC is calculated as follows Pulse Delta cycle time period 5 x 16 667ms 83 33ms Configuration settin
52. 000000 001 s Timestamp B Use EDIT LOCAL key to display buffer statistics EDIT i E LOCAL 9 Min PK Pk 5 Avg gt Std Dev gt Buffer Readings For remote programming the commands to recall delta readings and statistics are documented in Table 6 4 The following example demonstrates the command sequence read buffer readings and statistics Example Request all stored delta readings and calculate and return the mean average TRACe DATA Request all stored delta readings CALC2 FORMat MEAN Select the mean buffer calculation CALC2 STATe ON Enable buffer calculation CALC2 IMMediate Perform the mean calculation CALC2 DATA Request the result of the mean calculation Remote programming Buffer The commands associated with buffer operation are listed in Table 6 4 Return to Section 6 topics 6 16 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 6 4 Buffer commands Command Description Default TRACe CLEar Clear readings from buffer Note 1 TRACe FREE Query memory bytes available in buffer TRACe POINts n Specify buffer size number of readings to store Note 2 n 1 to 65536 TRACe POINTs ACTual Query number readings stored in the buffer TRACe NOTify lt NRf gt Specify number of stored readings that will set the Note Trace Notify bit B6 of the measurement event register Must be less than the TRACe POINts value lt NRf gt
53. 1 A binary pattern of 0000 will appear on the digital I O lines when the source is not in compliance limit test passes and the FAIL query will return a 0 Return to Section 9 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Limit Test and Digital O 9 3 SCPI commands limit testing Limit test commands are listed in Table 9 3 Additional information for each com mand is provided in notes that follow the tables Table 9 1 Limit test commands Command Description Default CALCulate3 LIMit 1 STATe lt b gt Enable disable limit 1 test OFF lt b gt ON or OFF CALCulate3 LIMit 1 SOURce2 NRf Set limit test fail pattern 15 lt NRf gt 0 to 15 1111 CALCulate3 LIMit 1 FAIL Query limit test pass fail 3 0 PASS 1 FAIL 1 CALC3 LIM STAT lt b gt Enable disable limit 1 compliance test This command turns limit testing ON 1 or OFF 0 2 CALC3 LIM SOUR2 lt NRf gt Set I O fail pattern This command specifies the four bit digital output value 0 to 15 used when the limit test fails i e whenever the source goes into compliance When not in compliance all lines will be off output pattern of 0 unless otherwise con trolled by the CALCulate3 FORCe STATe command discussed on page 9 9 Digital I O port fail pattern values are shown in Table 9 2 3 CALC3 LIM FAIL Query limit fail pass This query returns result of the limit test 0 PASS 1 FAIL Return to Section 9 to
54. 1 to TRAC POIN 1 TRACe FEED name Select source feed for buffer readings CALC1 name SENS1 CALC1 or NONE TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt Set buffer control NEV lt name gt NEXT or NEVer TRACe TSTamp FORMat name Select timestamp format ABS lt name gt ABSolute or DELTa TRACe DATA Request all readings in buffer 5 TRACe DATA TYPE Query type of readings stored in buffer Returns NONE DELT DCON or PULS TRACe DATA SELected start Request list of stored readings lt count gt Requires a start value and count value FORMat ELEMents lt list gt Specify data elements for TRACe DATA response READ lt list gt READing TSTamp UNITs RNUMber TST SOURce COMPliance AVOLtage Also accepts DEFault or ALL CALCulate2 FORMat lt name gt Select buffer statistic MEAN name MEAN SDEViation MAXimum MINimum or PKPK 8 CALCulate2 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable calculation OFF CALCulate2 IMMediate CALCulate2 DATA lt b gt ON or OFF Perform the selected calculation on buffer readings Read the result of the buffer statistic Notes 1 SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the TRACe commands in this table The listed defaults are power on defaults 2 The buffer size is set to equal the number of delta readings to be performed see Buffer size on page 6 12 3 The default parameter is one half the set buffer size TRACe POINts 2 Return
55. 14 7 Table 14 5 Sense command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI SENSe 1 Commands for readings from 2182 2182A 5 DATA Pre math readings LATest Return the latest pre math delta reading FRESh Same as LATest except the reading can only be returned once AVERage Averaging filter 6 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter control MOVing or REPeat MOV TCONtrol Query filter control WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window as of range 0 to 10 0 00 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt NRf gt Specify filter count size 2 to 300 10 COUNt Query filter count size STATe lt b gt Enable or disable averaging filter OFF STATe Query state on or off of averaging filter Return to Section 14 topics 14 8 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 6 Source command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI SOURce 1 Current source output commands CLEar Clearing the current source 3 IMMediate Set output to zero and then turn the output off CURRent Current source LEVel 9 IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt Set current source output amps 105e 3 to 0 0 105e 3 RANGe lt n gt Select a fixed source range 105e 3 to 105e 3 100e 3 3 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable source auto range OFF AUTO Query state of auto range RANGe Query present source range COMPliance lt NRf gt Set voltage complia
56. 2 to 10mA in 2mA steps Linear Scale Step 2mA set by the user A Stop110mA Low OmA LO H LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO HI LO eR gt i One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay B Logarithmic sweep pulse train 1 to 10mA using 5 logarithmic Logrithmic E Log Step is calculated and set by the 622x n 10mA Stop 10mA ia 5 6234mA Log Step 3 1623mA 109 Step 1 7783 Log step Start Low OmA LO HI LO LO HI LO LO HI LO LO LO LO HI LO gt One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay i Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay C Custom sweep pulse train 1mA 2mA 4mA 8mA and 16mA 5 points Linear Scale t 16mA m 16 8mA 4mA 1mA 2mA Low OmA LO HI LO LO HI LO LO LO LO LO LO HI LO E gt gt gt 4 gt i One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle One Pulse Delta Cycle Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Sweep Delay Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 39 Duty cycle Duty cycle defines the ratio between pulse on
57. 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for each measurement conversion B Double precision data format 64 data bits Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Bytes 3 4 5 and 6 not shown sign bit 0 positive 1 negative exponent bits 11 5 f fraction bits 52 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 8 Byte 7 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for each measurement conversion Return to Section 13 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes 13 7 FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Parameters READing Reading Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance TSTamp Timestamp UNITs Measurement units RNUMber Reading number SOURce Current source level COMPliance State of compliance AVOLtage Average voltage Differential Conductance ALL Include all of the above elements DEFault Includes READing and TSTamp only The specified elements are included in the data string in response to a read com mand Read commands are covered on page 5 15 Elements not specified are not included in the returned data string Each element in the item list must be separated by a comma e g send FORM ELEM READ TST UNIT SOUR AVOL COMP RNUM to include all ele ments in the string The elements for the ASCii format are shown in Figure 13 1 To include all the data elements the ALL parameter can be used To inclu
58. 30 default 12 Selects handshaking lt name gt IBFull RFR or OFF Sets flow control 4 lt name gt XON or OFF Sets output terminator lt name gt CR LF CRLF or LFCR Sets baud rate n 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2k 38 4K 57 6K or 115 2K Sends data via RS 232 7 Reads data from serial port Takes 622x out of remote Puts 622x in remote Enables or disables local lockout b ON or OFF Return to Section 10 topics 10 8 Remote Operations Table 10 2 cont Remote interface configuration commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Command Description Ethernet interface commands 6221 only SYSTem COMMu SYSTem COMMu SYSTem COMMu SYSTem COMMu SYSTem COMMu SYSTem COMMu nicate nicate nicate nicate nicate nicate Password commands SYSTem PASSword CENable ETH Hernet Hernet Hernet Hernet Hernet ADDRess lt string gt MASK lt string gt GATeway lt string gt DHCP lt b gt MAC SAVE lt string gt SYSTem PASSword CDISable lt string gt SYSTem PASSword ENABle lt b gt SYSTem PASSword STATe SYSTem PASSword NEW lt string gt Sets IP address of 6221 10 lt string gt n n n n Sets subnet mask of 6221 11 lt string gt n n n n Sets Ethernet gateway of 6221 12 lt string gt n n n n En
59. 488 Bus Overview Appendix topics Introduction page C 2 Bus description page C 3 Bus lines page C 4 Data lines page C 5 Bus management lines page C 5 Handshake lines page C 5 Bus commands page C 6 Uniline commands page C 9 Universal multiline commands page C 9 Addressed multiline commands page C 10 Address commands page C 10 Unaddress commands page C 11 Common commands page C 11 SCPI commands page C 11 Command codes page C 12 Typical command sequences page C 12 IEEE command groups page C 14 Interface function codes page C 15 C 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction The IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a computer When a computer is used on the bus it serves as a Supervisor of the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the control ler consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output information as a listener a device will receive informa tion To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the con troller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen to the talker are addressed to listen by the controlle
60. 6220 6221 Reference Manual To Other Devices Data Bus qe Data Byte Transfer Control General Interface Management DIO 1 8 Data 8 Lines DAV NRFD Handshake NDAC IFC ATN Ane Management EOI The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and commands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts representing a logic 1 true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 5 Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses eight data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bi directional The data lines operate with low true logic Bus management lines The five bus management lines help to ensure proper interface control and man agement These lines are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN state determines how information on the data bus is to be interpreted IFC Interface Clear The IFC line controls clearing of instruments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to pl
61. 622x will go to the lowest range that can source that value For example If you are going to source 25 let n 25e 3 The 100mA range will be selected 2 Selecting a fixed source range disables autorange 3 The output must be off in order change the output response Sending this command while the output is on will generate error 220 Execution Error 4 OUTP OFF turns the output off but does change the set output level SOUR CLE sets the out put level to zero and then turns the output off Programming example The following programming example shows a typical command sequence to con figure and control the DC output CLEar Turns the output off CURRent RANGe AUTO ON Enables autorange CURRent 12e 3 Sets output level to 12mA CURRent COMPliance 10 Sets voltage compliance to 10V OUTPut ON Turns the output on OUTPut OFF Turns the output off Return to Section 3 topics 3 18 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 3 topics 4 sweeps Section 4 topics Overview page 4 2 Remote sweep operation page 4 14 Section overview page 4 2 Running a linear staircase sweep page 4 15 Sweep overview page 4 2 Running a log staircase sweep page 4 16 Running a custom sweep page 4 17 Sweep characteristics page 4 4 SCPI commands sweeps page 4 18 Linear staircase sweeps page 4 4 Coupled sweep commands page 4 22 Logarithmic staircase sweeps page 4 5 Sweep sta
62. Arm 1 diat GPIB ab Sweep Layer Timer Count Controls Manual 1 Entire TLink Sweep USTest Output fISTest Trigger On Off Li ee oo ee qd Output Trigger TL Enter Trigger M icu Layer Controls Sweep Steps Another Trigger 2 Sweep Parameters Determine Number of Steps Trigger Event Detector Source On Off Output Trigger Delay On Off Sweep Step Occurs During Device Action Device Acti Factory Default gt Output Trigger Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote trigger model Triggering 8 3 The trigger model for remote operation is shown in Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Trigger model for remote operation See Note ARM SOURce IMMediate ARM SOURce BUS ARM SOURce ARM SOURce MANual ARM SOURce TLINk ARM SOURce NSTest ARM SOURce PSTest ARM SOURce BSTest ARM OUTPut TENTer NONE ACCeptor Arm Event Detector gt i SOURce TRIGger DIRection ACCeptor Trigger Event Detector TRIGger SOURce IMMediate TRIGger SOURce TLINk TRIGger SIGNal Device Action Note The following commands place the Model 622x into idle ABORT RST SYSTem PRESet RCL lt NRf gt DCL and SDC Sweep Step Occurs During Device Action Return to Section 8 topics Arm Layer Controls Entire Sweep SOURce SWEep COUNt n 1 ARM OUTPut E gt TEXit Trig
63. B4 page 11 11 402 Output blocked by interlock Standard B4 page 11 11 403 Not allowed with output on Standard B4 page 11 11 404 Not allowed with wave armed Standard B4 page 11 11 405 Amplitude changed to fit range Standard B4 page 11 11 406 Offset changed to fit range Standard B4 page 11 11 407 Wave ampl offset range error Standard B4 page 11 11 408 Diff Conductance truncated Standard B4 page 11 11 409 Pulse width or sdelay error Standard B4 page 11 11 410 Model 2182A required Standard B4 page 11 11 411 Diff Conductance step error Standard B4 page 11 11 412 Diff Conductance upranged Standard B4 page 11 11 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Error and Status Messages 5 Status Model Code Description Register Bit Reference 413 Not allowed with mode armed Standard B4 page 11 11 414 Src delay gt 55us recommended Standard B4 page 11 11 4415 Src delay gt 500us recommended Standard B4 page 11 11 416 Step size too small Standard B4 page 11 11 417 Output exceeds range limit Standard B4 page 11 11 418 Not allowed with Pulse armed Standard B4 page 11 11 419 Trigger link cable not connected Standard B4 page 11 11 420 Log sweep zero adjusted Standard B4 page 11 11 500 Date of calibration not set Standard page 11 11 501 Next date of calibration not set Standard page 11 11 502
64. CALC1 DATA FRESh 622x Compliance Test CALC2 LIMit COMP SOUR2 STATe FAIL TRACe FEED CALC1 Y 622x Recall 622x Buffer Display D Y TRACe DATA TRACe DATA SELected start count CALC3 DATA Return to Section 5 topics Read Commands A Read pre math readings B Read post math readings C Read test result for source compliance test D Read buffer readings and buffer statistics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 15 Read commands Figure 5 6B also shows the read commands that can be used for remote programming A Pre math readings SENSe 1 DATA LATest SENSe 1 DATA FRESh While Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is running the SENS DATA LATest command can be sent to read the latest last pre math reading processed by the Model 622x The returned reading will be filtered if the averaging filter is enabled If this read command is sent before a new reading is available the last reading will again be returned The SENS DATA FRESh command is the same as the SENS DATA LATest command except that once a reading is returned it cannot be returned again This read command guarantees that each reading gets returned only once If a new fresh reading is not available when SENS DATA FRESh is sent error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur B Post math readings CALCulate 1 DATA LATest CALCulate 1 DATA FR
65. Calibration 17 3 Calibration requirements Be sure that you perform calibration Under the proper environmental conditions After the specified warm up period Using the correct line voltage Using the proper test equipment Using the specified reading limits Environmental conditions Conduct the calibration procedures in a test environment that has An ambient temperature of 18 to 28 C 65 to 82 F A relative humidity of less than 70 unless otherwise noted Warm up period Allow the Model 622x to warm up for at least one hour before performing calibra tion If the instrument has been subjected to temperature extremes those outside the ranges stated above allow additional time for the instrument s internal tempera ture to stabilize Allow one extra hour to stabilize a unit that is 10 C 18 F outside the specified temperature range Also allow the test equipment to warm up for the minimum time specified by the manufacturer Line power The Model 622x requires a line voltage of 100V to 240V and a line frequency of 50Hz to 60Hz Return to Section 17 topics 17 4 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Recommended calibration equipment Table 17 1 summarizes recommended calibration equipment specifications and typical models Ideally equipment uncertainty should be at least four times better than equivalent Model 6220 6221 specifications However the equipment listed for the 2nA and 20nA ra
66. Calibration data invalid Standard page 11 11 503 DAC calibration overflow Standard page 11 11 504 DAC calibration underflow Standard page 11 11 505 Source offset data invalid Standard page 11 11 506 Source gain data invalid Standard page 11 11 4507 Sense offset data invalid Standard page 11 11 4508 Sense gain data invalid Standard page 11 11 509 Not permitted with cal locked Standard page 11 11 510 Not permitted with cal un locked Standard page 11 11 511 GPIB address lost Standard page 11 11 4512 Power on state lost Standard page 11 11 4513 Guard offset data invalid Standard page 11 11 4514 DC calibration data lost Standard page 11 11 515 Calibration dates lost Standard page 11 11 516 Not allowed when in compliance Standard page 11 11 517 Notallowed unless in compliance Standard page 11 11 4518 Must cal lower four points first Standard page 11 11 4522 GPIB Comm language lost error Standard page 11 11 4523 ARB Wave Data Lost Error Standard page 11 11 524 ARB Wave Data Empty Error Standard 11 11 525 save ARBO as user setup Standard page 11 11 4526 Wave offset data invalid Standard page 11 11 4527 Wave gain data invalid Standard page 11 11 4527 Cannot save CUSTOM sweep setup Standard page 11 11 550 Uninitialized Ethernet Module 6221 only Stand
67. Changing the m or b for mX b also changes it for m X b Configuring and controlling mX b and m X b To configure and control either of these math calculations perform the following steps 1 Press CONFIG and then MATH to enter the math configuration menu 2 From the math menu use the edit controls to select NONE no math MX B M X B Selecting NONE exits the menu structure 3 After selecting a math calculation the present scale factor will be displayed factory default is M 41 000000 4 Use the edit controls to set the scale factor digits range multiplier and toggle the polarity sign Range multipliers P 10712 n 109 u 109 103 100 K 103 M 109 G 109 T 1012 5 Press ENTER to enter the M value and display the offset B value factory default is B 0 000000 P 6 Key in the offset value 7 Press ENTER to set the B value and exit the menu 8 To enable math press the MATH key from the normal display The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the calculation will be displayed Return to Section 6 topics 6 10 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote programming Math Commands for mX b and m X b math calculations are listed in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Math commands Command Description Default CALCulate 1 FORMat lt name gt Select math format MXB lt name gt NONE MXB or RECiproc
68. DUT 2 15 Connectors Digital I O 1 11 Ethernet 1 11 Guard 1 12 IEEE 488 1 11 10 31 Interlock 1 12 LO 1 12 Output 1 11 Power module 1 12 RS 232 1 11 Trigger Link 1 12 Contact information 1 3 Control sources 8 5 Controlling 9 7 Cooling vents 1 12 Custom sweep 4 6 Data and stop bits 10 25 Data elements 13 7 Data flow 5 13 5 14 Data lines C 5 DCL device clear 10 23 DDC emulation commands 15 2 DDC language 10 3 Default settings 1 24 1 26 Delta 5 2 5 20 Arming process 5 24 Configuration 5 24 Measurement technique 5 21 Measurement units 5 23 Operation 5 27 Setup commands 5 30 Triggering sequence 5 25 Differential Conductance 5 2 5 51 Arming process 5 56 Average Voltage 5 54 Calculations 5 53 Configuration 5 55 Measurement process 5 51 Measurement units 5 54 Operation 5 59 Power 5 54 Setup commands 5 64 Triggering sequence 5 58 Digital 9 5 9 6 Disabling front panel 1 17 Display commands 13 2 DUT test connections Guarding 5 8 Editing 1 20 Compliance 1 20 Source 1 20 Enable registers 11 5 Error and status messages 1 24 10 24 Error codes delta 5 18 Error messages 2 Error queue 11 20 Ethernet Connections 10 31 Settings 10 33 Standards 10 29 Status LEDs 10 32 Ethernet 6221 5 7 Ethernet systems 10 29 Event detectors 8 5 Event registers 11 18 Features 1 2 Floating connections 2 19 Floating the current source 2 13 Flow control RS 232 signal handshaking 10 26
69. Description STATus STATus subsystem OPERation CONDition Read operation condition register MEASurement CONDition Read measurement condition register QUEStionable CONDition Read questionable condition register Return to Section 11 topics 11 18 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Event registers As Figure 11 1 shows each status register set has an event register When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset Reading an event register clears the bits of that reg ister CLS resets all four event registers The commands to read the event registers are listed in Table 11 5 For details on reading registers see Reading registers on page 11 6 Table 11 5 Common and SCPI commands event registers Command Description ESR Read standard event status register STATus STATus subsystem OPERation EVENt Read operation event register MEASurement EVENt Read measurement event register QUEStionable EVENt Read questionable event register Note Power up and CLS resets all bits of all event registers to 0 STATus PRESet has no effect Event enable registers As Figure 11 1 shows each status register set has an enable register Each event register bit is logically AND ed amp to a corresponding enable bit of an enable reg ister Therefore when an event bit is set and the corresponding enab
70. FILT annunciator will flash until 10 new readings fill the stack Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 7 Figure 6 2 Filter window Voltage 1 of range B Window Violation 1 of range BPI III 1 of range Integrated Time m i ox ee T Ts T Ts Te 5 Tg To T 0 Conversion R t 5 re Bs By Bs Filter Type Moving 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 1 2 4 Filter Window None M As By By A B B Count 5 A A A A A As By dq ee ae ee eg Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Conversion Ay As B B B B Filter Type Moving As B Bi By B B Filter Window 1 i As A B B B B A A A A A A B Count 5 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 Ay A B B B B B Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Conversion As B B B Filter Type Repeating Ay As B B B B Filter Window None As B B Count 5
71. Keithley 622x Current Source Keithley 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter TRIGGER iEEE 488 LINK iEEE 488 ETHERNET RS 232 TRIGGER LINK RS 232 Cable null modem male to male 8501 Trigger Link Cable Connections PC control system System connections for this configuration are shown in Figure 5 4 RS 232 and Trigger Link This system configuration uses the same RS 232 and Trigger Link connections that are used for stand alone operation See Connec tions stand alone system for details on these system connections IEEE 488 or Ethernet 6221 This system configuration uses a PC to communi cate with the Model 622x For the Model 6220 the IEEE 488 bus interface can be used For the Model 6221 the IEEE 488 bus or the Ethernet can be used For the Ethernet make sure to use a cross over Ethernet cable for direct connection to the PC Return to Section 5 topics 5 8 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 4 System connections PC control of Model 622x Keithley 622x Current Source Keithley 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter 6220 GPIB selected 6221 GPIB or Ethernet selected iEEE 488 ETHERNET RS 232 Cable null modem male to male 8501 Trigger Link Cable IEEE 488 Cable Ethernet Cross over Cable RJ 45 male male 6221 only DUT test connections WARNING Before making or breaking test connections the Models 622x and 2182 2182A must be t
72. LFCR SYST COMM SER BAUD n Set baud rate Sets RS 232 baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2k default 38 4K 57 6K or 115 2K The following two commands cannot be sent to the Model 622x over the RS 232 interface but instead make use of the instrument to send and receive data through the GPIB or 6221 Ethernet interface via the 622x RS 232 port to another instrument such as a Model 2182 purchased separately 7 10 11 SYST COMM SER SEND lt data gt Send serial data Sends data from one instrument to another through the serial port Strings such as commands to another instrument must be delineated with quotes SYST COMM SER ENT lt name gt Read serial data Reads data from another instrument through the serial port SYST LOC Take unit out of remote SYST REM Put unit in remote SYST RWL lt b gt Enable disable local lockout These three commands work with the RS 232 interface only REMote is the same as the IEEE 488 REN command and puts the unit in remote LOCal works like the IEEE 488 GTL command and takes it out of remote and returns it local RWLock is similar to the IEEE 488 LLO command and enables or dis ables local lockout See General IEEE 488 bus commands on page 10 22 for more information SYST COMM ETH ADDR lt string gt Set IP address This command sets the IP address of the Model 6221 The address parame ter is of the form n n n n where each n is a dec
73. Model 6221 is armed when the message DIFF COND ARMED Press TRIG to start is displayed briefly and the ARM annunciator turns on On the Model 622x press the TRIG key to start taking Differential Conduc tance readings and send them to the buffer Differential Conductance measurements will stop after the last A D measurement is performed However Differential Conductance remains armed and can be run again by pressing the TRIG key The new Differential Conductance readings will overwrite the old readings in the buffer When finished press EXIT to disarm Differential Conductance On the Model 622x press RECALL to access the Differential Conductance readings stored in the buffer Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 61 Operation PC control The system configuration for PC control of the Model 622x is shown in Figure 5 2B 1 Connections are shown in the following illustrations All power must be removed from all components in the system before making connections Figure 5 4 page 5 8 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 Test connections 2 Configure communications for the Models 2182 2182A and 622x as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 3 On the Model 2182 21824 select the desired measurement range and integration rate These Model 2182 21824 settings can be made from the front panel or remote programming can be used Ra
74. Multi unit connections Instrument Instrument Model 622x Controller To avoid possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromag netic radiation use only shielded IEEE 488 ca bles Available shielded cables from Keithley are Models 7006 7007 and 7708 To connect the Model 622x to the IEEE 488 bus follow these steps 1 Line up the cable connector with the connector located on the rear panel The connector is designed so it will fit only one way Figure 10 3 shows the location of the IEEE 488 connector Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 21 Figure 10 3 IEEE 488 Ethernet 6221 only and RS 232 connector locations me DUNT IL um 10 GUARD 9 gus Line Fuse TSA 250V LINE RATING CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS ETHERNET 50 60 WITH FRONT PANEL MENU 10 100 BaseT TRIGGER 50 60Hz Link Act 100517 Rs 232 LINK ommo IEEE 488 Ethernet RS 232 Connector Connector Connector 6221 Only 2 Tighten the screws securely making sure not to over tighten them 3 Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application 4 Make sure the other end of the cable is properly connected to the controller Most controllers are equipped with an IEEE 488 style co
75. Pi 1kQ 2 Coil y 5V to 33V Pull Up Digital Output 1 Resistor Flyback Diode 7 e N Pin 1 Digital Output 1 LA 4 e Pin 9 Digital Ground Equivalent Circuit Flyback Relay L External Power Diode Coil 7 5V to 33V Transistor Switch Return to Section 9 topics 9 8 Limit Test and Digital I O Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Source mode logic control The digital outputs can be used as logic inputs to active TTL low power TTL or CMOS inputs For this mode of operation the output lines can source up to 5mA Figure 9 5 shows how to connect a logic device to one of the output lines When the output line is set HI the transistor will turn off transistor switch open to pro vide a reliable logic high output gt 3 75V When the output line is set LO the tran sistor turns on transistor switch closed to route current to digital ground As a result a low logic output OV is provided at the output If the second input B of the NAND gate is connected to another output line of the port the output of the NAND gate will go to logic 0 when both digital outputs are set HI Figure 9 5 NAND gate control Model 622x 5V Logic 1kQ Pull Up _ Device Resistor B Z NAND Y Pin 1 P e e A m u Pin 9 e V Setting digital output lines Digital output lines are set by selecting a decimal value 0 to 15 that corresponds to the 4 bit BCD
76. Pulse Delta is armed Count The Pulse Delta count specifies the number of Pulse Delta intervals to perform Each pulse interval yields one Pulse Delta voltage reading A finite number 1 to 65 536 can be set or count can be set to Infinity With Infinity set Pulse Delta will run continuously The default setting for count is Infinity Ranging For Pulse Delta the source range can be set for BEST default setting or FIXED With BEST ranging selected the Model 6221 will select the optimum lowest range that will support both the low and high pulse levels For example if pulse low is 12mA and pulse high is 10mA then the 100mA source range will be used With FIXED ranging selected the source remains on whatever range is presently selected before arming Pulse Delta If the selected range is too low error 221 Settings Conflict will occur For remote programming there are two separate commands to set range Use the SOUR PDEL RANG command to set range for a fixed output and use the SOUR SWE RANG command for the pulse sweep output Details on these com mands are provided in Table 5 4 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 41 Interval The Pulse Delta cycle time period interval is expressed as a number of power line cycles PLC For 60Hz one PLC is 16 667ms and for 50Hz one PLC is 20ms Interval can be set from 5 PLC default setting to 999999 PLC
77. RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD ready to send RTS clear to send CTS and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard Figure 10 4 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 10 5 shows the pinout for the connector The connector location on the rear panel is shown in Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 RS 232 interface connector 54321 9876 RS232 Rear Panel Connector If your computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem Table 10 6 provides pinout identifi cation for the 9 pin DB 9 or 25 pin DB 25 serial port connector on the computer PC Table 10 5 RS 232 connector pinout Pin number Description No connection TXD transmit data RXD receive data No connection GND signal ground Not used RTS ready to send CTS clear to send o AON Oo amp CO I No connection Return to Section 10 topics 10 28 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 10 6 PC serial port pinout DB 9 DB 25 Signal pin number pin number DCD data carrier detect 1 8 RXD receive data 2 3 TXD transmit data 3 2 DTR data terminal ready 4 20 GND signal ground 5 7 DSR data set ready 6 RTS ready to send 7 4 CTS clear to s
78. SCG 60 7F 96 127 UNL 3F 63 UNT 5F 95 Typical command sequences For the various multiline commands a specific bus sequence must take place to properly send the command In particular the correct listen address must be sent to the instrument before it will respond to addressed commands Table C 4 lists a typical bus sequence for sending the addressed multiline commands In this instance the SDC command is being sent to the instrument UNL is generally sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active listeners are present Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 13 Note that ATN is true for both the listen command and the SDC command byte itself Table C 4 Typical bus sequence Data bus Com Step mand ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 2C 44 3 SDC Stays low EOT 04 4 4 Returns high Assumes primary address 12 Table C 5 gives a typical common command sequence In this instance ATN is true while the instrument is being addressed but it is set high while sending the common command string Table C 5 Typical addressed command sequence Data bus Com Step mand ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 2C 44 3 Data Set high 2 42 4 Data Stays high R 52 82 5 Data Stays high S 53 83 6 Data Stays high T 54 84 Assumes pri
79. SCPI Reference Tables Section 14 topics Calculate command summary page 14 3 Display command summary page 14 5 Format command summary page 14 6 Output command summary page 14 6 Sense command summary page 14 7 Source command summary page 14 8 Status command summary page 14 13 System command summary page 14 14 Trace command summary page 14 16 Trigger command summary page 14 17 Units command summary page 14 18 14 2 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual General notes Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional characters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the program message Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message The Boolean parameter b is used to enable or disable an instrument oper ation 1 or ON enables the operation and 0 or OFF disables the operation Uppercase characters indicated the short form version for each command word Table Headings Command and Description Lists and briefly explains each unabridged SCPI command word and its parameters Default Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRESet defaults unless noted otherwise Parameter notes are located at the end of each table Sec Refers you to the section Sec that provides operation informa tion for that command or command subsystem SCPI A chec
80. SYST PASS CDIS DEFAULT SYST PASS ENAB lt b gt Enable disable password Use this command to enable or disable the use of a password Disabling the use of a password enables all protected commands For example to enable the password send this command SYST PASS ENAB ON Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 19 20 Remote Operations 10 11 SYST PASS STAT Query state of password This query requests the state of password protection O will be returned if password protected commands are disabled 1 will be returned if the pass word protected commands are enabled SYST PASS NEW lt string gt Set new password Use this command to set a new password The password is case sensitive and can include both standard ASCII and non ASCII characters from 1 to 255 It must be enclosed in quotes For example to change the password to PASSWORD send this command SYST PASS NEW PASSWORD Note that the password and command protection state are not affected by RST or SYSTem PRESet Table 10 3 Unprotected commands and queries Common commands SCPI commands OUTP STAT OFF ESR OUTP STAT IDN STAT QUE NEXT OPC SYST ABO REV OPC SYST DBO REV OPT SYST ABO SNUM SRE SYST DBO SNUM SRE SYST ERR STB SYST LFR WAI SYST LOC SYST PASS CDIS SYST PASS CEN SYST PASS CEN STAT SYST REM SYST VER Return to Section 10 to
81. SYSTem KEY 29 The keypress codes for the Model 6220 are also shown in Figure 13 3 The keypress codes for the Model 6220 are also shown in Figure 13 4 The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent and Model 622X is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed is sent to the computer Figure 13 3 Model 6220 key press codes 8 15 22 29 5 12 19 26 2 1 20 PRECISION QURRENT SQ I Y MODE Y EDIT Cy LOCAL Q Q Q RANGE 1 3 5 CONFIG 2 2 AUTO comm ADDR DISP TRIG UNITS RECALL 4 gt POWER 6 7 8 9 0000 R RANGE 5 save serue ave 31 7 14 21 28 4 11 18 17 24 23 306 1320 273 10 9 Return to Section 13 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes 13 11 Figure 13 4 Model 6221 key press codes 8 15 22 29 5 12 19 26 2 1 43 33 45 LOCAL O CURSOR RANGE core ex gem ose me Cars m Came POWER RANGE OUTPUT E Gu a me men EE amp see sere BRL AG Q 16 31 7 14 21 28 4 11 18 17 40 39 23 30 6 13 20 27 3 10 9 24 Return to Section 13 topics 13 12 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 13 topics 14
82. Select the compliance display field then set the voltage compliance as appropriate for expected sweep parameters Configure the sweep as follows a Press CONFIG then SWP to enter the sweep configuration menu b Select TYPE then press ENTER c Select STAIR and then press ENTER to choose a linear staircase sweep d Atthe prompts enter the desired START STOP STEP and DELAY values e Fromthe CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER and then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired f Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST AUTO or FIXED as appropriate g From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select COMPLIANCE ABORT press ENTER then choose to abort YES or not to abort NO the sweep if compliance is reached while the sweep is in progress h Press EXIT to return to normal display Run sweep a Press the SWP key to arm the sweep The output will turn on b Press TRIG to start the sweep c Press EXIT to abort the sweep before it is finished d Turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key when the sweep is finished Return to Section 4 topics 4 12 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Performing a log staircase sweep 1 Configure source functions a If desired set the bias current output current prior to the start of the sweep by pressing the DC key and then setting the current to the desired value b Select the compliance
83. Specify data format ASCii REAL 32 SREal ASC DREal or REAL 64 DATA Query data format ELEMents lt item list gt Specify data elements READing TSTamp READ UNITs RNUMber SOURce COMPliance TST AVOLtage or ALL or DEFault ELEMents Query data format elements BORDer lt name gt Specify byte order NORMal or SWAPped Note BORDer Query byte order SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status registers ASCii 11 ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BINary SREGister Query format for reading status registers Note RST default is NORMal SYSTem PRESet default is SWAPped Table 14 4 Output command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI OUTPut 1 Source output control commands STATe b Turn output on or off standby OFF a STATe Query state on or off of output LTEarth lt b gt Connect output low to earth ground ON or float OFF 2 output low OFF LTEarth Query output low connection ISHield lt name gt Connect triax inner shield to OLOW output low OLOW 2 or cable GUARd 15 Query triax inner shield connection RESPonse lt name gt Set the output response for 6221 FAST or SLOW FAST 2 RESPonse Query output response INTerlock Interlock 2 TRIPped Returns a 0 if interlock is tripped open or a 1 if interlock is closed output enabled Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables
84. TRIGGER LINK connector The trigger link has six lines At the factory line 2 is selected for out put triggers and line 1 is selected for input triggers These input output assign ments can be changed as previously explained in this section The connector pinout is shown in Figure 8 4 Figure 8 4 Trigger link connection operation Rear Panel Pinout 8 7 6 4X3 2 7 Trigger Link Pin Number Description Input trigger requirements Trigger Link 1 Trigger Link 2 Trigger Link 3 Trigger Link 4 Trigger Link 5 Trigger Link 6 Ground Ground An input trigger is used to satisfy event detection for a trigger model layer that is using the TLINK control source The input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 8 5 Return to Section 8 topics 8 14 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 8 5 Trigger link input pulse specifications Triggers on Leading Edge TTL High 2V 5V TTL Low lt 0 8V 2us Minimum Output trigger specifications The Model 622x can be programmed to output a trigger immediately after the source or delay phase of the device action and or when operation enters or exits the trigger layer of the trigger model The output trigger provides a TTL compati ble output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 8 6 Figure 8 6
85. Unlisten Low Removes any talkers from the bus UNT Untalk Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instru ments for common operations SCPI High Programs SCPI compatible instruments for particular operations Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 8 Table C 2 Command codes 1 U0q X 801 q 1014 0 910N Xcc9 9pow Aq Jou IOYLNOD 3IVI LOL pue 99d AYNDIANODNN 110d TATIVEVd Add AYNDISNOD 110d 131 1 GONVWWOD GONVWWOD AYVGNODAS Aa VWl ld TT OVD DV N 99 SSd34ddVv 54 XINVWWOO GNVWWOD NALS TWSYAAINN 35534 O 0 osc nx 9 0 nm s 15 Or Or or oror or SS lt 0 5 20 eee z A n s J b d m sr 10 Tr gt gt st 4 uunjo ee a gt a gt a gt d p 24 Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 9 Uniline commands ATN IFC
86. a DHCP server If unsuccessful press EXIT to abort the process If you select DHCP OFF complete steps 4 through 7 below Select IP then press ENTER to enter the IP address Press ENTER after you enter the IP address Select GATEWAY then press ENTER to enter the Ethernet gateway Press ENTER to complete gateway programming Select SUBNET then press ENTER to input the subnet mask Press ENTER to complete mask programming Press EXIT to return to normal display after completing Ethernet setup Return to Section 10 topics 10 6 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual See Ethernet interface reference on page 10 29 for more information on the Ethernet interface NOTE When the IP address the Ethernet gateway or subnet mask is changed the unit will perform a power on reset when leaving the menu Password A user defined password can be used to disable protected commands Most Model 622x commands are protected see Table 10 3 for a list of unprotected commands When the use of password is enabled there are commands to either disable or enable the protected commands Table 10 2 At the factory the Model 622x is assigned the following password name DEFAULT The password is case sensitive and must be enclosed in quotes as shown above From the front panel the password can be cleared by using the PASSWORD selection in the communications menu see Table 10 1 as follows 1 Press the COMM key select PASSW
87. a frequency of 50 or 60Hz Line voltage and line frequency are automatically sensed There are no switches to set Make sure the operating voltage in your area is compatible CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage to the instrument possibly voiding the war ranty 1 Before plugging in the power cord make sure that the front panel power Switch is in the off O position 2 Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet WARNING The power cord supplied with the Model 622x contains a sepa rate ground wire for use with grounded outlets When proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death due to electric shock 3 Turnon the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on 1 position Line frequency The Model 622x will operate at line frequencies from 45Hz to 66Hz There are no user settings for line frequency It is automatically sensed at power up The fol lowing command can be used to read the line frequency SYSTem LFRequency Query power line frequency The response for the above query command will be 50 or 60 Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 15 Fuse replacement
88. a linear staircase sweep 1 Configure source functions Examples The following commands restore defaults set the bias current to 100uA and the compliance to 10V RST Restore 622x defaults SOUR CURR 1 4 Set bias current to 1004A SOUR CURR COMP 10 compliance to 10V Configure the sweep Examples The following commands configure a single linear staircase sweep from 1mA to 10mA with 1mA steps using a 1s delay best fixed source range and compliance abort disabled SOUR SWE SPAC LIN Select linear staircase sweep SOUR CURR STAR 1e 3 Set start current to 1mA SOUR CURR STOP 1e 2 Set stop current to 10mA SOUR CURR STEP 1 3 Set step current to 1mA SOUR DEL 1 Set delay to 1s SOUR SWE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range SOUR SWE COUN 1 sweep count to 1 SOUR SWE CAB OFF Disable compliance abort Arm and run the sweep SOUR SWE ARM Arm sweep turn on output INIT Trigger sweep When the sweep is done turn the source output off with this command OUTP OFF Return to Section 4 topics 4 16 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Running a log staircase sweep 1 Configure source functions Examples The following commands restore defaults set the bias current to 10uA and the compliance to 5V RST Restore 622x defaults SOUR CURR 1 5 Set bias current to 10uA SOUR CURR COMP 5 Set compliance to 5V Configure the sweep Ex
89. a square wave output and a 3 point measurement algorithm to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs Pulse Delta 6221 and 2182A only Provides a pulse output and a 3 point or 2 point measurement algorithm for testing of temperature sensitive DUT Differential Conductance Uses a differential current output and a 3 point moving average algorithm to perform differential measure ments Buffer storage and recall for up to 65 536 delta readings Averaging filtering for delta readings Supported remote interfaces Model 6220 GPIB and RS 232 Model 6221 GPIB RS 232 and Ethernet 220 language DDC commands to emulate Model 220 operation Organization of manual sections While viewing the PDF version of this manual the manual sections can be viewed by clicking the Bookmarks tab on the left side of this window This tab also pro vides direct links to the various sections and section topics The manual sections are also listed in the Table of Contents located at the begin ning of this manual Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 3 General information Warranty information Warranty information is located at the front of this manual Should your Model 622x require warranty service contact the Keithley representative or authorized repair facility in your area for further information When returning the instrument for repair be sure to fill out and include the service form at t
90. again by pressing the TRIG key The new Pulse Delta readings will overwrite the old readings in the buffer If the infinite Pulse Delta count is being used Pulse Delta will run continuously If the buffer fills Pulse Delta readings will stop being stored even though Pulse Delta continues to run 8 When finished press EXIT to disarm Pulse Delta 9 On the Model 6221 press RECALL to access the Pulse Delta readings stored in the buffer Operation PC control The system configuration for PC control of the Model 6221 is shown in Figure 5 2B on page 5 5 1 Connections are shown in the following illustrations All power must be removed from all components in the system before making connections Figure 5 4 page 5 8 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 Test connections 2 Configure communications for the Models 2182A and 6221 as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 3 On the Model 21824 select the desired measurement range For front panel operation use the RANGE keys to select the measurement range Commands from the PC to control the Model 2182A are addressed to the Model 622x Each command is then routed through the Model 622x out the serial port RS 232 to the Model 2182A The following command word is used for this communication process SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SEND data Where data is a valid Model 2182A command The following query command is used to return the response to a qu
91. and OPC Error status code 101 Bit B2 Query Error QYE Set bit indicates that an attempt was made to read data from an empty output queue Error status codes 430 420 410 Bit B3 Device Specific Error DSE Set bit indicates that an instrument operation did not execute properly due to some internal condition Error status codes 363 350 314 500 through 558 700 900 Bit B4 Execution Error EXE Set bit indicates that the Model 622x detected an error while trying to execute a command Error status codes 260 through 220 401 through 420 Bit B5 Command Error CME Set bit indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors include 488 2 syntax error The Model 622x received a message that does not follow the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard Semantic error The Model 622x received a command that was mis spelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that is not imple mented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message Error status codes 171 through 100 Bit B6 User Request URQ Set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the Model 622x front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power ON PON Set bit indicates that Model 622x has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read Return to Section 11 topics 11 12 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual
92. and receiving trigger pulses among connected instruments Use a trigger link cable Model 8501 for connections 8 INTERLOCK Interlock connector Provides two screw terminals for connection to an interlock switch When the interlock switch is closed the OUTPUT of the 622x is enabled allowing it to be turned on When the interlock switch is opened the OUTPUT is disabled OUTPUT can not be turned on and will turn off if it was on 9 Power module Contains the AC line receptacle and power line fuse The instrument can operate on line voltages of 100V to 240VAC at line frequencies of 50 or 60Hz Heat sink and cooling vents The Model 622x uses a heat sink and three cooling vents to dissipate heat The right side of the case is cut out to expose the black finned heat sink Cooling vents are provided on both sides of the case and on the top cover The heat sink could get hot enough to cause burns Even if the instrument is turned off you should assume that the heat sink is still hot as it takes considerable time for it to cool off WARNING When handling the Model 622x NEVER touch the heat sink located on the right side of the case This heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns CAUTION NEVER place a container of liquid e g water coffee etc on the top cover If it spills the liquid will enter the case through the vents and cause severe damage Excessive heat could damage the Model 622x and at the very least degrade it
93. are transmitted with ATN true LLO Local Lockout LLO is sent to the instrument to lock out the LOCAL key and all their front panel controls DCL Device Clear DCL is used to return instruments to some default state Instruments usually return to their power up conditions SPE Serial Poll Enable SPE is the first step in the serial polling sequence which is used to determine which device has requested service SPD Serial Poll Disable SPD is used by the controller to remove all devices on the bus from the serial poll mode and is generally the last command in the serial polling sequence Return to Appendix topics C 10 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multiline commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in ques tion Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true SDC Selective Device Clear The SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds Generally instruments return to their power up default conditions when responding to the SDC command GTL Go To Local The GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previ
94. clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled according to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing Table of Contents 1 Getting Started Introduction ie ees Ee ean acd wei 1 2 Capabilities and features 1 2 Organization of manual sections 2 1 2 General information sassen ecoa Devise sepe eee se ERR ese corsets 1 3 Warranty 1nformation 5 cett ug REPRE agit o Re ee eet 1 3 C ntact Informat BA 1 3 Safety symbols and terms sss eene rennen 1 3 Unpacking and inspection essere nennen enne 1 4 Options and accessories 1 5 User s TAMA de 1 7 Reference manual eee 1 7 Additional referentes seinieni 1 7 Front and rear panel familiarization 1 7 Front panel summaries enne eren nennen nente enne 1 7
95. controls Note Queries state on or off of the display and controls WINDow 1 Top line display characters Text message DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message up to 20 characters Note DATA Read text message STATe lt b gt Enable disable text message Note STATe Query state on or off of text message ATTRibutes Query attributes of message characters Blinking 1 or not blinking 0 WINDow2 Bottom line display characters Text message DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message up to 32 characters Note DATA Read text message STATe lt b gt Enable disable text message Note STATe Query state on or off of text message ATT Ributes Query attributes of message characters Blinking 1 or not blinking 0 Note RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on the display circuitry a text message or the state of the mes sage modes Pressing LOCAL or cycling power enables ON the display circuitry cancels all text mes sages and disables OFF the message modes Pressing the DISP key will also enable the display Return to Section 14 topics 14 6 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 3 Format command summary Ref Command Description Default Sec SCPI FORMat Reading format commands 13 DATA lt type gt lt length gt
96. cooling vents are clear and the heat sink is free of dust and dirt Error status code 112 Bit B3 Compliance Comp Set bit indicates that the Model 622x is in compliance Error status code 114 Bit B5 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a delta reading has been taken and processed Error status code 306 Bit B6 Trace Notify TN Set bit indicates that the user defined reading number has been stored in the buffer see TRACe NOTify command in Section 6 Error status code 307 Bit B7 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two readings stored in the buffer Error status code 308 Bit B8 Buffer Half Full BHF Set bit indicates that the buffer if half full Keep in mind that buffer size is set by the programmed number of sweep points or delta measurement points cycles Error status code 309 Bit B9 Buffer Full BFL Set bit indicates that the buffer is full Keep in mind that buffer size is set by the programmed number of sweep points or delta measurement points cycles Error status code 310 Bit B12 Buffer Quarter Full BQF Set bit indicates that the buffer is quarter full Keep in mind that buffer size is set by the programmed number of sweep points or delta measurement points cycles Error status code 312 Bit B13 Buffer 3 4 Full B3QF Set bit indicates that the buffer is 3 4 full Keep in mind that buffer size i
97. current points to an existing list Note that the maximum number of sweep points is 64 000 SOUR LIST DEL lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Define delay list SOUR LIST DEL APP lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Append to delay list These commands create a delay list and add delays to an existing list Delay values match up one for one with the current source values above in the cur rent list These delays apply only to list custom sweeps Note that defaults are 1 second the same as regular source delay and the minimum accepted value is 0 001 seconds SOUR LIST COMP lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Define compliance list SOUR LIST COMP APP lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Append compliance list These commands create a compliance list and add compliance values to an existing list Compliance values match up one for one with the current source values above in the current list Return to Section 4 topics 4 22 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 4 SOUR LIST CURR POIN Query current list length SOUR LIST DEL POIN Query delay list length SOUR LIST COMP POIN Query compliance list These commands query the length of the current source delay and compli ance lists The number of current values determines the length of the list sweep the other two POINts queries are for reference only Coupled sweep commands A number of sweep commands are coupled together and changing certain
98. default setting is INFinity and valid choices range from 0 001 cycles to 99999999900 cycles or INFinity The last duration type sent takes precedence This command is not accepted while the wave is armed Error 404 Not allowed with Wave Armed SOUR WAVE EXTR lt b gt Enable disable external triggering Firmware version A03 and greater supports an external trigger mode to trig ger the arbitrary waveform generator using the Model 6221 s trigger link lines When enabled this mode waits for an external trigger pulse on a specified trigger link line and starts the configured waveform within 1s of the falling edge of the trigger This mode cannot be changed while the wave is armed Error 404 Not allowed with Wave Armed SOUR WAVE EXTR ILINE lt NRf gt Set external trigger link line This command sets the trigger link line that will be used as an input to trigger the arbitrary waveform generator It only applies if the external trigger mode is enabled Any of the six trigger link lines 1 to 6 can be used provided that the specified line has not already been assigned as the phase marker output Error 221 Settings Conflict If a value of 0 is used no trigger link line will be assigned as an input and nothing will trigger the waveform generator until another assignment is made Return to Section 7 topics 7 32 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 19 20 SOUR WAVE EXTR IGN lt b gt Set retri
99. display field and then set the voltage compli ance as appropriate for expected sweep parameters Configure the sweep as follows a Press CONFIG then SWP to enter the sweep configuration menu b Select TYPE and then press ENTER c Select LOG and then press ENTER to choose a logarithmic staircase sweep d At the prompts enter the desired START STOP NO OF POINTS and DELAY values e Fromthe CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER and then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired f Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER and then select BEST AUTO or FIXED as appropriate g Fromthe CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select COMPLIANCE ABORT press ENTER then choose to abort YES or not to abort NO the sweep if compliance is reached while the sweep is in progress h Press EXIT to return to normal display Run sweep a Press the SWP key to arm the sweep The output will turn on b Press TRIG to start the sweep Press EXIT to abort the sweep before it is finished d Turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key when the sweep is finished Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 13 Performing a custom sweep 1 Configure the bias current output current prior to the start of the sweep by pressing the DC key and then setting the current to the desired value Configure the sweep as follows a Press CONFIG then SWP to enter th
100. ee Eee eek APR SERERE TRECE Renae 17 23 CAL PROT GUAR command parameter ranges 2 4021222 17 23 Error and Status Messages Status and error messages nios 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview IEEE 488 bus command summary C 7 Command CODES n C 8 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes esses C 12 Typical Dus Sequence 13 Typical addressed command sequence eee C 13 IEEE command PrOUDS 1 eem te UR Hes PIE EKSE C 14 Model 622x interface function codes 2 C 15 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information IEEE 488 documentation requirements D 2 Coupled commands a aaa RERO DEDERE OE D 3 Section 1 topics Introduction page 1 2 Capabilities and features page 1 2 Organization of manual sections page 1 2 General information page 1 3 Warranty information page 1 3 Contact information page 1 3 Safety symbols and terms page 1 3 Unpacking and inspection page 1 3 Options and accessories page 1 5 User s manual page 1 4 Reference manual page 1 7 Additional references page 1 7 Front and rear panel familiarization page 1 7 Front panel summaries page 1 7 Rear panel summaries page 1 7 Heat sink and cooling vents page 1 12 Power up page 1 14 Line power connection
101. external low jitter trigger mode page 7 10 Front panel wave function operation page 7 14 Using the wave function menu page 7 14 Generating a sine wave page 7 16 Generating a square wave page 7 17 Generating a ramp waveform page 7 18 Generating an arbitrary waveform page 7 19 Using the external trigger mode page 7 20 Remote wave function operation page 7 21 Programming sine waves page 7 22 Programming square waves page 7 23 Programming ramp waveforms page 7 24 Programming arbitrary waveforms page 7 25 Programming an externally triggered waveform page 7 25 SCPI commands wave functions page 7 27 7 2 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Overview Section overview Following a brief Wave function overview for the four types of waveforms sine square wave ramp and arbitrary the documentation in this section provides detailed information on characteristics front panel operation and SCPI command programming for each type of wave function as follows Wave function characteristics page 7 3 Front panel wave function operation page 7 14 Remote wave function operation page 7 21 Wave function overview The Model 6221 Current Source can generate four general types of current wave forms The amplitude range for all functions is from 1pA to 105mA peak 210mA peak to peak Waveform types include Sine function The Model 6221 can generate sine wave currents with a fre quency r
102. from queues see Section 11 Default settings The Model 622x can be restored to one of seven setup configurations five user saved setups PRESET bench defaults and RST bus defaults As shipped from the factory the Model 622x powers up to the PRESET settings PRESET settings provide a general purpose setup for front panel operation while the RST settings do the same for remote operation Default settings for front panel operation are listed in Table 1 1 For front panel operation PRESET and RST defaults are the same For remote operations the defaults are included in the SCPI table see Section 14 The instrument will power up to the default setup that was saved as the power on setup NOTE At the factory the PRESET default setup is saved into the five user saved setups Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 25 Front panel setups NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while Wave Sweep Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is armed or running Attempting to do so will generate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed A custom sweep cannot be saved as a user setup Attempting to do so will generate error 528 Cannot save CUSTOM sweep setup Source preset values are not saved as part of a user setup To save a user setup 1 Configure the Model 622x for the desired sourcing application 2 Press the SAVE key to open the SAVED SETUP MENU 3 Selec
103. function Can also press CONFIG gt AMPL to set the amplitude When in a menu use this key to move the cursor to the left Sets the frequency for the wave function Can also press CONFIG gt FREQ to set the frequency When in a menu use this key to move the cursor to the right Return to Section 1 topics 1 10 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Bottom Row SAVE Saves up to five instrument setups for future recall and selects power on setup SETUP Restores a default setup Preset or RST or a user saved setup TRIAX Configures triax connector inner shield and output Low Can also press CONFIG gt TRIAX to configure triax connector AVG Enables disables averaging filter Press CONFIG gt AVG to configure averaging filter MATH Enables disable math Press CONFIG gt MATH to configure math MENU Accesses the main menu for calibration self tests serial number and beeper control EXIT Cancels selection backs out of menu structure ENTER Accepts selection moves to next choice or exits menu 3 Range keys AN and V _ Dual function Selects the next higher or lower source range When in a menu these keys increment or decrement values AUTO Enables or disables source autorange 4 Output control and LED status indicator OUTPUT ON OFF Turns source output on or off For the 6221 press CONFIG gt OUTPUT to set the output response for the Model 6221 LED indicator Turns on when output is on Blinks if source
104. generating waveform Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 23 Programming square waves 1 Restore defaults with this command RST 2 Configure the waveform Examples The following commands configure a 10kHz square wave with an amplitude of 1mA OmA offset 50 duty cycle 180 phase marker and 10 second duration SOUR WAVE FUNC SQU Select square wave SOUR WAVE FREQ 1e4 Set frequency to 10kHz SOUR WAVE AMPL 1e 3 Set amplitude to 1mA SOUR WAVE OFFS 0 Set offset to 0 SOUR WAVE DCYC 50 duty cycle to 50 SOUR WAVE PMAR STAT ON on phase marker SOUR WAVE PMAR 180 Set phase marker 180 SOUR WAVE PMAR OLIN 1 Use line 1 for phase marker SOUR WAVE DUR TIME 10 10 second duration SOUR WAVE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range 3 Arm and trigger the waveform turn on output SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform SOUR WAVE INIT Turn on output trigger waveform 4 To stop generating the waveform and turn the source output off before the duration elapses send this command SOUR WAVE ABOR Stop generating waveform Return to Section 7 topics 7 24 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Programming ramp waveforms 1 Restore defaults with this command RST 2 Configure the waveform Examples The following commands configure a 50kHz ramp wave with an amplitude of 5mA OmA offset
105. goes into compliance 5 Rotary knob and CURSOR keys Model 6221 When in source edit use CURSOR keys for cursor control and rotate the knob to change a source or compliance value The rotary knob can also be used to enable or disable the source EDIT mode When in a menu use the CURSOR keys or rotary knob for menu item cursor control When displaying a menu value use the CURSOR keys for cursor control and rotate the knob to change the value Pressing the knob opens a menu item or selects a menu option or value 6 Display annunciators not shown EDIT Unit is in the source editing mode ERR Questionable reading or invalid cal step REM Unit in remote mode TALK Unit addressed to talk LSTN Unit addressed to listen SRQ Service request FILT Analog filter or Averaging filter is enabled MATH Math is enabled AUTO Auto source range selected ARM Sweep or delta function armed and ready to run TRIG External triggering selected asterisk Readings being stored in buffer SMPL Blinks for every other reading acquired from the Model 2182 2182A Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 11 Figure 1 2 Model 622x rear panel NOTE The rear panels of the Model 6220 and 6221 are the same except the Model 6220 does not have an Ethernet connector 3 INTERNALLY KEITHLEY SWITCHED es A MSAT INTERLOCK EE 105Vpk ae GUARD ER
106. gt 0 to 360 deg SOURce 1 WAVE PMARk STATe lt b gt Enables disables phase marker OFF lt b gt ON or OFF SOURce 1 WAVE PMARk OLINe NRf Sets phase marker trigger line 7 3 NHf 1 to 6 SOURce 1 WAVE ARBitrary DATA lt NRf gt Defines arbitrary data points 9 NR lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 1 100 points max SOURce 1 WAVE ARBitrary APPend NRf Appends arbitrary data points lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 1 100 points max per instance of command SOURce 1 WAVE ARBitrary COPY lt NRf gt Copies arbitrary points to NVRAM 10 lt NRf gt 1 to 4 SOURce 1 WAVE ARBitrary POINts Queries of arbitrary data points Return to Section 7 topics 7 28 Wave Functions 6221 Only Table 7 4 cont Waveform function commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Command Description Default SOURce 1 WAVE ARM Arms 6221 for waveform output 17 SOURce 1 WAVE INITiate Starts waveform output 13 SOURce 1 WAVE ABORt Aborts waveform output 14 SOURce 1 WAVE DURation TIME lt NRf gt Sets waveform time duration 15 INFinity lt NRf gt 100 9 to 999999 999 5 or INFinity SOURce 1 WAVE DURation CYCLes lt NRf gt Sets waveform duration in cycles 9 INFinity lt NRf gt 0 001 to 99999999900 or INFinity SOURce 1 WAVE EXTRig ENABle lt b gt Enables disables mode to externall OFF trigger the waveform g
107. higher source range 225 Out of Memory Occurs when trying to ARM Differential Conductance with too many measure points in the sweep Reconfigure the Differential Conductance sweep such that it does not exceed the maximum number of measure points 65 536 241 Missing Hardware Occurs when trying to ARM Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance and a Model 2182A is not detected Check RS 232 connections For the 2182A make sure the RS 232 interface is selected 4408 Diff Conductance truncated Occurs when trying to ARM Differ ential Conductance with a sweep level s that will exceed 105mA Reconfigure the Differential Con ductance sweep such that all sweep levels do not exceed 105mA 410 Model 2182A required Occurs when trying to ARM Pulse Delta with an older Model 2182 that does not support Pulse Delta Use a Model 2182A with the Model 622x to run Pulse Delta Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 5 2 cont Error status codes and messages Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 19 411 Diff Conductance step error Occurs if two adjacent Diff Conductance values use the same source value The algorithm to cal culate Diff Cond voltage divides by zero and generates a NAN not a number reading 49 9637 This error does not abort the test but does indicate that corrupt data has been acquired Reduce the
108. immediately upon each sequential external hardware trigger in this mode If the waveform output has not yet run to comple tion a new hardware trigger will preempt the current waveform and restart the waveform immediately see Figure 7 5A Alternatively the unit can be configured to ignore triggers while a waveform is in process If set this way the current wave form will be output to completion before the unit will accept another trigger see Figure 7 5B Whether or not the unit will ignore attempts to retrigger it while run ning can be controlled over the front panel or bus Setting the inactive value In the external trigger mode the output remains enabled while the unit waits for an external trigger Before and after triggered waveforms the inactive value will con trol the current output It can be set to any value between 1 00 and 1 00 The value is interpreted the same as data values used to specify arbitrary waveform definitions where 1 represents the maximum negative current flow and 1 repre sents the maximum positive current Any value in between is linearly mapped between these two extremes to one of 65 536 discrete levels Using the wave generator in external low jitter trigger mode Under normal operation the waveform generator is armed and then triggered to begin outputting the waveform immediately In the external low jitter trigger mode the Model 6221 must be similarly armed and triggered Triggering the unit will turn
109. in this command is 100 use APPend to add more points Note that points are stored in volatile RAM memory location 0 To save them to locations 1 to 4 you must use the COPY command below SOUR WAVE ARB APP lt NRf gt NRf NRf Append arbitrary points This command appends the points list for the arbitrary waveform The data must be in the range 1 to 1 The maximum number of points allowed in this command is 100 use another APPend to add more points 65 535 maxi mum Note that points are appended to those stored in volatile RAM mem ory location 0 To save all points to locations 1 to 4 you must use the COPY command below SOUR WAVE ARB COPY lt NRf gt Copy waveform points to NVRAM This command copies the arbitrary waveform from volatile RAM location 0 into nonvolatile RAM location 1 4 The location number is the one to be used by the SOUR WAVE FUNC ARB command above SOUR WAVE ARB POIN Query points in arbitrary waveform This command queries the number of points in the arbitrary waveform SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform function This command arms the 6221 for waveform output Note that error checking is performed when the waveform is armed Use SOUR WAVE INIT below to start the wave output Note that whatever value the source is at will get set to zero at this time The old source value and range are not recalled when you exit the wave SOUR WAVE ABOR or EXIT key but instead the source will be left on the new ra
110. included to help reduce keystrokes If auto copy is enabled whenever a point is entered by pressing the ENTER key the compliance and delay values will automatically be copied to all higher numbered points in the list Example Consider a 10 point sweep of points 0 9 Assume that points 0 4 are to have a 1 second delay and 25V compliance while points 5 9 will have a 1 5 second delay and 30V compliance If you enter point 00000 with a 1 second delay and 25V compliance these two values but not the value are copied to all points 0 9 When you then edit point 00005 and change the compliance to 30V and the delay to 1 5 seconds these compliance and delay values will be automatically copied to points 5 9 See Performing a custom sweep on page 4 13 for the complete procedure Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 9 Source ranging The source ranging setting determines how the Model 622x selects the current range based on the sweep steps as follows BEST With this option the unit will select a single fixed source range that will accommodate all of the source levels in the sweep For example if the minimum and maximum source levels in the sweep are 1mA and 30mA the 100mA source range will be used AUTO With this option the Model 622x will select the most sensitive source range for each source level in the sweep For example for a 14A source level the 2uA source range will be used an
111. includes a built in pull up resistor to 5V The output transistor is capable of sinking 500mA from voltages up to 33V Each output channel contains a flyback diode for pro tection when switching inductive loads such as a low power solenoid or relay coils To use these flyback diodes connect the external supply voltage to pin 5 of the digital I O port Make sure the external supply voltage is between 5V and 33V and the current required by the device does not exceed 500mA Return to Section 9 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Limit Test and Digital O 9 7 CAUTION not exceed 33V maximum voltage on pin 5 of the digital I O port and do not use any output line to sink gt 500mA Exceeding these limits may cause damage to the instrument that is not covered by the warranty An externally powered relay connected to the digital output port is shown in Figure 9 4 Other externally powered devices can be similarly connected by replacing the relay with the device When the output line is set LO 0V the output transistor sinks current through the external device In the HI state the output transistor is off transistor switch open This interrupts current flow through the external device Figure 9 4 Controlling externally powered relays Model 622x To three other Pin 5 External Voltage Flyback Connection digital outputs e ZS 33V 45V L EX External Power A Rela vL
112. is enabled and the source is presently set for 1mA on the 1mA range When the source value is changed to 5mA the range will automatically uprange to the 10mA range Active autorange will disable if a command to select a fixed range is sent The commands to control autorange and select a fixed range are listed in Table 3 2 NOTE Active autorange is only intended for remote opera tion When the Model 622x is taken out of remote e g LOCAL key pressed the AUTO annunciator stays on and automatic down ranging remains active Active autorange will disable AUTO annunciator turns off when a RANGE A or y key is pressed Source preset The PRES key can be used to set the source to a preset value and range When the PRES key is pressed the source will select the preset range set the preset value The preset value is set as follows 1 Press the PRES key The message PRES is displayed while the preset value is being used 2 Using the source editing keys as explained in Figure 3 3 and Figure 3 4 set the preset value to the desired level Return to Section 3 topics 3 14 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual When finished using the preset value press PRES again to disable the feature The PRES message will cancel and the unit will return to the original source value Note that the compliance value cannot be preset NOTE Source preset values are not saved as part of a user setup Sour
113. just prior to the start of the sweep The current output will remain at the last point in the sweep after completion Logarithmic staircase sweep In this case the current increases or decreases logarithmically beginning with a start current and ending with a stop current Figure 4 1B shows an increasing log staircase sweep from a 0 1mA start current to a 100mA stop current with logarithmic steps Again the bias current is the fixed current setting just prior to the start of the sweep The current output will remain at the last point in the sweep after completion Custom sweep The custom sweep allows you to program arbitrary sweep steps anywhere within the output current range of the Model 622x Figure 4 1C shows a typical custom sweep with arbitrary steps As with the other two sweep types the bias current is the fixed current setting just prior to the start of the sweep The current output will remain at the last point in the sweep after comple tion Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 3 Figure 4 1 Comparison of sweep types 5mA Stop gt OmA Logarithmic scale shown for staircase steps 0 1mA gt Bias OmA B Logarithmic Staircase Sweep Last Point a First Point Bias OmA C Custom Sweep Return to Section 4 topics 4 4 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweep characteristics NOTE Jitter Step to step sweep timing may jitter as m
114. needed ARM SOUR name Select ARM layer control source This command selects the ARM layer event detector control source IMMediate TIMer BUS TLINk NSTest PSTest BSTest or MANual ARM SIGN Bypass ARM layer control source This command is used to bypass the ARM layer control source and move on to the next layer in the trigger model the TRIGger layer event detection in this case ARM TIM n Set ARM layer timer interval This command selects the ARM layer timer interval in the range of 0 to 99999 99 sec with 1 msec resolution ARM DIR lt name gt Set ARM source bypass This command enables SOURce or disables ACCeptor the ARM source bypass ARM ILIN lt NRf gt Set ARM layer trigger input line This command selects the ARM layer input signal line 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 ARM OLIN lt NRf gt Set ARM layer trigger output line This command selects the ARM layer input signal line 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 Note that for the Model 6221 only the trigger output line and phase marker SOUR WAVE PMAR OLIN lines cannot be the same or a 221 Settings Conflict error will occur See Phase marker on page 7 9 ARM OUTP lt name gt Select when to output ARM trigger This command selects when to output the ARM layer trigger Available selec tions include TEXit output when exiting trigger layer TENTer output when entering trigger layer or NONE disabled TRIG SOUR lt name gt Select TR
115. normal wear or failure to follow instructions THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE THE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SUCH EXCLUDED DAMAGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO COST OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY KEITHLEY A GREATER MEASURE OF CONFIDENCE Keithley Instruments Inc Corporate Headquarters 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 1 888 534 8453 www keithley com 3 07 Model 6220 DC Current Source Model 6221 AC and DC Current Source Reference Manual 2004 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A Third Printing October 2008 Document Number 622x 901 01 Rev C Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are s
116. not make the distinc tion between average and peak Use the UNIT POWer command see Table 5 1 to determine if the power reading is peak or average Details on selecting Measurement units are provided on page 5 16 Return to Section 13 topics 13 8 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Reading number RNUM The reading counter starts at zero when Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is started If the delta test is set for an infinite count the reading number will continue counting up to number 2 147 483 643 If the delta test is still running after that count the reading counter will reset to zero Source SOUR This element is the programmed output current in amps of the Model 622x Compliance COMP The compliance element reports the compliance state of the current source If in compliance a is returned If not in compliance an F is returned For the double precision data formats DREal and REAL 64 the compliance state is returned as a 1 in compliance or a 0 not in compliance The compliance state is polled for every reading and will slow down the reading rate The COMP element must be selected before the delta test is started If the COMP element is selected while reading acquisition is in process the F not in compliance state will always be returned for each reading string Average voltage AVOL A Differential Conductance rea
117. number of steps by increasing the step size or widen the start step interval 412 Diff Conductance upranged The Model 6221 selects the BEST range based on the set start stop and step parameters For example if start is 20pA stop is 20pA and step is 1 the Model 6221 will select the 20 source range If using a Delta value that will cause the last output value to exceed 21pA the next higher range will be selected dur ing the arming process This is not an error It is only an indication that a source uprange has occurred during the arming process 416 Step size too small Differential Conductance Occurs if the step size is so small it rounds down to zero An actual step size of zero would result in a test that would never finish When using the repeat averaging filter the actual step size is the user entered step size value divided by the filter count value This error occurs during the arming process Differential Conductance will not arm Use an actual step size that does not get rounded to zero Avoid using repeat filter that has a large filter count Also avoid using a small start to stop span 419 Trigger Link cable not This error occurs during the arm Make sure the Trigger Link cable is tance with the RS 232 interface selected for the Model 622x connected process properly connected 809 Not Allowed with Occurs when trying to ARM Delta Select a d
118. of 4mA on the 20mA range Note that this waveform with no offset would use the 2mA range but uses the 20mA range since the range is set based on the amplitude and offset values Example 4 Ranging BEST Amplitude 1mA Offset 0mA ARB values range from 1 to 1 These settings will generate a waveform with a peak to peak value of 2mA on the 2mA range Example 5 Ranging FIXED Amplitude 1mA Offset mA ARB values range from 1 to 1 Current range 20mA These settings will generate a waveform with a peak to peak value of 2mA on the 20mA range Note that if BEST was used for ranging the waveform would have been generated on the 2mA range as in Example 4 above Frequency The frequency setting range for sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms is from 1mHz to 100kHz Note that the period is the reciprocal of the frequency 1 f For example a 1kHz waveform has a period of 1ms Offset The offset setting allows you to add a DC offset value to a waveform Figure 7 1 shows an example of a 1mA offset added to a square wave with a 10mA peak 20mA peak to peak amplitude Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 7 Figure 7 1 Offset example 10mA Peak Duty cycle For a square wave Figure 7 2A the duty cycle setting is the portion of the total cycle that the wave is high relative to the period of the waveform For a ramp waveform Figure 7 2B the duty
119. of checks on the configuration for Differential Conductance and generates the following error and status messages If any of the following errors occur Differential Conductance will still run but it will not perform the complete test that was configured Error 225 Out of Memory Error 408 Conductance truncated If the following error occurs Differential Conductance will still run but corrupt data will be acquired Error 411 Diff Conductance step error The occurrence of the following status message does not abort the test Status 412 Diff Conductance upranged Return to Section 5 topics 5 58 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The following error aborts the arming process Error 416 Step size too small NOTE Table 5 2 explains these coded error and status messages This table also provides remedies for the errors Armed message The following message is displayed briefly when Differential Conductance is armed and ready to run DIFF COND ARMED Press TRIG to start Aborting Differential Conductance After Differential Conductance is armed or running it can be aborted by pressing the EXIT key or sending the SOUR SWE ABOR command Triggering sequence The Trigger Link is used to synchronize source measure triggering operations of the Models 622x and 2182 2182A See System connections on page 5 6 for details on Trigger Link connections The triggerin
120. of the bus commands which are grouped into the following three categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 7 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table C 1 Table C 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary Command State of type Command ATN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus contents SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low Locks out local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low _ Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Low Returns unit to default conditions Clear Low Returns device to local GTL Go To Local Unad Low Removes all listeners from the bus dressed UNL
121. on OUTPut ON Turns output on The OUTPUT indicator will blink if the current source goes into compliance This indicates that the set current is not being delivered to the load See Compliance on page 3 3 for details Remote programming source output commands Table 3 2 lists the commands to configure and control the DC output A programming example to output DC current is also provided Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 17 Table 3 2 DC output commands Command Description Default CLEar Turns output off and sets output level to zero CURRent RANGe n Sets current source range amps Ge 100e 3 lt n gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 CURRent RANGe AUTO lt b gt Enables or disables source autorange OFF lt b gt ON or OFF CURRent lt n gt Sets DC current source output level amps 0 0 lt n gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 CURRent COMPliance lt NRf gt Sets voltage compliance volts 10 0 lt NRf gt 0 1 to 105 CURRent FILTer lt b gt Enables or disables the output analog filter OFF lt b gt ON or OFF OUTPut RESPonse lt name gt Select fast or slow output response speed for 6221 FAST name FAST or SLOW 34 OUTPut b Turn output on or off OFF SourceMeter b ON or OFF Sets output to zero then turns the output off 1 To select a fixed source range specify the current output value that is going to be sourced The Model
122. or inductance Cable capacitance can also contribute to settling time Using a guarded triax cable Cable Guard can significantly reduce the effects of cable capacitance but will not eliminate it For details see Triax Cable Guard on page 2 9 Another typical source of capacitance and leakage resistance is the test fixture These effects can be significantly reduced by using a guard plate in the test fix ture For details see Guarded DUT mounting plate on page 2 11 Even if a load has zero capacitance there will still be approximately 10pF of capacitance present for these low current source ranges This is capacitance that is inherent to the Model 622x and cannot be reduced or eliminated by guarding or any other technique The following equation to calculate settling time assumes the use of short guarded cables It also assumes that the shunt capacitance at the load is known ST 5x10fxRIxC Where ST is the settling time in microseconds RI is the load resistance in ohms C is the load capacitance plus 10pF inherent to the 622x Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 9 NOTE After calculating settling time ST compare it to the published settling time specification in Appendix A The larger of the two settling times will apply Setting source and compliance Source and compliance editing from the front panel cannot be performed from the front pane
123. output Banana Safety Jack for GUARD OUTPUT LO Screw Terminal for CHASSIS e DB 9 connector for EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT and DIGITAL I O Two position Screw Terminal for INTERLOCK INTERLOCK Maximum 10 external circuit impedance POWER SUPPLY 100V to 240V rms 50 60Hz POWER CONSUMPTION 120VA WARRANTY 1 Year ENVIRONMENT For Indoor Use Only Maximum 2000m above Sea Level Operating 0 50 70 R H up to 35 C Derate 3 R H C 35 50 C Storage 25 C to 65 C guaranteed by design EMC Conforms to European Union Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61326 1 SAFETY Conforms to European Union Directive 73 23 EEC EN61010 1 VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Random WARMUP hour to rated accuracies Passive Cooling No fan DIMENSIONS Rack Mounting 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 5 in x 8 375 in x 14 563 in Bench Configuration with handle and feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 125 in x 9 375 in x 14 563 in SHIPPING WEIGHT 4 75kg 10 lbs ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Model 237 ALG 2 Triaxial Test Lead 6 6ft Trigger Link cable RS 232 Null Modem cable Interlock terminal block User s Manual CD Manual LabVIEW Drivers HW 1 17 05 Rev B Page 2 of 2 DATE DRN DATE 6 11 04 CKD DATE KEITHLEY Keithley Instruments Inc APP SK DATE Cleveland Ohio 44139 PART NUMBER SPECIFICATIONS SPEC 6220 FORM 28777A SBG BRUNING 40 21 6219
124. page 2 19 Using a test fixture page 2 20 Custom built test fixture page 2 20 2 2 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output connectors Triax connector Current source output is accessed at the 3 lug female triax connector on the rear panel Use a 3 slot male triax cable to make connections to this connector A triax cable terminated with alligator clips Model 237 ALG 2 is supplied for the Model 622x see Supplied triax cable on page 2 15 The triax connector is shown in Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 Triax connector and ground point Center conductor Output High Ko Inner shield Output Low or Cable Guard Outer shield Output Low for guarded configuration Earth Ground Earth Ground 1 Frequency Variable Resistor FVR Isolates the current source from high frequencies on the chassis For DC to 60Hz the FVRis a virtual short zero ohms E EE ee CDM ECCE 2 DO NOT use the Chassis Screw terminal to make signal connections to external circuitry High frequency gt 1MHz on the chassis may result in higher noise at the output Chassis Earth L EARTH GROUND is a local signal ground and is defined as Ground outer shield shell of the triax connector Chassis 7 CHASSIS is defined as the metal chassis of the Model 622x Chassis screw terminal is connected to the metal chassis of the Model 622x Triax connector terminals The triax connector terminals are summariz
125. prompt 21V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Press ENTER to output 2mA for 21V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 21 00000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt 100V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 11 22 23 24 25 26 27 Press ENTER to output 2mA for 100V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 100 0000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt 21V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Press ENTER to output 2mA for 21V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 21 00000V Use 4 gt ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER to complete compliance calibration Figure 17 3 Connections for compliance calibration Digital Multimeter Measure DC Voltage High Input Low Step 4 Calibrate guard circuit 1 2 Connect the digital multimeter DMM to the Model 6220 6221 GUARD and LO jacks as shown in Figure 17 4 Be sure to connect the
126. same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same mes sage as long as they are separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any command level and will not affect the path pointer Stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program Message Terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line feed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The interface will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a program message must be terminated Sour swe poin 10 lt PMT gt Command execution rules Commands execute in the order they are presented in the program message An invalid command generates an error and is not executed Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored Forfastest command execution 1 Do not use optional command words Do not use the colon at the beginning of a program message Always use the short form versions of commands and parameters Minimize the amount of white space in command strings Keep numeric parameters simple i e 1 vs 1 000e 00 Use all uppercase DARN Response messages A response message is the message sent by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command program message Sending a res
127. that this command does not affect the status of the instrument settings data and event registers are not changed To send the IFC command the controller must set the IFC line true for a minimum of 100us Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 23 LLO local lockout Use the LLO command to prevent local operation of the instrument After the unit receives LLO all its front panel controls except POWER and OUTPUT OFF are inoperative OUTPUT ON is inoperative in LLO In this state pressing LOCAL will not restore control to the front panel The GTL command restores control to the front panel GTL go to local Use the GTL command to put a remote mode instrument into local mode The GTL command also restores front panel key operation DCL device clear Use the DCL command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a known state Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously When the Model 622x receives a DCL command it clears the input buffer and output queue cancels deferred commands and clears any command that prevents the processing of any other device command A DCL does not affect instrument settings and stored data SDC selective device clear The SDC command is an addressed command that performs essentially the same function as the DCL command However since each device must be individually
128. the same class same subnet mask and Network ID NOTE Without the correct subnet mask or Network ID the direct network will not function Using the example software NOTE The example software is available for free down load at www keithley com The example software allows you to control a Model 6220 6221 from any PC using simple mouse clicks through a virtual front panel as well as perform delta mode differential conductance pulsed IV measurements and to control Model 6221 arbitrary waveforms See the online documentation in the software for details Several typical screens for the example software are shown on the following pages Note that your software may be slightly different do to upgrades Examples screens include Figure 10 11 Main screen Figure 10 12 Instrument connection wizard Figure 10 13 Virtual front panel Return to Section 10 topics 10 36 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 10 11 Example software typical main screen File Edit Operate Tools Window Help ARB Waveform Generator 6220 Virtual Front Panel Instrument Communication Delta Mode Measurements Differential Conductance Measurements Pulsed IV Measurements Model 6220 6221 Current Source Example Software Go Online Keithley s application center www keithley com Keithley s 6220 user s web Start with ALL USERS Instrument Communication rong ier erent NEXT Blank Instrument Setup Wiza
129. to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 17 1 TRACe NOTify lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to TRAC POIN 1 Use this command to specify the number of stored readings that will set bit BG Trace Notify of the Measurement Event Register With Service Request Enable Register properly configured an SRQ will be generated when the specified Trace Notify value is exceeded See Section 11 for details on status structure The maximum valid parameter value for this command is one less than the present buffer size which can be set by the TRACe POINTs command For example assume a delta test is configured to store 1000 readings For this buffer size the maximum valid parameter value for TRACe NOTify is 999 1000 1 When an invalid parameter value is specified the command is ignored and causes error 222 Parameter data out of range When the delta test is configured for infinite cycles Bit B6 Trace Notify of the measurement event register will clear after the 65 536th reading is stored and the buffer wraps around to the beginning 2 TRACe FEED name parameters SENS 1 Pre math delta readings are stored in the buffer CALC1 Post math delta readings These are the results of the mX b or m X b see Math on page 6 9 for details NONE Disables the buffer 3 TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt parameters NEXT Enables the buffer and turns on the asterisk annunciator After the b
130. to normal display 3 Set frequency and amplitude a b Press the FREQ key then set the frequency to the desired value Press the AMPL key then set the amplitude as required 4 Generate waveform a b Press the WAVE key to arm the wave function Press TRIG to turn on the output and start generating the waveform The output will turn off after the currently set duration period has expired If the duration is set to infinite press the EXIT key to stop gen erating the waveform and turn the output off Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 19 Generating an arbitrary waveform NOTE Arbitrary waveforms cannot be defined from the front panel but they can be generated once defined by using the general procedure below 1 If you are using the fixed range setting manually set the range to a high enough setting to accommodate the expected amplitude and offset set tings 2 Configure the waveform as follows a Press CONFIG then WAVE to enter the wave function configuration menu b Select TYPE then press ENTER c Select ARBx where x is the arbitrary waveform to use 0 4 d To add a DC offset select OFFSET from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the offset as desired e Touse the phase marker select PHASE MARKER set the STATE to ON use OUTPUT POINT to set the phase setting and OUTPUT LINE to set the trigger line f Again from the CONFIGU
131. to select format FORMat SREGister is documented in Table 11 2 To determine the exact nature of the error you will have to read the error queue see Queues on page 11 20 CLS Clears Error Queue SRE 4 Enables EAV FORM SREG BIN Selects binary format BadCommand Generates error STB Read Status Byte Register Status register sets As shown in Figure 11 1 there are four status register sets in the status structure of the Model 622x standard event status operation event status measurement event status and questionable event status Register bit descriptions When an error or status event occurs a coded message is briefly displayed and placed in the Error Queue The occurrence of an error status event also sets a status register bit The coded error status messages are listed in Appendix B The status register bits are described as follows Included with the bit descriptions are the codes for the error status event s that caused the bit to set Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 11 Standard event status The used bits of the standard event register Figure 11 4 are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete OPC Set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the Model 622x is ready to accept new commands This bit only sets in response to the query command See Section 12 for details OPC
132. when a front panel key is pressed For the Model 6221 a click will also be issued when the rotary knob is turned or pressed Keyclick can only be controlled using remote operation SYSTem KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable keyclick lt b gt ON or OFF Default setting is keyclick ON Source preset The PRES key can be used to set the source to a preset value When the PRES key is pressed the source will set to the preset value PRES message dis played When the PRES key is pressed again the unit will return to the original source value See Source preset on page 3 13 for details on setting the preset value Disabling the front panel The front panel can be disabled While disabled display characters and annuncia tors are turned off Also all front panel controls except LOCAL and DISP are locked out NOTE A single decimal point will be left on at the bottom right to indicate that the unit is powered on Return to Section 1 topics 1 18 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Disabling the front panel provides the following benefits Allows testing on light sensitive devices Eliminates step to step timing jitter for Sweeps Delta and Differential Conductance Details on Step to step timing jitter is provided on page 1 18 Increases system speed Processing time is shortened since readings are not formatted and displayed The front panel can be disabled by pressing the
133. you to set a pulse marker that defines a specific point of a waveform over a range of 0 to 360 The phase marker signal is a 1us pulse that appears on the selected line of the external trigger connector see External trigger connector on page 8 13 for connector designations You can also define which trigger output line is used for the phase marker pulse default is line 3 but you cannot use the same line used for the external trigger output default is 2 or the waveform external trigger input line default is O or dis abled A 0 marker setting for ramp waveforms corresponds to the minimum out put at the start of ramp up For sine and square wave a 0 marker setting for square and sine waves is the zero crossing point Figure 7 3 Phase marker Output Waveform Example Shows 4 180 Degree dus Marker Setting High 5V Low OV Phase Marker Pulse Return to Section 7 topics 7 10 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Duration The duration setting defines how long the waveform is generated You can set the duration in time over a range of 100ns to 999999 999s in cycles from 0 001 to 99999999900 cycles provided the equivalent time cycles frequency does not exceed the upper time duration limit or choose a continuous waveform INFinite setting From the front panel you can only specify a time duration from 0 001s to 999999 999s and a cycle duration as an integer number of cycles between 1 and 99999
134. 0 99ms Ground i 5T 495ms Triax Cable Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 11 Figure 2 7 Guarded triax cable inner shield connected to Cable Guard see Figure 2 5A 100nA High 100V A Guard 100V Earth Ground Triax Cable Guarded DUT mounting plate There may be significant leakage and capacitance in the test fixture A DUT is typ ically mounted on a metal plate using insulated terminal posts In an unguarded configuration current leakage may occur from output high to output low through the insulators of the terminal posts Also capacitance may exist across the DUT Figure 2 8 shows how a DUT mounted on a metal plate can be connected to the Model 622x The unguarded configuration is shown in Figure 2 8A Resistors R 1 and Ri represent the leakage resistance across the DUT and the capacitors C and C represent the shunt capacitance across the DUT The test fixture shunt capacitance across the DUT acts the same as capacitance in an unguarded triax cable and slows down response increases settling time For a high impedance DUT gt 10 significant leakage current may occur through the terminal post insulators The current through the DUT will be the output current Ig from the Model 622x minus the leakage current l Figure 2 8B shows how to use guarding to eliminate leakage current at the DUT The driven guard is connected
135. 0 The B command buffer location will be accepted and returned properly in queries but it has no effect on the display You can use the CONFIG gt SWP gt CUSTOM gt ADJUST POINTS menu to adjust sweep point locations The front panel will display the mem ory location selected by the L command see note 10 below Unlike the Model 220 which truncates the last digit of the 4 1 2 digit value to either zero or five the 622x gives you a full four and a half digits The last digit can take on any value 0 9 The Model 220 does not have a Local key and allows you to make front panel entries at any time even when in Remote The Model 622x does NOT emulate that behavior you ll need to press Local to get out of Remote before front panel key presses will be accepted on the 622x To properly emulate the Model 220 the display will show a Mem xxx indica tor in the lower right corner of the display while in the 220 language mode This Mem value cannot be accessed from the front panel recall that 220 mode is bus only but is the Memory Location as defined by the L command The Model 220 is basically a collection of memory locations that can be sequenced through like a list sweep or stepped one at a time The Y command options are supported but have changed some from the original Model 220 due to differences in the parser functions Not supported is the Y lt ascii gt option that allows any valid ASCII character to be used as the termi
136. 0 a Sweep output is synchronized to the frequency of the power line voltage and the pulse width is adjustable and is the same for all pulses The three available sweeps include 1 staircase sweep 2 logarithmic sweep and 3 custom sweep Examples of these Sweep outputs are shown in Figure 5 11 Staircase sweep Figure 5 11A shows an example of a staircase Sweep output The sweep is configured to start high pulses at 2mA and staircase to 10mA in 2mA steps The low pulse level for this sweep is OmA Logarithmic sweep Figure 5 11B shows an example of a logarithmic Sweep output The sweep is configured to output five high pulses points The first high pulse starts at 1mA and logarithmically steps to 10mA The low pulse level for this sweep is Custom sweep Figure 5 11C shows an example of a custom Sweep output The sweep is configured to output five high pulses points The level for each high pulse is specified by the user The high pulse levels for this output are 1mA 2mA 4mA 8mA and 16 The low pulse level for this sweep is 0mA Notice that the time period for each Pulse Delta cycle is determined by the set sweep delay The sweep including sweep delay is configured from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu See Section 4 for details Return to Section 5 topics 5 38 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 11 Pulse sweep output examples A Staircase sweep pulse train
137. 0 6221 Reference Manual The previous read command reads the last Pulse Delta reading that was performed by the Model 2182A If this command is sent before a new reading is available the last Pulse Delta reading will again be returned NOTE If a read command is sent when Pulse Delta is not running error 221 Settings Conflict will oc cur See Table 5 2 for details on errors associat ed with Pulse Delta operation NOTE Details on using Model 6221 Read commands are provided on page 5 15 7 When finished with Pulse Delta it can be disarmed by sending the following command SOUR SWE ABOR Stops Pulse Delta and places the Model 2182A in the local mode 8 Recall stored Pulse Delta readings Model 2182A Pulse Delta readings were sent to the buffer of the Model 6221 Send the following read com mand to read the buffer TRACe DATA Read Pulse Delta readings stored in 6221 buffer Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 49 Setup commands Pulse Delta setup and arm commands Commands sent from the PC to the Model 6221 to set up and arm Pulse Delta are listed in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Pulse Delta commands Command Description Default SOURce 1 PDELta NVPResent Queries if 2182A is connected 1 yes 0 no SOURce 1 PDELta HIGH lt NRf gt Sets high pu
138. 00kHz Amplitude Flatness Less than 1dB up to 100kHz SQUARE WAVE CHARACTERISTICS Frequency Range 1mHz to 100kHz Overshoot lt 2 5 Variable Duty Cycle Settable to 1us min pulse duration 0 01 programming resolution Jitter RMS 100ns 0 1 of period RAMP WAVE CHARACTERISTICS Frequency Range 1mHz to 100kHz Linearity 0 196 of peak output up to 10kHz ARBITRARY WAVE CHARACTERISTICS Frequency Range 1mHz to 100kHz Waveform Length 2 to 64K points Amplitude Resolution 16 bits including sign Sample Rate 10 MSPS Jitter RMS 100ns 0 1 of period Maximum User Waveforms 4 PROGRAMMING TIME Typical Waveform Amplitude Frequency Change 1115 ARB Transfer Times External transfer time over Bus 16K 64K LAN 0 750s 3 000s GPIB 1 2505 5 000s Internal transfer time of preloaded Arb locations 1 4 Arb1 0 0015 0 001s Arb 2 4 0 500s 2 000s 6221 2182 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS DUT RESISTANCE Up to 1GQ 1 nSiemen 100 limit for pulse mode DELTA MODE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS and DIFFERENTIAL CONDUCTANCE Controls Keithley Model 2182A Nanovoltmeter at up to 24Hz reversal rate 2182 at up to 12Hz PULSE MEASUREMENTS Pulse widths 50 to 12ms to 100mA Repetition interval 83 3ms to 5s Waveform Notes 1 Minimum realizable duty cycle is limited by current range response and load impedance 2 Amplitude accuracy is applicable for 100mA through 24A ranges Fast Mode into a m
139. 00nA 0 05 0 05 10 0 1 50 100fA 1 10 100 InA 10nA 100nA 10uA 0 02 200 0 02 200fA 0 02 2pA 0 01 20pA 0 005 200 0 005 2nA 0 005 20nA 0 005 200nA 0 01 24A Typical Typical Output Noise Noise Response peak peak peak peak Bandwidth RMS 5 RMS 5 BW into Short 0 1Hz 10Hz 10Hz BW Settling Time 1 of final value Output Output Resp Fast Resp Slow Typical 400 80 4 0 8pA 20 4pA 200 40pA 2 0 4nA 20 4nA 200 40nA 2 0 10 2uA 250 50pA 250 50pA 2 5 0 5nA 25 5 0nA 500 100nA 1 0 0 2uA 5 0 1pA 20 4 05 100 204 10kHz 10kHz 100kHz 1MHz 1MHz 1MHz 1MHz 1MHz 1MHz 90 5 90 5 30us 4us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 100us 2us 2 5 2us 2 5 3s ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS OUTPUT RESISTANCE gt 10 0 2nA 20nA range OUTPUT CAPACITANCE lt 10pF lt 100pF Filter ON 2nA 20nA range LOAD IMPEDANCE Stable into 10uH typical 100uH with Output Response SLOW CURRENT REGULATION Line lt 0 01 of range Load lt 0 01 of range VOLTAGE LIMIT Compliance Bipolar voltage limit set with single value 0 1V to 105V in 0 01V programmable steps Accuracy for 0 1V to 20V 0 1 20mV accuracy for 20V to 105V 0 1 100mV MAX OUTPUT POWER 11W four quadrant source or sink operation GUARD OUTPUT Maximum Load Capacitance 10nF M
140. 0uV 900V 2 110uV 9010V 2 200uV 2 100uV The Keithley Models 2182 and 2182 2182A can perform fundamental Delta mea surements using a conventional bipolar current source For details on the funda mental Delta process see Delta in Section 5 of the Model 2182 2182A User s Manual Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 21 NOTE The previous discussion on the fundamental Delta process is provided as background information to summarize delta measurements using a conventional bipolar current source The following information refers to an enhanced Delta op eration using the Model 622x with a Model 2182 2182A Model 622x measurement process When the Model 622x Current Source is used with the Model 2182 2182 to per form Delta measurements an advanced moving average algorithm is used for the Delta process This process provides improved accuracy 3 point voltage measurements and increased speed over the fundamental Delta process Delta measurement technique The Delta process is shown in Figure 5 7 As shown three Model 2182 2182A A D conversions are performed to yield a single Delta reading When Delta starts three Model 2182 2182A A Ds A B and C are performed and the Delta reading is calculated After the 1st Delta cycle the moving average technique is then used As shown a Delta reading is yielded for every subseque
141. 1 or ON SOURce 1 DCONductance ARM Arms Differential Conductance SOURce 1 DCONductance ARM Queries Diff Cond arm 1 armed 0 not armed SOURce 1 DCONductance NVZero Queries V zero value acquired from 2182 21824 Use the NVPR command to determine if a suitable Model 2182 2182A with the correct firmware revision is properly connected to the RS 232 port This query command can be used for the system configuration shown in Figure 5 2B The RS 232 cannot be the selected interface for the Model 6221 If it is this query will generate error 221 Settings Conflict See Configuration settings on page 5 55 for more information on these set tings STARt STEP STOP DELTa DELay and CABort Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 65 3 After setting up Differential Conductance using the above setup commands the ARM command arms Differential Conductance During the arming pro cess the Model 622x communicates with the Model 2182 2182A Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 56 When armed Differential Conductance will start when the Model 6221 is trig gered Differential Conductance can be un armed by sending the following command SOURce SWEep ABORt The query form for the arm command SOUR DCON ARM is used deter mine if Differential Conductance is armed A returned 1 indicate
142. 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 5 Configuring the RS 232 interface 1 2 6 See Press the COMM key select RS 232 and press ENTER If you are changing to the RS 232 interface from a different interface the Model 622x will perform a power on reset and you must re enter the COMM menu Select BAUD then press ENTER Enter the baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K or 115 2K and press ENTER to complete your selection Select TERMINATOR then press ENTER Set the terminator lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt or lt LF CR gt then press ENTER Select FLOW then press ENTER Set the flow control NONE or XON XOFF then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display RS 232 interface reference on page 10 25 for more information on the RS 232 interface Configuring the Model 6221 Ethernet interface 1 2 Press the COMM key select ETHERNET and press ENTER If you are changing to the ETHERNET interface from a different interface the Model 622x will perform a power on reset and you must re enter the COMM menu Select DHCP then press ENTER to set the Dynamic Host Control Protocol to ON or OFF Press ENTER after making a change With DHCP ON and when a DHCP server is used on the LAN it is not necessary to manually enter the IP address gateway or subnet mask If you select DHCP ON the Model 6221 will reset and then attempt to connect to
143. 100 Set compliance to 100V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 100V using reading SOUR CURR COMP 21 Set compliance to 21V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 21V using reading OUTP OFF Turn off output Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 19 Step 4 Calibrate guard circuit 1 Connect the digital multimeter to the Model 6220 6221 GUARD and LO jacks as shown in Figure 17 4 Be sure to connect the HI and LO terminals of the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack together as shown Select the DMM DC voltage function with auto range enabled 2 Send these commands in order to calibrate the guard circuit using the lt DMM_Reading gt parameter actual digital multimeter reading for each step SOUR CURR RANG 2e 4 Set current range to 200nA SOUR CURR 2e 5 Set current source to 204A OUTP ON Turn on output CAL PROT GUAR STEP1 INIT Set up for step 1 guard cal CAL PROT GUAR STEP1 DMM Reading Calstep 1 with reading CAL PROT GUAR STEP2 INIT Set up for step 2 guard cal CAL PROT GUAR STEP2 DMM Reading Calstep 2 with reading OUTP OFF Turn off output Step 5 Send dates save calibration and lock output calibration Send these command to send dates save calibration constants and dates and then finally lock out calibration CAL PROT DATE 2004 05 15 Send cal date 5 15 2004 CAL PROT NDUE 2005 05 15 Send cal due date 5 15 2005 CAL PROT SAVE Save
144. 17 24 Viewing calibration dates and count page 17 24 Changing the calibration password page 17 24 17 2 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction WARNING The information in this section is intended only for qualified service personnel Do not attempt these procedures unless you are qualified to do so Information is provided in this section to offer recommendations to the owner of the Model 622x to calibrate the instrument to the extent that is required by their quality system in the event that they have elected not to return the instrument to Keithley for routine calibration Any calibration procedure for this instrument should account for measurement uncertainties that arise from test equipment tol erances Before proceeding the laboratory should characterize the components used with the testing process in order to correct for test equipment tolerance and to estimate calibration uncertainty appropriately NOTE The test procedures in this section provide a rela tively low cost method of calibrating the instru ment The techniques used for these tests should be adequate for most users However in some cases calibration uncertainty may not be suffi cient for those with more stringent requirements If necessary contact your Keithley representative or the factory for information on more comprehen sive procedures to calibrate the Model 622x Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual
145. 20 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 17 1 Also connect the shorting connector to the INTERLOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections 2 Turn on the Model 6220 6221 and calibration equipment and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding 3 Unlock calibration as follows a Press the MENU key select CAL and press ENTER The main calibra tion menu will be displayed b Select UNLOCK and press ENTER The instrument will display the fol lowing PASSWORD Use 4 gt A V ENTER or EXIT c Enter the password at the prompt The default Model 6220 password is 006220 and the default Model 6221 password is 006221 d Press ENTER to unlock calibration Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 7 Step 2 Calibrate current source 1 2 Select the DMM DC current function with auto range enabled From normal display select the Model 6220 6221 100mA current source range See Section 3 for details on setting current source range Press the MENU key select CAL and press ENTER From the main calibration menu select EXECUTE and press ENTER The instrument will display CALIBRATION SOURCE COMPLIANCE GUARD WAVE WAVE displayed only for 6221 Select SOURCE then press ENTER The unit will display I CAL Press ENTER to Output 100 00mA Press ENTER to output the positive full range current value for the pres ently selected range The instrument will promp
146. 22 Response 10 17 Message Terminator RMT 10 18 Response speed 6221 3 6 Restoring setups 1 25 RJ 45 connector 10 32 Rotary knob 1 10 RS 232 5 7 connections 10 27 RS 232 cable 1 6 RS 232 interface 10 2 10 5 10 25 RS 232 settings 10 25 Safety symbols and terms 1 3 SCPI commands 14 1 C 11 SCPI Conformance Information D 1 SCPI language 10 3 SCPI programming 1 29 SDC selective device clear 10 23 Sending a response message 10 17 Sending and receiving data RS 232 10 25 Serial communications 5 5 Serial polling and SRQ 11 9 Service request enable register 11 8 Setting 9 8 Settling time 3 7 Shielding 2 16 Noise shield 2 17 Safety shield 2 17 Short form rules 10 14 Single command messages 10 15 Sink 9 6 Sink operation 3 3 Source 9 8 Source and compliance editing 3 9 Source output commands 3 15 Source preset 1 17 3 12 Source ranges 3 2 Sourcing current 3 13 SPE SPD serial polling 10 23 11 9 SRQ 11 7 Standard event status 11 11 Status byte and service request SRQ 11 7 Status byte register 11 7 Status messages B 2 Status registers 11 10 Bit descriptions 11 10 Condition 11 17 Enable 11 5 Event 11 18 Measurement 11 14 Operation 11 12 Questionable 11 16 Reading 11 6 Service request enable 11 8 Standard 11 11 Sweep Customized 4 6 Linear staircase 4 4 Logarithmic staircase 4 5 System connections PC control 5 7 Stand alone system 5 6 Terminator 10 25 Test fixture 2 20 Test systems PC control 5 5 Stand a
147. 221 Only 7 29 2 SOUR WAVE DCYC lt NRf gt Set duty cycle This command sets the duty cycle for square and ramp waveforms For a square wave the duty cycle is the portion of the total cycle that the wave is high For a ramp waveform the duty cycle corresponds to the fraction of the total wave cycle that is rising If this command is sent when the waveform is armed the Model 6221 will re arm itself If the waveform must be reloaded while the output is enabled the inactive value will be output during this period The duty cycle selection only applies for square and ramp waveforms and is ignored for others 3 SOUR WAVE AMPL lt NRf gt Set amplitude This command sets the peak amplitude for all waveforms The peak ampli tude is one half the peak to peak value For example an amplitude of 100mA results in a peak to peak value of 200mA For fixed ranging the offset plus peak amplitude cannot exceed the selected range 4 SOUR WAVE FREQ lt NRf gt Set frequency This command sets the frequency for all waveforms The maximum frequency for all waveforms is 100kHz 5 SOUR WAVE OFFS lt NRf gt Set offset This command allows you to add a DC offset to a waveform For fixed rang ing the offset plus amplitude cannot exceed the selected range 6 SOUR WAVE RANG lt name gt Set range mode Selects whether to use the best fixed range or whether to use a fixed range If best range is selected the source range will automatical
148. 25 duty cycle 90 phase marker and 15 second duration SOUR WAVE FUNC RAMP Select ramp wave SOUR WAVE FREQ 5e4 Set frequency to 50kHz SOUR WAVE AMPL 5e 3 Set amplitude to 5mA SOUR WAVE OFFS 0 Set offset to SOUR WAVE DCYC 25 Set duty cycle to 25 SOUR WAVE PMAR STAT ON Turn on phase marker SOUR WAVE PMAR 90 Set phase marker to 90 SOUR WAVE PMAR OLIN 1 Use line 1 for phase marker SOUR WAVE DUR TIME 15 15 second duration SOUR WAVE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range 3 Arm and trigger the waveform turn on output SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform SOUR WAVE INIT Turn on output trigger waveform 4 To stop generating the waveform and turn the source output off before the duration elapses send this command SOUR WAVE ABOR Stop generating waveform Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 25 Programming arbitrary waveforms 1 Restore defaults with this command RST Configure the waveform Examples The following commands configure 100kHz arbitrary wave with an amplitude of 25mA OmA offset phase marker off and 20 second duration SOUR WAVE ARB DATA 0 5 0 25 Define arbitrary data points in 0 0 3 0 4 location 0 SOUR WAVE ARB COPY 1 points to location 1 SOUR WAVE FUNC ARB1 Select arb wave location 1 SOUR WAVE FREQ 1 5 Set frequency to 100kHz SOUR WAVE AMPL 25e 3 Set am
149. 4 General bus commands Command Effect on Model 622x REN Goes into remote when next addressed to listen IFC Reset interface all devices go into talker and listener idle states LLO LOCAL key and OUTPUT ON locked out GTL Cancel remote restore front panel operation for Model 622x DCL Returns all devices to known conditions SDC Returns Model 622x to known conditions GET Initiates a trigger SPE SPD Serial polls Model 622x REN remote enable The remote enable command is sent to the Model 622x by the controller to set up the instrument for remote operation Generally the instrument should be placed in the remote mode before you attempt to program it over the bus Simply setting REN true does not actually place the instrument in the remote state You must address the instrument to listen after setting REN true before it goes into remote Note that the instrument does not have to be in remote to be a talker Note that all front panel controls except for LOCAL POWER and OUTPUT OFF are inoperative while the instrument is in remote OUTPUT ON is inoperative in remote You can restore normal front panel operation by pressing the LOCAL key IFC interface clear The IFC command is sent by the controller to place all instruments on the bus in the local talker listener idle states The Model 622x responds to the IFC com mand by canceling front panel TALK or LSTN lights if the instrument was previ ously placed in one of those states Note
150. 4 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Test systems NOTE Supplied example software allows you to control Model 622x delta tests from any PC using simple mouse clicks through a virtual front panel For details see Using the example software on page 10 36 Keithley instrumentation requirements Keithley instrumentation requirements for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Models 6220 and 2182 Delta and Differential Conductance Models 6220 and 2182A Delta and Differential Conductance Models 6221 and 2182 Delta and Differential Conductance Models 6221 and 2182A Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance NOTE The firmware version of the Model 2182 must be A10 or higher The firmware version of the Model 2182A must be C01 or higher System configurations There are two system configurations that can be used for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance operation and are shown in Figure 5 2 One is for front panel stand alone operation and the other is for remote programming PC control system Both systems use serial communications via RS 232 interface between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 21824 Stand alone system System configuration for stand alone front panel operation is shown in Figure 5 2A The RS 232 interface for the Model 2182 2182A must be enabled on and the selected interface for the Model 622x must be the GPI
151. 45 5s 2s SOUR LIST COMP 3 1 4 5 2 Compliance 3V 1V 4V 5V 2V SOUR SWE COUN 1 Set sweep count to 1 SOUR SWE CAB OFF Disable compliance abort Arm and run the sweep SOUR SWE ARM Arm sweep turn on output INIT Trigger sweep When the sweep is done turn the source output off with this command OUTP OFF NOTE A custom sweep cannot be saved as a user set up Attempting to do so will generate error 528 Cannot save CUSTOM sweep setup Return to Section 4 topics 4 18 Sweeps SCPI commands sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Commands for linear and logarithmic staircase sweeps are listed in Table 4 4 while commands for custom list sweeps are listed in Table 4 5 page 4 21 Addi tional information for each command is provided in notes that follow the tables Table 4 4 Staircase sweep commands linear and logarithmic Command Description Default SOURce 1 CURRent STARt n Sets start current 0 lt n gt 0 105 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 CURRent STOP n Sets stop current 1 0 1 n 0 105 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 CURRent STEP n Sets step current 1e 2 n 1e 13 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 CURRent CENTer n Sets center current 2 0 n 0 105 to 0 105 SOURce 1 CURRent SPAN lt n gt Sets span current 0 1 n 2e 13 to 0 210 A SOURce 1 DELay n Sets source delay 1 n 0 001 to 999999 999 s SOURce 1 SWEep ARM Prepar
152. 5us g Fast mode settling time 2uA Check limit of 6us h All nA ranges check limits are same as specification REVISIONS DATE Hw DATEs 11 04 CKD DATE KEITHLEY SPECIFICATIONS FORM 28777A SBG HW 1 17 05 Rev B Page of 1 SPEC 6221 B Error and Status Messages Appendix B topics Introduction page B 2 B 2 Error and Status Messages Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction Coded error and status messages are reported for error status events that may occur The coded error and status messages are listed in Table B 1 Error status codes with a negative number are reserved by SCPI Positive numbered codes are instrument dependent The code and message is displayed briefly on the Model 622x when the error status event occurs The code and message is also place in the Error Queue The following commands are used to read the Error Queue SYStem ERRor STATus QUEue When a queue command is sent the latest error status event is returned and is then cleared from the queue Details on the Error queue are provided on page 11 20 When an error or status event occurs a corresponding bit in a status register will set The status registers include the Standard Event Register Measurement Event Register Operation Event Register and the Questionable Event Register Table B 1 also lists the register bit that is set by the error status event The status structure is covered in Section 11
153. 8 SBG COMPANY CONFIDENTAL 6220 Programmable Current Source HISTORY Ver 1 Draft RKN on 12 01 03 based on Ver 4 of 6221 Spec Ver 2 Update 04 08 04 per Eng Sample Audit RKN Ver 3 Update 5 14 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Ver 4 Update 5 20 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Ver 5 Update 6 07 04 for Eng Pilot Audit RKN Trigger rate changed to 1000 s common mode added 50 60Hz at 250Vrms Rev A Update 6 08 04 release version of Ver5 RKN INTERNAL SPECIFICATIONS 2nA 20nA ranges use the same sense resistor thus noise is the same between the two ranges For Guard accuracy greater than 2mA load current accuracy is approximately 0 5mV mA of load current or about 50mV max at 100mA load current Low current range 20uA and below 1 settling time specs are limited by ability to verify performance RMS Noise 10Hz 20MHz limit checked to 5x typical due to cal system noise floor limitations HW 1 17 05 Rev B Page 1 of 1 REVISIONS APP DATE DRN w DATE RSS APP sk DATE 6 11 04 PART NUMBER SPECIFICATIONS SPEC 6220 FORM 28777A SBG BRUNING 40 21 62198 SBG 6221 AC and DC Current SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Source Range 5 over range Accuracy 1 Year 23 5 Yordg amps Programming Temperature Coefficient C 0 18 C amp 28 50 C Resolution 0 4 2pA 0 3 10pA 0 3 100pA 0 1 0 05 10nA 0 05 1
154. 999900 If you change from INFinite from the front panel to a numeric setting the duration will default to 10 seconds or 10000 cycles as determined by the last selected duration type time or cycles When a waveform is armed the execution time is determined based on the explic itly programmed time duration or calculated from the specified cycles or duration settings The time duration cannot be changed while a waveform is armed If the frequency is changed while the waveform is armed the existing execution time will remain fixed The equivalent time duration will not be recalculated even if the duration is set to cycles If the same number of cycles is desired at the new fre quency the wave function should be aborted and then re armed to force the recal culation of waveform execution time Arbitrary waveforms A total of five arbitrary waveforms can be defined via remote One is designated as volatile and is stored in location 0 Locations 1 4 are stored in flash memory and saved across power cycles At power up location 0 is empty and cannot be used until it is populated with waveform data In order to save arbitrary data points you must first store them in location 0 and then copy them to the desired location 1 4 Using the external low jitter trigger mode Model 6221 units with firmware revision A03 or later include a mode to trigger the arbitrary waveform generator using the instrument s trigger link lines see Exter nal trigg
155. A rear panel fuse drawer is located below the AC receptacle see Figure 1 2 This fuse protects the power line input of the instrument If the line voltage fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the AC line and other equipment before changing the line voltage setting or replacing the line fuse 1 At the top of the fuse holder is a small tab At this location use a small bladed screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer open 2 Slide the fuse drawer out to gain access to the fuse Note that the fuse drawer does not pull all the way out of the power module 3 Snapthe old fuse out of the drawer and replace it with the same type 1 6A 250V 5 x 20mm Keithley P N FU 106 1 6 4 Push the fuse drawer back into the power module CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage only replace fuse with the type and rating listed If the instru ment repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the problem before replacing the fuse Power up sequence On power up the Model 622x performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momentarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on Error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE If a problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Keithley Instruments Inc for repair
156. ALCulate2 CALC2 commands buffer statistics 6 FORMat lt name gt Select buffer statistic MEAN SDEViation MEAN MAXimum MINimum PKPK FORMat Query selected statistic STATe lt b gt Enable or disable calculation OFF IMMediate Perform the selected buffer calculation on buffer contents DATA Read the results of the buffer statistic Return to Section 14 topics 14 4 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 1 cont Calculate command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI CALCulate3 CALC3 commands limit testing 9 LIMit 1 Stage 1 limit test STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit testing OFF STATe Query state on or off of limit testing SOURce2 lt NRf gt Set limit test fail pattern 0 to 15 15 1111 SOURce2 Query limit test fail pattern FAIL Query limit test pass fail 0 pass 1 fail FORCe Output force commands OFF STATe lt b gt Enable or disable I O pattern force state STATe Query state on or off of I O pattern force state PATTern lt NRf gt Set I O pattern 0 to 15 15 1111 PATTern Query I O pattern Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 5 Table 14 2 Display command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI DISPlay Display control commands 13 ENABIe lt b gt Enables or disables front panel display and
157. Assuming no errors occur the Model 622x will power up as follows The message INITIALIZING is displayed for 3 seconds The message LOADING DIGITAL FPGA is displayed briefly The message LOADING ANALOG FPGA is displayed briefly The message LOADING MAIN is displayed briefly All display digit segments and annunciators are briefly turned on Return to Section 1 topics 1 16 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The instrument model number firmware revision levels and the GPIB address are displayed briefly as follows MODEL 622x Rev SCPI 24 where xxx is the main board ROM revision yyyy is the display board ROM revision For the Model 6221 the messages LOADING WAVEFORM and then WAVEFORM LOAD DONE are displayed briefly NOTE There are two internal LEDs that turn on and blink for a few seconds during the power up sequence One LED is visible through the top cover air vents and the other LED is visible through the air vents on the right side of the case After the short period of blinking these LEDs will remain off while the instrument is on System identification Serial numbers and revisions for the mainframe analog board digital board and SCPI can be displayed by selecting the SERIAL item of the main menu press MAIN gt Select SERIAL For remote programming use the following commands to read serial numbers SN and revisions
158. B or the Ethernet Model 6221 Delta setup and operation are controlled from the Model 622x The RS 232 interface is used for communications between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 2182A The Model 622x sends setup commands to the Model 2182 21824 and the Model 2182 2182A sends Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance readings to the buffer of the Model 622x See Serial communications for more details Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 5 Once the test is started trigger synchronization between the two instruments is controlled by the Trigger Link PC control system System configuration for PC control of the Model 622x is shown in Figure 5 2B The RS 232 interface for the Model 2182 2182A must be enabled on and the selected interface for the Model 622x must be the GPIB or the Ethernet Model 6221 The test setup and operation is controlled by the PC using remote programming via the IEEE 488 bus or the Ethernet Model 6221 The RS 232 interface is used for communications between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 2182A The Model 622x sends setup commands to the Model 2182 2182A and the Model 2182 2182A sends Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance readings to the buffer of the Model 622x See Serial communications for more details Once the test is started trigger synchronization between the two instruments is controlled by the T
159. Binary format Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 7 Status byte and service request SRQ Service request is controlled by two 8 bit registers the status byte register and the service request enable register Figure 11 3 shows the structure of these regis ters Figure 11 3 Status byte and service request Status Summary Messages 6 Generation Serial Poll Service Request STB rat RQS OSB B6 ESB MAV QSB MS B7 MSS B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register j 3 6 7 OR D SRE OSB ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB SRE B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 81 BO Decimal 128 32 16 8 4 1 Weights 27 25 24 23 22 2 OSB Operation Summary Bit amp Logical AND MSS Master Summary Status OR Logical OR RQS Request for Service ESB Event Summary Bit MAV Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit Status byte register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the status byte register These summar
160. CC lt name gt SOURce or ACCeptor ARM ILINe lt NRf gt Set ARM layer input signal line 1 6 7 1 ARM OLINe lt NRf gt Set ARM layer output signal line 1 6 e lg ARM OUTPut lt name gt Trigger layer commands TRIGger SIGNal TRIGger SOURce lt name gt TRIGger DIRection lt name gt TRIGger ILINe NRf TRIGger OLINe lt NRf gt TRIGger OUTPut lt name gt Enable disable ARM layer output trigger name TENTer TEXit or NONE Select event detector control source 19 name IMMediate or TLINk Bypass TRIG control layer 1 Control TRIG source bypass 12 lt name gt SOURce or ACCeptor Set TRIG layer input signal line 1 6 13 Set TRIG layer output signal line 1 6 14 Select TRIG layer output trigger 15 lt name gt SOURce 1 DELay or NONE IMM ACC 1 2 NONE Arm layer commands control entire sweep Trigger layer commands control individual sweep steps Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 11 1 INIT Initiate one trigger cycle This command is used to initiate one trigger cycle and take the unit out of the idle state ABOR Reset trigger system This command resets the trigger system If a sweep is in progress it will be halted and the source value set to zero The operate state however will be left on The sweep is still armed and can be started again with another INIT command i e no re arming is
161. Configure communications for the Models 2182A and 6221 as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 3 On the Model 2182A select the desired measurement range using the RANGE keys Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 45 Perform one the following steps to configure Pulse Delta Step for Fixed output or step Il for Sweep output Configuration settings are explained on page 5 39 Fixed output On the Model 6221 press CONFIG and then PULSE to access the CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu a Set I HI I LO pulse WIDTH COUNT RANGING source delay SRC DEL INTERVAL disable NO the SWEEP function and set the num ber of low measurements LOW MEAS to perform b When finished configuring the Fixed output use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Sweep output Two configure processes are required for Sweep out put a the Model 6221 press CONFIG and then PULSE to access the CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu Use this menu to set pulse WIDTH COUNT set the number of low measurements LOW MEAS to per form and enable YES the SWEEP function When finished use the EXIT key to return to the normal display state b On the Model 6221 press CONFIG and then SWP to access the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu Use the TYPE menu item to select and configure the sweep including the sweep delay and use the SOURCE RANGING menu item to
162. DISP key The following message will be briefly displayed before the display shuts off FRONT PANEL DISABLED Press LOCAL or DISP to resume As indicated in the displayed message press LOCAL or DISP to enable the front panel Remote programming Use the following command to control the front panel DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Enable or disable the front panel b ON or OFF Default setting is front panel ON Step to step timing jitter For Sweeps Delta and Differential Conductance step to step timing may jitter as much as 1ms This jitter can be eliminated by disabling the front panel as previ ously explained If the display is disabled while a Sweep Delta or Differential Conductance test is running a 2 second pause in continuous operation will occur To avoid this pause disable the front panel before arming the Sweep Delta or Differential Conduc tance test Keep in mind that remote programming must then be used to arm and start the test The front panel keys to arm and start the test are disabled while the front panel is disabled Menus Many aspects of operation are configured through menus A direct access menu can be opened by pressing a single key and other menus require that the CONFIG key be pressed before pressing another key CONFIG menus CONFIG SWP is an example of a key press sequence To open the menu press the CONFIG key and then the SWP key Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Refe
163. DMM Reading OUTP OFF Use DMM Figure 17 1 for 100mA 200nA ranges Use picoammeter Figure 17 2 for 20nA and 2nA ranges Return to Section 17 topics 17 18 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Step 3 Calibrate compliance 1 Connect the digital multimeter DMM to the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 17 3 Set the DMM to measure DC voltage with auto range enabled Send these commands in order to calibrate compliance using the lt DMM_Reading gt parameter actual digital multimeter reading for each step OUTP ON Turn on output SOUR CURR RANG 2e 3 Select 2mA range SOUR CURR 2e 3 Output 2mA for cal SOUR CURR COMP 20 Set compliance to 20V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 20V using reading SOUR CURR COMP 0 1 Set compliance to 0 1V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading gt Calibrate 0 1V using reading SOUR CURR 2e 3 Output 2mA for cal SOUR CURR COMP 20 compliance to 20V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 20V using reading SOUR CURR COMP 0 1 Set compliance to 0 1V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 0 1V using reading SOUR CURR 2e 3 Output 2mA for cal SOUR CURR COMP 100 Set compliance to 100V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 100V using reading SOUR CURR COMP 21 Set compliance to 21V CAL PROT SENS DMM Reading Calibrate 21V using reading SOUR CURR 2e 3 Output 2mA for cal SOUR CURR COMP
164. Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 1 Usethe NVPResent command to determine if a suitable Model 2182A with the correct firmware revision is properly connected to the RS 232 port This query command can be used for the system configuration shown in Figure 5 2B on page 5 5 The RS 232 cannot be the selected interface for the Model 6221 If it is this query will generate error 221 Settings Conflict 2 Details on the Configuration settings are provided on page 5 39 3 When using a Fixed output use the SOUR PDEL INT command to set the Pulse Delta cycle time period in PLCs When using Sweep output use the SOUR DEL command to set the Pulse Delta cycle time period in seconds for a linear or log sweep For a custom sweep use the SOUR LIST DEL command to cycle time in seconds See Section 4 for details on sweeps 4 When using a Fixed output use the SOUR PDEL RANG command to set the source range When using a Sweep output use the SOUR SWE RANG com mand to set range 5 After setting up Pulse Delta using the above setup commands the ARM com mand arms Pulse Delta During the arming process the Model 622x commu nicates with the Model 2182A Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 42 When armed Pulse Delta will start when the Model 6221 is triggered Pulse Delta can be un armed by sending the following command SOURce SWEep ABORt The query form for the arm comman
165. ER IN Set the TRIGGER IN SOURCE TRIGGER LINK line 1 6 and EVENT DETECT BYPASS ONCE or NEVER b TRIGGER OUT Set the trigger LINE 1 6 and events SOURCE ON OFF DELAY ON OFF 4 Configure and run your sweep as outlined in Front panel sweep opera tion on page 4 10 Depending on how you configured the trigger model you may have to apply triggers from the appropriate sources to start the sweep and to cycle through the sweep steps Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 9 Remote trigger operation The following is a typical example of using remote trigger configuration to enhance sweeps For further details on the steps for sweep programming see Remote sweep operation on page 4 14 When setting trigger model parame ters keep the following in mind The arm layer controls the entire sweep The trigger layer controls individual sweep steps See SCPI commands triggering on page 8 10 for details on trigger com mands Programming triggering 1 Restore defaults with this command RST Configure the arm layer Examples The following commands configure the bus trigger source set the trigger output line to 1 and enable a trigger output pulse and then operation leaves the trigger layer ARM SOUR BUS Select BUS trigger or GET ARM OLIN 1 Set arm output trigger to line 1 ARM OUTP TEX Output trigger on exit of trig layer Configure
166. ESh While Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is running and Math is enabled the CALC1 DATA command can be sent to read the latest last post math reading processed by the Model 622x If this read command is sent before a new reading is available the last reading will again be returned The CALC1 DATA FRESh command is the same as the CALC1 DATA com mand except that once a reading is returned it cannot be returned again This read command guarantees that each reading gets returned only once If a new fresh reading is not available when CALC1 DATA FRESh is sent error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur C Compliance test result CALCulate3 LIMit 1 FAIL While Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is running source compli ance for a reading can be tested The test can be set to fail when the source enters or exits the compliance condition A returned value of 0 indicates a pass condition and 1 indicates a fail condition Return to Section 5 topics 5 16 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual D Buffer readings TRACe DATA TRACe DATA TYPE TRACe DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt CALCulate2 DATA With readings stored in the buffer use TRACe DATA to return all readings Use TRACe DATA TYPE to determine the type of readings stored in the buffer returns NONE DELT DCON or PULS Use the TRACe DATA SELected command to specify a l
167. FIG key For example to configure a sweep press CONFIG and then SWP Rear panel summaries The rear panel of the Models 622x is shown in Figure 1 2 The Model 6221 rear panel is shown but the Model 6220 is identical except it does not have the Ether net connector The descriptions of the rear panel components follow Figure 1 2 Return to Section 1 topics 1 8 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 1 1 Models 6220 and 6621 front panels Model 6220 KEITHLEY 6220 PRECISION CURRENT SOURCE MODE TE O RANGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 NFI COMM ADDR DISP TRIG UNITS RECALL CHED ae POWER 6 7 8 9 0000 RANGE OUTPUT I ON OFF H Q SAVE SETUP TRIAX AVG MATH MENU EXIT ENTER Q Model 6221 KEITHLEY 6221 DC AND AC CURRENT SOURCE MODE EDIT O LOCAL Q Q o RANGE NFI COMM ADDR DISP TRIG UNITS RECALL AMPL FREQ RANGE 6 T 8 9 0000 Q SAVE sETUP AVG MATH MENU EXIT ENTER 2 Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 9 1 Special keys and power switch EDIT LOCAL Dual function While in local EDIT selects the source editing mode CONFIG POWER While in remote LOCAL cancel the remote mode Use to configure a function or operation Power switch In position turns 622x on 1 out position turns it off O Functi
168. Filter Math and Buffer filter types M Averaging filter commands esses nennen eren nennen ennt Bu tfer commiands cerit rtt FO Ec PC Wave Functions 6221 Only Wave function characteristics 00 Wave function configuration menu Waveform example parameters essent enne Waveform function commands sess Triggering Trigger configuration menu sess Trigger commands RES 9 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 10 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 10 5 Table 10 6 Table 10 7 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 11 5 Table 11 6 Table 11 7 12 Table 12 1 13 Table 13 1 Table 13 2 14 Table 14 1 Table 14 2 Table 14 3 Table 14 4 Table 14 5 Table 14 6 Table 14 7 Table 14 8 Table 14 9 Table 14 10 Table 14 11 Limit Test and Digital I O Limit test commands e 9 3 Limit test fail pattern 9 4 Digital I O 2 9 9 Digital I O port Values oerte eet erre obe ene HH ES S 9 10 Remote Operations Communications 10 4 Remote interface configuration command
169. HI and LO termi nals of the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack together as shown Select the DMM DC voltage function with auto range enabled From the main calibration menu select EXECUTE and press ENTER The unit will display CALIBRATION SOURCE COMPLIANCE GUARD WAVE WAVE displayed only for 6221 Return to Section 17 topics 17 12 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 3 Select GUARD then press ENTER The unit will display POSITIVE GUARD CAL Press ENTER to Output 020 000 4 Press ENTER to output 20pA for positive guard calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 22 00000mV Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT 5 Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value 6 Press ENTER The display will prompt NEGATIVE GUARD CAL Press ENTER to Output 020 00 7 Press ENTER to output 20uA for negative guard calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 22 00000mV Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT 8 Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value and then press ENTER Figure 17 4 Connections for guard calibration Digital Multimeter Measure DC Voltage 6220 6221 Guard qs HO High Connect i High and Low i f of Output i Input Together 17 Low i Output 1 Low f Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 13 Step 5 Enter dates and save
170. IG layer control source This command selects the TRIG layer event detector control source IMMediate and TLINk TRIG SIGN Bypass TRIG layer control source This command is used to bypass the TRIGger layer control source and move on to the next layer in the trigger model the device action block in this case Return to Section 8 topics 8 12 Triggering 12 13 14 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual TRIG DIR lt name gt Set TRIG source bypass This command enables SOURce or disables ACCeptor the TRIG source bypass TRIG ILIN lt NRf gt Set TRIG layer TRIG input line This command selects the TRIG layer input signal line 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 TRIG OLIN lt NRf gt Set TRIG layer TRIG output line This command selects the TRIG layer input signal line 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 Note that for the Model 6221 only the TRIG output line and phase marker SOUR WAVE PMAR OLIN lines cannot be the same or a 221 Settings Conflict error will occur See Phase marker on page 7 9 TRIG OUTP lt name gt Select when to output trigger This command selects when to output the TRIG layer TRIG Available selec tions include SOURce 1 output after source DELay output after sweep delay or NONE disabled Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual External triggering External trigger connector Triggering 8 13 Input and output triggers are received and sent via the rear panel
171. LOW 220 STYLE and press the ENTER key 3 Press the EXIT key to return to the normal display state Remote programming Commands for inner shield connection for OUTPUT OUTPut ISHield Query connection on inner shield of 622x OUTPUT connector OUTPut ISHield lt name gt Connect inner shield to guard or output low name GUARd or OLOW Example Connects the inner shield of the OUTPUT connector to the driven guard OUTPut ISHield GUARd Safety test fixture To prevent electric shock an earth grounded test fixture should be used to pre vent inadvertent contact with live circuitry With proper use of Interlock the output of the Model 622x will be interrupted when the lid of the test fixture is open See Section 2 for details on using Interlock with a test fixture Return to Section 5 topics 5 10 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 5 Guarded test connections NOTE For this connection scheme the inner shield of the Model 622x OUTPUT connector must be connected to the driven guard See Guarding on page 5 8 for de tails on connecting the inner shield of the OUTPUT connector to Guard INTERLOCK connector Interlock Cable OUTPUT connector T Keithley 622x 1 Interlock SWEET gt Keithley 2182 2182A Current Source High och HI Nanovoltmeter Inner shield set H as Guard
172. M Arms Delta INIT IMM Starts Delta measurements A Trace points specifies the size of the buffer Buffer size should be the same value as Delta count See Section 6 for details on all buffer commands B Theinitiate command starts Delta readings After the specified finite num ber of Delta readings are performed Delta will stop running At this point another initiate command will re start Delta New Delta readings will over write the old Delta readings in the Model 622x buffer If the INFinity count is set Delta will run continuously If the buffer fills Delta readings will stop being stored even though Delta continues to run Return to Section 5 topics 5 30 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 6 Read Delta readings While Delta is running the latest Model 2182 2182A Delta reading can be read by the Model 622x using the following command SENS DATA Reads the latest Delta reading The above read command reads the last Delta reading that was performed by the Model 2182 2182A If this command is sent before a new reading is available the last Delta reading will again be returned NOTE If a read command is sent when Delta is not run ning error 221 Settings Conflict will occur See Table 5 2 for details on errors associated with Delta operation NOTE Details on using Model 622x Read commands are provided on page 5 15 7 When finished with De
173. Manual Averaging filter The average filter can be used with Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conduc tance There are two types of averaging filter moving and repeating Filter type is explained on page 6 3 The averaging filter stabilizes noisy delta measurements caused by noisy input signals For Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance readings from the Model 2182 2182A are processed by the Model 622x as delta voltage readings These delta readings can then be filtered by the Model 622x Data reading flow from the Model 2182 2182A through the averaging filter is explained in Data flow on page 5 13 Table 6 1 lists the filter types that can yes and cannot no be used with the vari ous delta tests Note that the filter must be enabled before arming the delta test Table 6 1 Average filter types Average Filter Moving Repeating Delta Yes Yes Pulse Delta Fixed output Yes Yes Sweep output Yes No 2 Differential Conductance No Yes 1 If the moving average filter is enabled when Differential Conductance is armed the filter type will change to repeating 2 If the repeating average filter is enabled when Pulse Delta Sweep output is armed the filter type will change to moving Averaging filter characteristics Filter count The filter count specifies how many delta readings within the filter window to place in the memory stack Keep in mind that there are three A Ds for ev
174. Manual Applications E 13 Shunt output with a capacitor With little or no output capacitance the output voltage of the Model 6221 can rise at a rate of 5V us This fast slew rate dv dt is a primary cause of the overshoot Once the overshoot reaches the compliance setpoint it takes approximately 1us for the compliance circuit to respond This allows the output voltage to overshoot up to 2V before the compliance circuit can pull it down to its normal operating level Slowing down the slew rate by adding a capacitor across the output will allow the compliance circuit to respond fast enough to clamp the output voltage without any significant overshoot into the compliance region The slew rate dv dt is calculated as follows dv dt 1 Where is the output current C is capacitance placed across the output For example assume the output current is 100 and a 1nF capacitor is placed across the output The slew rate is calculated as follows dv dt I C 100A 1nF 0 1V us This much slower slew rate 0 1V us versus 5V us with no capacitor will allow the compliance circuit to respond quickly enough to clamp the overshoot Always use the smallest possible capacitor that will meet your needs Using a capacitor that is too large may slow down the slew rate to an unacceptable level CAUTION A capacitor is an energy storage device If the output is shorted a large current spike could be delivered to the load Return to Appe
175. Model 6220 Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 7 The FAST setting allows a faster output response The FAST response setting changes the maximum output response bandwidth of the Model 6221 to 1MHz It also reduces stability The output will remain stable into a 101Hz typical load For a more complex load the faster speed may make the test system more suscepti ble to oscillation Note that output stability into an inductive load is only dependent on the response mode setting and is not affected by the analog filter on or off Again experimentation may be the best way to determine which response setting FAST or SLOW provides the best results Settling time specifications The output settling time specifications are listed in Appendix A and assume that the analog filter is disabled For the Model 6221 settling times are provided for the FAST and SLOW response speed settings Note that the SLOW setting of the Model 6221 has the same response as the Model 6220 Enabling the analog filter may or may not significantly increase settling times For details see Analog filter on page 3 5 NOTE All settling times are typical into a resistive load to 1 of final value The listed settling times in Appendix A are specified for a resistive load The max imum load resistance for the specified settling times is calculated as follows Max Load Resistance 2V IFULL SCALE OF RA
176. NGE For example on the 20mA range the max load resistance is calculated as fol lows Max Load Resistance 2V 20mA 1000 The settling times for other load conditions are calculated as explained in the fol lowing paragraphs 100mA 20mA 2mA 200p 20pA and 2A ranges Model 6220 and Model 6221 slow mode ST 1019901 0 5 x 1 5 x 1 Where ST is the settling time in microseconds Ifs is the full scale of range current in amps is the load resistance in ohms Return to Section 3 topics 3 8 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Model 6221 fast mode For peak to peak voltage swings lt 100Vpk pk ST 4909 0 5 x Ifs x RI Where ST is the settling time in microseconds Ifs is the full scale of range current in amps is the load resistance in ohms For peak to peak voltage swings 100Vpk pk output slew rate limitation based upon 5V us ST 109901 0 5 x Ifs x RI Where ST is the settling time in microseconds Ifs is the full scale of range current in amps is the load resistance in ohms Vpp is the peak to peak voltage step 100V Vpp 210V Vpp 100 x 0 2 200nA 20nA and 2nA ranges Models 6220 and 6221 The step response for these ranges is largely determined by the impedance of the load which is primarily made up of the load resistance and parasitic load capaci tance The construction of the DUT may also contribute capacitance and
177. NRf gt ENABle EVENI Return to Section 11 topics 11 4 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Clearing registers and queues When the Model 622x is turned on the bits of all registers in the status structure are clear reset to 0 and the two queues are empty Commands to reset the event event enable registers and the error queue are listed in Table 11 1 In addi tion to these commands any enable register can be reset by sending the 0 parameter value with the individual command to program the register NOTE SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on sta tus structure registers and queues Table 11 1 Common and SCPI commands reset registers and clear queues Commands Description Reference To reset registers CLS Reset all bits of the following event registers to 0 Note 1 Standard event register Operation event register Measurement event register Questionable event register STATus STATus subsystem PRESet Reset all bits of the following enable registers to 0 Note 1 Operation event enable register Measurement event enable register Questionable event enable register To clear error queue CLS Clear all messages from error queue Note 2 STATus STATus subsystem QUEue Error queue CLEar Clear messages from error queue Note 3 SYSTem SYSTem subsystem ERRor Error queue CLEar Clear messages from error queue Note 3 Notes 1 The standard event enable register is no
178. Note 1 Status UO Send Status Word U1 Send I O Port Status Digital Self Test JO Not Supported Execute X Execute other DDCs Notes The following notes explain the operational differences between the Models 622x and Model 220 Some notes provide additional information for the commands listed in Table 15 1 Return to Section 15 topics 15 4 220 Language 10 11 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The Model 622x does not have four digital input lines but instead only has two The J command for digital self test is not supported JO will be accepted but has no effect The UO response string will correctly indicate a 1 in the J position after a JO command is sent and the next query of UO will correctly change the 1 in that position back to zero The D commands are accepted but do not have any effect The two line display of the 622x can accommodate all the information at once so there is no need to change display modes Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance cannot be run if the lan guage is set to the KI 220 mode The V command for setting compliance accepts any valid floating point number between 0 1 and 105 The Model 220 only accepts integers between 1 and 105 The 220 language can only be used with the GPIB It is not available when RS 232 or Ethernet communication is selected The 220 language is a bus only operation with significantly different front panel operation from the Model 22
179. Note 3 Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register OPERation Operation event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register QUEStionable Questionable event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register y PRESet Return status registers to default states QUEue Read error queue y NEXT Read the most recent error message Note 4 ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for error Note 5 y queue 999 to 999 Read the enabled messages V DISable lt list gt Specify error and status messages not to be placed in error queue 999 to 999 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from error queue Parameters lt NDN gt Bxx x Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hx Hexadecimal format x 0 to FFFF Octal format x 0 to 177777 lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 Decimal format Notes 1 Commands in this subsystem are not affected by RST or SYSTem PRESet The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes Event registers Power up and CLS clears
180. ORD and press ENTER 2 Toclear the password select YES then press ENTER The PASSWORD CLEARED message will be displayed Remote interface configuration commands Commands to select the GPIB RS 232 and Model 6221 Ethernet interface to control the password and to configure the RS 232 and Ethernet interfaces by remote are listed in Table 10 2 Additional information for each command is pro vided in notes that follow the table See RS 232 interface reference on page 10 25 for more RS 232 information and Ethernet interface reference on page 10 29 for more Ethernet information Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 10 2 Remote interface configuration commands Remote Operations 10 7 Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate SELect lt name gt GPIB interface command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt NRf gt RS 232 interface commands SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem COMMunicate COMMunicate COMMunicate COMMunicate COMMunicate LOCal REMote RWLock lt b gt SERial SERial SERial SERial SERial CONTrol RTS lt name gt PACE lt name gt TERMinator lt name gt BAUD lt n gt SEND lt data gt ENTer Selects remote interface lt name gt SERial GPIB or ETHernet Sets GPIB primary address lt NRf gt 0 to
181. OUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading 200A SOUR CURR 2e 4 CAL PROT SOUR lt FS_DMM_Reading gt 20A SOUR CURR RANG 2e 5 20A SOUR CURR 2e 5 CAL PROT SOUR lt FS_DMM_Reading gt OuA SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading 20uA SOUR CURR 2e 5 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt Use DMM Figure 17 1 for 100mA 200nA ranges Use picoammeter Figure 17 2 for 20nA and 2nA ranges Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 17 4 cont Remote current calibration summary Calibration 17 17 Range Currents Commands 2 2 2 SOUR CURR RANG 2 6 SOUR CURR 2 6 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading gt SOUR CURR 2e 6 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading 200nA 200nA OnA 200nA SOUR CURR RANG 2e 7 SOUR CURR 2e 7 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading SOUR CURR 2e 7 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt OUTP OFF 20nA 20nA OnA 20nA OUTP ON SOUR CURR RANG 2e 8 SOUR CURR 2e 8 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading gt SOUR CURR 2e 8 CAL PROT SOUR lt FS DMM Reading gt 2nA 2nA OnA 2nA SOUR CURR RANG 2e 9 SOUR CURR 2e 9 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading SOUR CURR 2e 9 CAL PROT SOUR FS
182. P ARMED appears on the display and the ARM annunciator is turned on When the sweep has completed a finite count the source is left on and zero is output When the sweep is aborted by either the EXIT key or SOUR SWE ABORIt the source is set to zero and turned off If the sweep spacing has been set to LOGarithmic problems would occur when calculating the sweep table when either the start or stop points equal zero In these cases if the SOUR SWE STAR or SOUR SWE STOP value is zero it will be adjusted automatically to the smallest adjustable value Return to Section 4 topics 4 20 Sweeps 10 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 1 0E 13 and Error 420 Log sweep zero adjusted will be issued Note that start or stop values are not restored back to zero if the SPACing is subse quently changed back to LINear so make sure the start and stop values are correct after sending the SOUR SPACing command When the sweep is armed with the ARM command an internal sweep table of output DAC values is processed During this build the unit cannot respond to key presses or remote commands If there are more than 3 000 points in the sweep table the message Building Sweep table Please wait is shown on the display and remains until the sweep table is built A 10 000 point sweep will require about eight seconds to build SOUR SWE ABOR Abort sweep immediately Terminates any sweep in progress and sets the source value to zero and the operate s
183. RE WAVEFORM menu choose RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED or FIXED as desired g Fromthe CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select DURATION then set the desired waveform duration h Press EXIT to return to normal display 3 Set frequency and amplitude a Press the FREQ key then set the frequency to the desired value b Press the AMPL key then set the amplitude as required 4 Generate waveform a Press the WAVE key to arm the wave function b Press TRIG to turn on the output and start generating the waveform c The output will turn off after the currently set duration period has expired If the duration is set to infinite press the EXIT key to stop gen erating the waveform and turn the output off Return to Section 7 topics 7 20 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Using the external trigger mode 1 2 Set up the desired waveform operation using the previous procedures Enable the external trigger mode a Press CONFIG then WAVE to enter the wave function configuration menu Navigate the MORE and TRIG MODE menu selections To disable the external trigger mode normal operation select MAN BUS To enable the external trigger mode select NONE no trigger link line or choose the desired trigger link line 1 6 to use as the input trigger source Set retrigger behavior a b Navigate the MORE menu then select RE TRIG Select IGNORE TRIG to ignore retrigger attempts an
184. S long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in either long form or short form For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the short form version of any SCPI com mand If the length of the command word is four letters or less no short form ver sion exists auto auto Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 15 These rules apply to command words that exceed four letters fthe fourth letter of the command word is a vowel delete it and all letters after it immediate imm Ifthe fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it format form fthe command contains a question mark or a non optional number included in the command word you must include it in the short form ver sion delay del Command words or characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message Program messages A program message is made up of one or more command words sent by the com puter to the instrument Each common command is a three letter acronym pre ceded by an asterisk The following SCPI commands from the STATus subsystem are used to help explain how command words are structured to formu late program messages Command structur
185. See Recall on page 6 14 for details on recalling buffer statistics Buffer timestamp Each buffer reading has a timestamp The absolute timestamp is referenced to the first stored reading in the buffer which is timestamped at 0 0s For front panel operation the absolute timestamp is used for every buffer reading For remote programming the timestamp can be set for absolute or delta The delta timestamp indicates the time between readings Buffer commands are docu mented in Table 6 4 The following command demonstrates proper syntax to set the timestamp Example Select the delta timestamp TRACe TSTamp FORMat DELta Select the delta timestamp Return to Section 6 topics 6 14 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Storing readings For front panel operation the buffer is always active enabled and post math readings are automatically stored in the buffer For remote programming buffer feed can be pre math readings or post math readings or the buffer can be disabled The buffer commands are documented in Table 6 4 The following example dem onstrates a simple command sequence to configure the buffer Example Configure the buffer to store pre math delta readings Storage will start when Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is started TRACe CLE Clear buffer of readings TRACe FEED SENS1 Set buffer feed for pre math delta readings TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXT Enab
186. Sweep The sweep function of the Model 6221 can be enabled YES or disabled NO When disabled which is the default setting the Model 6221 will be configured to output a fixed output using the programmed high and low pulse levels When the sweep function is enabled the Model 6221 will be set to output a configured sweep Low Measure By default three measurements are performed for every Pulse Delta interval The Model 2182A measures the voltage at pulse low pulse high and pulse low as shown in Figure 5 9 As explained in the process for Pulse Delta measurements on page 5 32 a 2 point measurement technique can instead be used when pulse high may cause DUT heating For the 2 point measurement technique the volt age measurement for the second low pulse is not performed Sweep output settings The following settings from the CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu previously described are used for pulse sweep output Width Sweep and Low Measure The sweep is selected and configured from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu that is accessed by pressing the CONFIG key and then the SWP key Details on sweeps are provided in Section 4 It is from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu that Source Ranging Count and Sweep Delay are set Source Ranging Source range can be set to BEST default setting FIXED or AUTO The BEST and FIXED settings are described in Sweep output settings The AUTO setting is available for a Sweep output With AUTO selected the ins
187. UNCtion Query selected wave function DCYCle lt NRf gt Set duty cycle in 0 to 100 50 DCYCle Query duty cycle AMPLitude lt NRf gt Set amplitude amps peak 2e 12 to 105e 3 1e 3 AMPLitude Query amplitude FREQuency lt NRf gt Set frequency Hz 1e 3 to 1e5 1e3 FREQuency Query frequency OFFSet lt NRf gt Set offset amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 0 OFFSet Query offset PMARK Phase marker LEVel lt NRf gt Set marker phase in degrees 0 to 360 180 LEVel Query marker phase level OLINe lt NRf gt Set phase marker trigger line 1 to 6 3 OLINe Query phase marker trigger line STATe lt b gt Enable or disable phase marker OFF STATe Query state on or off of phase marker Return to Section 14 topics 14 12 SCPI Reference Tables Table 14 6 cont Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Source command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI ARBitrary Arbitrary waveforms DATA lt NRf gt Define arbitrary data points 1 to 1 100 points L lt NRf gt lt NRf gt maximum DATA Query the points in the arbitrary waveform APPend lt NRf gt Append arbitrary data points 1 to 1 100 NRfs lt NRf gt points max per instance of command POINts Query number of points in the waveform COPY lt NRf gt Copy arbitrary points to NVRAM 1 to 4 RANGing lt name gt Select source ranging mode BEST or FlXed BEST RANGing Query selected range mode DURation Wavef
188. UTPUT allowing it to be turned on For details see INTERLOCK on page 2 4 Data flow and read commands Data flow The Model 622x does not perform measurements However raw readings are sent from the Model 2182 2182A to the Model 622x to calculate Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance readings Readings from the Model 2182 2182A are processed stored and displayed by the Model 622x Figure 5 6A shows data flow for front panel operation The delta reading is calcu lated as a voltage V reading but can be changed into its equivalent watts W ohms Q or siemens S reading See page 5 16 for details on Measurement units The reading can then be filtered and or modified by a built in math calculation An averaging filter can be used to stabilize noisy readings see Error and status messages on page 5 18 and Section 6 for details With math enabled the mX b or m X b calculation is applied to the delta reading see Section 6 for details When the filter and or math is disabled the delta reading simply fall through to the next block in the diagram For front panel operation readings are automatically stored in the buffer and dis played Stored readings as well as buffer statistics for those readings can be dis played recalled See Section 6 for details Figure 5 6B shows data flow for remote operation It is similar to data flow for front panel operation with the following enhancements Complian
189. V With R units selected readings are calculated as follows dR dV dl Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 53 Differential Conductance calculations dV calculations While the dV calculations for the first six dV readings are shown in Figure 5 14 the following formula can be used to calculate any dV reading in the test X Y Z Y Where X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for a dV reading Reading Number 1 Example Calculate the 21st dV reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the 21st dV reading n Reading Number 1 21 1 20 Therefore X Y Z Y dv 2 amp 2 0 1 X Y Z Y 2 2 2 The 1 term in the dV calculation is used for polarity reversal of every other calculated dV reading This makes all calculated dV readings in the test the same polarity Simplified dV calculation The above dV calculation can be simplified as follows 2 av 2 coy 142275 Return to Section 5 topics 5 54 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Measurement units The fundamental measurement for Differential Conductance is differential voltage dV However the dV reading can be converted into a differential conductance dG differential resistance dR or power Watts reading See page 5 16 for details o
190. a and Differential Conductance The Model 6221 2182A combination can also perform Pulse Delta These operations use a delta current reversal technique to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs The Model 622x provides a bipolar output current and the Model 2182 21824 per forms A D conversions measurements at source high and source low points An averaging algorithm is then used to calculate the delta reading Delta The Model 622x provides a square wave current output and the Model 2182 2182A performs A D conversions measurements at each high and low out put level A 3 point moving average algorithm is used to calculate Delta readings As shown in Figure 5 1A the first three Model 2182 2182A A D conversions mea surements yields the first Delta reading Each subsequent Model 2182 2182A A D conversion then yields a single Delta reading Every Delta reading uses the three previous A Ds to calculate Delta Pulse Delta The Model 6221 outputs pulses and uses 3 point repeating average measurements to calculate Pulse Delta voltage For each pulse the Model 2182A performs an A D conversion measurement at pulse low pulse high and pulse low Each set of three A D readings yield a single Pulse Delta reading Figure 5 1B shows Pulse Delta measurements If device heating is a concern 2 point measurements can instead be used 2nd low pulse not measured due to corruption from heat Differential Conductance The Model 622x outputs a diff
191. aa a Where Y number of characters in message X number of digits that make up Y 1 or 2 Return to Section 13 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes 13 3 The top display message can be up to 20 characters ASCII long and the bottom display message can be up to 32 characters A space is counted as a character Excess message characters result in an error Note that for the string type the message must be enclosed by single or double quotes An indefinite block message must be the only command in the program mes sage or the last command in the program message If you include a command after an indefinite block message on the same line it will be treated as part of the message and is displayed instead of executed 3 When the text message mode is enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display GPIB operation A user defined message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing LOCAL or sending the GTL go to local command or cycling power cancels the message and disables the text message mode RS 232 operation A user defined message can be cancelled by sending SYSTem LOCal pressing LOCAL or cycling power Ethernet 6221 operation A user defined message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pr
192. ables disables DHCP 3 lt b gt ON or OFF Queries 6221 MAC address 14 Saves Ethernet setting changes 15 Sends password to enable protected commands 16 lt string gt password Disables protected commands 1 lt string gt password Enables disables use of password 18 lt b gt ON or OFF Queries protected command state 19 0 disabled 1 enabled Sets new password 20 lt string gt password 1 SYST COMM SEL lt name gt This command selects the interface SERial GPIB or ETHernet 6221 only The Model 622x will perform a power on reset when the interface is changed SYST COMM GPIB ADDR lt NRf gt Select interface Set GPIB primary address This command sets the GPIB primary address 0 30 default 12 You must be using the GPIB as the communication interface or this command is ignored Note that address 21 is often used as a controller address so 21 should be avoided Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 9 3 SYST COMM SER CONT RTS name Select hardware handshaking This command enables IBFull or RFR or disables OFF hardware hand shaking SYST COMM SER PACE lt name gt Set flow control This command sets software flow control XON to enable or OFF default to disable SYST COMM SER TERM lt name gt Set terminator This command selects the output terminator CR LF default CRLF or
193. ace the instrument on the bus in the remote mode EOI End or Identify The EOI line is used to mark the end of a multi byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request The SRQ line is used by devices when they require service from the controller Handshake lines The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending information while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or listeners receiving the information The three handshake lines are DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid NRFD Not Ready For Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte Return to Appendix topics C 6 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The complete handshake sequence for one data byte is shown in Figure C 2 Once data is placed on t
194. ad the disabled messages CLEar Clear messages from error queue SYSTem SYSTem subsystem ERRor Read and clear latest error status code and message Note 1 CLEar Clear messages from error queue Notes 1 Power up and CLS empties the error queue STATus PRESet has no effect 2 Power up enables error messages and disables status messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect Programming example read error queue The following command reads the error queue STAT QUE Reads Error Queue Return to Section 11 topics 11 22 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 11 topics 12 Common Commands Section 12 topics Common commands page 12 2 12 2 Common Commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Common commands Common commands summarized in Table 12 1 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Table 12 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description Reference CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and error queue Section 11 ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the standard event enable register Section 11 Event enable query Read the standard event enable register Section 11 ESR Event status register Read the standard event enable register and Section 11 query clear it Identification query Returns the manufacturer mode
195. addressed the SDC command provides a method to clear only selected instru ments instead of clearing all instruments simultaneously as is the case with DCL GET group execute trigger GET is a GPIB trigger that is used as an event to control operation The Model 622x reacts to this trigger if it is the programmed control source The control source is programmed from the SCPI TRIGger subsystem SPE SPD serial polling Use the serial polling sequence to obtain the Model 622x serial poll byte The serial poll byte contains important information about internal functions Generally the serial polling sequence is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line However the serial polling sequence may be performed at any time to obtain the status byte from the Model 622x Return to Section 10 topics 10 24 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Front panel GPIB operation The following paragraphs describe aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and status messages See Appendix B for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 programming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and com mand queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request ann
196. al CALCulate 1 KMATh MMFactor NRf Set factor for mX b and m X b 1 0 lt NRf gt 9 99999e20 to 9 99999e20 CALCulate 1 KMATh MA1Factor lt NRE gt Set factor for mX b and m X b 1 0 same as MMFactor CALCulate 1 KMATh MBFactor NRf Set factor for mX b and m X b 0 0 lt NRf gt 9 99999e20 to 9 99999e20 CALCulate 1 KMATh MAOFactor lt NRE gt Set factor for mX b and m X b 0 0 same as MBFactor CALCulate 1 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable CALC1 calculation OFF CALCulate 1 DATA LATest Return the latest CALC1 result CALCulate 1 DATA FRESh Same as CALC1 DATA except a reading can only be returned once 1 MXB selects the mX b calculation and RECiprocal selects the m X b calculation 2 While Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is running and Math is enabled the CALC1 DATA LAT command can be sent to read the latest last post math reading processed by the Model 622x If this read command is sent before a new reading is available the last reading will again be returned The CALC1 DATA FRESh command is the same as the CALC1 DATA LATest command except that once a reading is returned it cannot be returned again This read command guarantees that each reading gets returned only once If a new fresh reading is not available when CALC1 DATA FRESh is sent error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur For more information on thes
197. all bits STATus PRESet has no effect Enable registers Power up and STATus PRESet clears all bits CLS has no effect Error queue Power up and CLS empties the error queue STATus PRESet has no effect Error queue messages Power up enables error messages and disables status messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect oR WP Return to Section 14 topics 14 14 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 8 System command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI SYSTem 5 COMMunicate Communication interfaces 10 SELect lt name gt Select interface SERial GPIB or ETHernet GPIB GPIB interface ADDRess lt NRf gt Set primary address 0 to 30 ADDRess Query primary address SERial RS 232 interface CONTrol Handshaking RTS lt name gt Select handshaking IBFull RFR or OFF RTS Query handshaking PACE lt name gt Set flow control XON or OFF PACE Query flow control TERMinator lt name gt Set output terminator CR LF CRLF or LFCR TERMinator Query output terminator BAUD lt n gt Set baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2k 38 4k 57 6k or 115 2k BAUD Query baud rate SEND lt data gt Send data via RS 232 ENTer Reads data from serial port LOCal RS 232 only Take 622x out of remote REMote RS 232 only Put 622x in remote RWLock lt b gt RS 232 only Enable or disable local lockout RWLock RS 232 only Query sta
198. ammed compliance level Make sure to set compliance to a voltage level that is greater than the voltage requirements for the load For example if sourcing 10mA to a 1kQ load the volt age compliance setting must be gt 10V 10mA x 1kQ 10V If it is not the Model 622x goes into compliance and the magnitude of the current output will be less than the programmed setting For example if compliance is set to 9V and current output is set to 10mA only 9mA will be sourced to a 1kO load 9V 1kO 9mA The OUTPUT indicator light blinks when the current source is in compliance Either there is a fault condition in the test circuit or the source and or compliance levels are not properly set Compliance overshoot Depending on range and load impedance step changes in current could cause the output voltage to briefly overshoot its normal expected level by as much as 2V During normal out of compliance operation this voltage glitch will settle to the expected output voltage within the settling time specification for the selected range see Output response on page 3 5 If the compliance voltage is set too close to the expected output voltage the over shoot could place the Model 622x in compliance Due to the compliance circuitry it could take several microseconds for the overshoot to settle and return the cur rent source to the out of compliance state This slower response to overshoot could damage a voltage sensitive Device Unde
199. ammed value and the unit then waits the programmed sweep delay before going on to the next step See Sweep delay on page 4 9 for more information Figure 8 3 Device action block of trigger model Output Trigger Output Trigger After Source Phase After Delay Phase Set Source Wait Sweep to Step Value Delay Period Device Action If enabled Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 7 Output triggers The Model 622x can send out an output trigger via the rear panel TRIGGER LINK connector right after the source and delay phase of the device action and or when operation enters or exits the trigger layer An output trigger can be used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation e g select the next scanner channel See External triggering on page 8 13 for details on using external triggering Front panel trigger operation Using the trigger configuration menu To configure trigger functions press CONFIG then TRIG then make your selec tions from Table 8 1 below See the detailed procedures for setting up triggering on page 8 8 Table 8 1 Trigger configuration menu Menu selection Description ARM LAYER Configure arm layer ARM IN Set arm in events IMMEDIATE GPIB TIMER MANUAL TLINK USTEST fISTEST UNSTEST TIMER Set timer INVERVL 0 to 99999 999s TLINK Set trigger link line 1 to 6 EVENT DETECT BYPASS Select ONCE or NEVER ARM OUT Set arm out line and events
200. amples The following commands configure a single logarithmic staircase sweep from 1mA to 10mA with five points using a 2s delay best fixed source range and compliance abort disabled SOUR SWE SPAC LOG Select log staircase sweep SOUR CURR STAR 1 3 Set start current to 1mA SOUR CURR STOP 1 2 Set stop current to 10mA SOUR SWE POIN 5 points 5 SOUR DEL 2 Set delay to 2s SOUR SWE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range SOUR SWE COUN 1 Set sweep count to 1 SOUR SWE CAB OFF Disable compliance abort Arm and run the sweep SOUR SWE ARM Arm sweep turn on output INIT Trigger sweep When the sweep is done turn the source output off with this command OUTP OFF Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 17 Running a custom sweep 1 Configure source functions Examples The following commands restore defaults and set the bias current to 50A RST Restore 622x defaults SOUR CURR 5e 5 Set bias current to 50uA Configure the sweep Examples The following commands configure a single custom sweep with five points different delay and compliance settings for each point auto source range and compliance abort disabled SOUR SWE SPAC LIST Select custom sweep SOUR SWE RANG AUTO Select auto source range SOUR LIST CURR 3e 3 1e 3 4e 3 Sweep points 3mA 1mA 4mA 5e 3 2e 3 5mA 2mA SOUR LIST DEL 3 1 4 5 2 Delay points 3s 1s
201. amplitude setting For example a 1mA amplitude setting results in a 2mA peak to peak waveform Ranging Range options There are two methods of ranging BEST FIXED This option will automatically select the range based on the amplitude and offset parameters set at the time the waveform is armed For example if the amplitude setting is 50mA the 100mA source range will be used FIXED With this option the waveform will be generated on the current range set at the time the wave is armed after error checking is performed If using this option be sure that range is high enough for the selected amplitude and offset Arbitrary waveform ranging The arbitrary waveform is described in normalized units from 1 to 1 The examples below will help to clarify Example 1 Ranging BEST Amplitude 10mA peak Offset 0mA ARB values range from 1 to 1 These settings will generate a waveform with a peak to peak value of 20mA on the 20mA range Example 2 Ranging BEST Amplitude 10mA peak Offset 0mA ARB values range from 0 5 to 0 5 These settings will generate the same waveform as Example 1 except the peak to peak value will be 10mA on the 20mA range Return to Section 7 topics 7 6 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Example 3 Ranging BEST Amplitude 20mA peak Offset 0 2mA ARB values range from 0 1 to 0 1 These settings will generate a waveform with a peak to peak value
202. an Amplitude range and entered the desired value go into the Offset menu CONFIG gt WAVE gt OFFSET Note that the offset menu formatting will be the same as the last Amplitude range The offset menu formatting cannot be changed with the range arrows It is locked to be on the same range format as you had for setting the Amplitude If you need more flexibility such as the ability to have 1uA offset and 100mA source amplitude use remote operation The range formatting of the amplitude and offset is a convenience It does not dic tate the actual range that will be used for waveform operation The range used is controlled by the RANGING menu or SOUR WAVE RANGing command Note that if a previously set offset value is too high to fit in the offset menu after chang ing the Amplitude range then the offset menu will show the limit value instead This is illustrated in the following example 1 Start by setting the Amplitude range to 100mA and an Amplitude value of 50mA Go into CONFIG gt WAVE gt OFFSET and set an offset of 10mA Return to the Amplitude menu and now select an amplitude of 100nA 4 When you return to the CONFIG gt WAVE gt OFFSET menu the display will suggest 210 nA the maximum allowed on this range Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 5 Amplitude The amplitude setting range for all four waveform types is from 1pA to 105mA peak The peak to peak value is double the
203. and REN are asserted only by the controller SRQ is asserted by an external device EOI may be asserted either by the controller or other devices depending on the direction of data transfer The following is a description of each command Each command is sent by setting the corresponding bus line true REN Remote Enable REN is sent to set up instruments on the bus for remote operation When REN is true devices will be removed from the local mode Depending on device configuration all front panel controls except the LOCAL button if the device is so equipped may be locked out when REN is true Gener ally REN should be sent before attempting to program instruments over the bus EOI End or Identify EOI is used to positively identify the last byte in a multi byte transfer sequence thus allowing data words of various lengths to be trans mitted easily IFC Interface Clear IFC is used to clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and listener idle states ATN Attention The controller sends ATN while transmitting addresses or mul tiline commands SRQ Service Request SRQ is asserted by a device when it requires service from a controller Universal multiline commands Universal commands are those multiline commands that require no addressing All devices equipped to implement such commands will do so simultaneously when the commands are transmitted As with all multiline commands these com mands
204. and other connectors RS 232 cable connects Model 622x to the RS 232 Model 7009 5 shielded RS 232 cable This straight through cable connects the RS 232 of the Model 622x to the RS 232 interface of the PC This cable is 5ft long and uses shielded cable and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI For Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance DO NOT use the Model 7009 5 cable for serial connections between the Model 622x and Model 2182 2182A A null modem serial cable is required and is a supplied item Trigger link cables and adapter Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 trigger link cables Connects the Model 62xx to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 2182 21824 Model 8501 1 is 1m long Model 8501 2 is 2m long Model 8502 trigger link adapter Lets you connect any of the six trigger link lines of the Model 622x to instruments that use standard BNC trigger connec tors Model 8503 DIN to BNC trigger cable Lets you connect trigger link lines one input and two output of the Model 622x to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 is 1m long Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 single fixed rack mount kit Mounts a single Model 622x in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 side by side rack mount kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 2182 2182A 2400 2410 2420 2430 6220 6221 6430 6485 6487 6517A 7001 side by side
205. ange from 1mHz to 100kHz Square wave function The frequency range for square waves is 1mHz to 100kHz with variable duty cycle Ramp wave function The Model 6221 can generate ramp or triangle waves with a frequency from 1mHz to 100kHz with variable duty cycle Arbitrary waveform function The Model 6221 can store up to four user defined arbitrary waveforms with 2 to 65 535 points with a frequency range of 1mHz to 100kHz Note that arbitrary waveforms can be defined only via remote but once defined can be selected from the front panel Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only Wave function characteristics Table 7 1 summarizes the basic characteristics of the four wave functions avail able in the Model 6221 More details on various aspects can be found in the fol lowing paragraphs Table 7 1 Wave function characteristics Wave function Characteristics Sine wave Frequency 1mHz to 100kHz page 7 5 Amplitude 1pA to 105mA peak page 7 5 Range 2nA to 100mA page 7 5 Offset 0 to 105 page 7 6 Phase marker 0 to 360 page 7 9 Duration 100ns to 999999 999s page 7 10 Square wave Ramp wave Frequency 1mHz to 100kHz page 7 5 Amplitude 1pA to 105mA peak page 7 5 Range 2nA to 100mA page 7 5 Offset 0 to 105 page 7 6 Duty cycle 0 to 100 page 7 7 Phase marker 0 to 360 page 7 9 Duration 100ns to 999999 999s
206. ange to accommodate the source value The commands to select the source range and set the output and compliance values are provided in Table 3 2 The following examples demonstrate proper syntax Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 15 3 Example Select the 20mA source range set the source to output 12 and set compliance to 10V CURRent RANGe 12e 3 Selects the 20mA range CURRent 12e 3 Sets the DC output to 12mA CURRent COMPliance 10 Sets voltage compliance to 10V To select a fixed source range specify a parameter value that is the same as the current output value to be sourced For the parameter value 12e 3 the Model 622x selects the lowest range 20mA that will accommodate a 12mA output If desired change the output response For the Models 6220 and 6221 an analog output filter can be enabled to slow down the output response For the Model 6221 the output response can be set to FAST or SLOW See Output response on page 3 5 for details on setting the output response Analog filter Use the FILT key to toggle the state on or off of the low pass filter When this key is first pressed the message FILTER ON will be briefly displayed and the FILT annunciator turns on To disable the filter again press the FILT key FILT annunciator turns off Response speed setting 6221 The response speed can only be changed while the output
207. anual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 17 Setting measurement units From the front panel units can be set as follows 1 2 4 Press the UNITS key to display the READING UNITS menu Use the Menu navigation controls see page 1 20 to select the desired measurement units VOLTS OHMS WATTS or SIEMENS Model 6221 only After selecting WATTS you will be prompted to select the POWER TYPE Select the desired power type AVERAGE or PEAK Remote programming Commands for setting units for the Model 622x are listed in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Measurement unit commands Command Description Default UNIT VOLT DC lt name gt Specify reading units V UNIT POWer TYPE name power units reading type for 6221 PEAK UNIT POWer TYPE Query power units reading type name V OHMS W or SIEMens Pulse Delta name AVERage or PEAK The name parameter for Siemens can be sent as S SIEM or SIEMENS Example Selects power W measurement units for the Model 622x UNIT W Display readings Display reading examples 1 23456 nV Delta Delta voltage reading 1 23456 Q Delta Delta ohms reading 1 23456 S D Cond Differential Conductance Siemens reading 1 23456 mWp Pulse Pulse Delta peak power Watts reading 2 3 1 23456 mW Pulse Pulse Delta average power Watts reading 2 3 1 Pulse Delta power can be a peak power reading or an average p
208. ard page 11 11 551 Ethernet Module Swapped 6221 only Standard page 11 11 B 6 Error and Status Messages Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Status Model Code Description Register Bit Reference 4552 Invalid Password 6221 only Standard page 11 11 557 Cannot change with DHCP ON 6221 only Standard page 11 11 558 A D timeout 6221 only Standard page 11 11 4610 Questionable Calibration Questionable B8 11 16 611 Questionable Power Measurement Questionable B4 page 11 16 700 Not allowed DDC 220 mode Standard page 11 11 4800 RS 232 Framing Error detected Operation B11 page 11 12 802 RS 232 Overrun detected Operation B11 page 11 12 803 RS 232 Break detected Operation B11 page 11 12 805 Invalid system comm setting Operation B11 11 12 808 RS 232 INVALID FORMAT ERR Operation B11 page 11 12 809 Not allowed with RS 232 Operation B11 page 11 12 900 Internal System Error Standard page 11 11 220 language DDC status model See above 4954 DDC mode IDDC Error U1 Status B12 Note 955 DDC mode IDDCO Error U1 Status B11 957 DDC No Remote Error U1 Status B9 958 DDC V Limit Status Byte BO 959 DDC End of Buffer event Status Byte B1 960 DDC End of Dwell Time Status Byte B2 961 DDC Input Port Change event U1 Status B3 IEEE
209. are locked out while Differential Conductance is armed or running Internal sweep table During the arming process the Model 622x builds an internal sweep table of source output values to be used in the test During this build the unit will not respond to key presses or remote commands If there are more than 3 000 points to be placed in the table the message Building Sweep table Please wait will be displayed during the table build A 10 000 point sweep takes around eight sec onds to build Armed message After the delta test is successfully armed the Model 622x will briefly display a message indicating that the test is armed and ready to be started User setups User setups cannot be saved or recalled while Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is armed or running Attempting to do so from the front panel or using remote operation SAV and RCL commands will generate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 13 Aborting the delta test A delta test that is armed or running can be aborted by pressing the EXIT key or sending the SOUR SWE ABOR command Interlock In order to start an armed Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance test a test fixture interlock switch must be connected to the INTERLOCK connector on the rear panel of the Model 622x Closing the interlock switch will enable the O
210. ation 8 CALibration PROTected WAVE STEP1 Calibrates 6221 waveform generator E 1 CAL PROT CODE lt string gt Enter password This command sends the calibration password code to unlock calibration The code is an eight character string that must be enclosed in single or double quotes The Model 6220 default code is KI006220 the default Model 6221 code is 006221 You can change the code once calibration is unlocked by sending a different code with this command However if you change the first two characters to something other than KI you will not be able to unlock cal ibration from the front panel 2 CAL PROT LOCK Lock out calibration This command locks out calibration Note that the CAL PROT LOCK query will return a 1 if calibration is locked 0 otherwise Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 21 3 CAL PROT SAVE Save calibration This command saves all calibration constants and dates in non volatile mem ory Calibration data will not be saved if 1 Calibration was not unlocked with CODE command 2 Invalid data exists For example cal step failed or was aborted or 3 Incomplete number of cal steps were performed For example omitting a negative full scale step 4 CAL PROT DATE lt yyyy mm dd gt last cal date CAL PROT NDUE lt yyyy mm dd gt Send next cal date These commands send the last calibration date and next calibration due date The q
211. aximum Load Current 1mA for rated accuracy Accuracy tlmV for output currents lt 2mA excluding output lead voltage drop PROGRAM MEMORY offers point by point control and triggering e g Sweeps Number of Locations 64K EXTERNAL TRIGGER TTL compatible EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT and OUTPUT Max Trigger Rate 1000 s LTR FORM 28777A SBG Source Notes 1 Settling times are specified into a resistive load with a maximum resistance equal to 2V Tfuliscale of range See manual for other load conditions Settling times to 0 1 of final value are typically lt 2x of 1 settling times Noise current into lt 100Q RMS Noise 10Hz 20MHz 2nA 20mA Range Less than 1mVrms 5mVp p into 50Q load Typical values are non warranted apply at 23 C represent the 50 percentile and are provided solely as useful information HW 1 17 05 Rev B Page of 2 DATE DRN 6 11 04 CKD DATE SPECIFICATIONS Keithley Instruments Inc Cleveland Ohio 44139 SPEC 6221 KEITHLEY BRUNING 40 21 62198 SBG LTR 6221 AC and DC Current Source ARBITRARY FUNCTION GENERATOR WAVEFORMS Sine Square Ramp and 4 User Defined Arbitrary Waveforms FREQUENCY ACCURACY 100 ppm 1 Year AMPLITUDE 2pA to 210mA peak peak into loads up to 1070 AMPLITUDE ACCURACY lt 10kHz Magnitude 1 rdg 0 2 mg Offset 0 2 rdg 0 2 rng SINE WAVE CHARACTERISTICS Frequency Range 1mHz to 1
212. aximum resistive load of 2V Tfuttscate orange Amplitude attenuation will occur at higher frequencies dependent upon current range and load impedance For frequencies less than 1 Hz duty cycle not tested guaranteed by design These Specifications are only valid for the 20mA range and a 50Q load These characteristics for informational purposes only Typical values are non warranted apply at 23 C represent the 50 percentile and are provided solely as useful information REVISIONS APP DATE DRN w SPECIFICATIONS FORM 28777A SBG GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS COMMON MODE VOLTAGE 250Vrms DC to 60Hz COMMON MODE ISOLATION gt 10 Q lt 2nF SOURCE OUTPUT MODES Fixed DC level Memory List Arbitrary Waveform Function REMOTE INTERFACE Ethernet RJ 45 connector TCP IP Auto sensed 10bT or 100bTx IEEE 488 and RS 232C SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments DDC command language compatible with Keithley Model 220 IP CONFIGURATION Static or DHCP PASSWORD PROTECTION 11 characters DIGITAL INTERFACE Handler Interface Start of test end of test 3 category bits 5 V 300mA supply Digital I O 1 trigger input 4 TTL Relay Drive outputs 33V 500m lt A diode clamped OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Teflon insulated 3 lug triax connector for output Banana Safety Jack for GUARD OUTPUT LO Screw Terminal for CHASSIS DB 9 connector for EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT and DIGITAL Two position Screw Termina
213. before another program message can be sent to the Model 622x Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 19 GPIB interface reference GPIB bus standards The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and pro gramming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers in 1975 The Model 622x conforms to these standards EEE 488 1 1987 EEE 488 2 1992 These standards define a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instrument and a group of common commands The standard below defines a command language protocol It goes one step fur ther than IEEE 488 2 1992 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of an instrument e SCPI 1996 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments GPIB bus connections To connect the Model 622x to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard IEEE 488 connectors as shown in Figure 10 1 Figure 10 1 IEEE 488 connector To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connector Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure Return to Section 10 topics 10 20 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 10 2 shows a typical connecting scheme for a multi unit test system Figure 10 2
214. cal spacing unit and is equal to 1 75 The typical distance between the mounting screw holes on the rack rails is 0 125 1 8 When rack mounting the Model 622x make sure there is adequate airflow around the sides and top to ensure proper cooling Adequate airflow enables air temperatures within approximately one inch of the Model 622x surfaces to remain within specified limits under all operating conditions Rack mounting high power dissipation equipment adjacent to the Model 622x could cause excessive heating to occur The specified ambient temperature must be maintained around the surfaces of the Model 622x to specified accuracies A good measure to ensure proper cooling in rack situa tions with convection cooling only is to place the hottest equipment e g power supply at the top of the rack Preci sion equipment such as the Model 622x should be placed as low as possible in the rack where temperatures are coolest Adding space panels below the Model 622x will help ensure adequate air flow Return to Section 1 topics 1 14 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Power up CAUTION When handling the Model 622x NEVER touch the heat sink located on the right side of the case This heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns Line power connection Follow the procedure below to connect the Model 622x to line power and turn on the instrument The current source operates from a line voltage of 100 to 240V at
215. cal constants and dates CAL PROT LOCK Lock out calibration Return to Section 17 topics 17 20 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI commands calibration Commands for calibration are listed in Table 17 5 Additional information for each command is provided in added notes and several tables that follow Table 17 5 Calibration commands Command Description CALibration PROTected CODE lt string gt Enters calibration code password lt string gt 8 character password 6220 default KI006220 6221 default KI006221 CALibration PROTected LOCK Locks out calibration CALibration PROTected SAVE Saves all cal data to non volatile memory CALibration PROTected DATE lt yyyy mm dd gt Saves last calibration date CALibration PROTected NDUE lt gt Saves next calibration date CALibration PROTected COUNt Queries number of times unit was calibrated 5 CALibration PROTected SOURce lt NRf gt Calibrates active current source range 9 CALibration PROTected SENSe lt NRf gt Calibrates compliance voltage CALibration PROTected GUARd STEP1 lt NRf gt Voltage reading for guard calibration step 1 CALibration PROTected GUARd STEP1 INIT Sets up unit for step 1 of guard calibration 8 CALibration PROTected GUARd STEP2 NRf Voltage reading for guard calibration step 2 8 CALibration PROTected GUARd STEP2 INIT Sets up unit for step 2 of guard calibr
216. calibration constants 1 5 From the main calibration menu select SAVE and press ENTER The unit will display CAL DATE 06 01 2004 Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Enter the present date as the calibration date then press ENTER The unit displays NEXT CAL 06 01 2005 Use 4 gt ENTER or EXIT Enter the calibration date and press ENTER The unit displays CALIBRATION COMPLETE ENTER to save EXIT to abort Select ENTER to save calibration constants or press EXIT to abort calibra tion without saving constants then press ENTER If calibration was suc cessful the display will prompt CALIBRATION SUCCESS Press ENTER or EXIT to continue Press ENTER or EXIT to complete saving calibration constants and dates Step 6 Lock out calibration From the main calibration menu select LOCK and press ENTER to lock out cali bration Return to Section 17 topics 17 14 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote calibration Follow the steps below to calibrate the Model 6220 6221 remotely See SCPI commands calibration on page 17 20 for complete command details NOTE Be sure to allow enough time for each command to complete before going on to the next step You can use the OPC command Section 12 and SRQ and status structure bits Section 11 to determine when a step has been completed Step 1 Prepare for calibration 1 With the power off connect the digital multimeter DMM to
217. cally the device address 1 for example 145 90 120 1 Networks are commonly grouped into three classes based on the first byte of the address shown in Table 10 7 Table 10 7 Network classes Typical IP address Class First byte subnet mask example A 1 to 127 255 0 0 0 100 1 1 1 B 128 to 191 255 255 0 0 128 1 1 1 C 191 to 223 255 255 255 0 191 1 1 1 Address restrictions NOTE Different available IP addresses are required for each node this includes each Model 6221 and each network interface card connected to the in struments network The following IP addresses are reserved do not assign them to any device either interface card or Model 6221 Do not assign Any address beginning first byte with 0 or 127 reserved for loopback test Any address beginning first byte with 224 through 255 Any address ending last byte with O or 255 Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 35 Other than the restricted addresses any dis similar address may be assigned to the PC s Ethernet interface card and to each Model 6221 Keep in mind that when creating and assigning an address the one assigned to the Model 6221 must be of the same class as the network For example if you want the Model 6221 s IP address to be 192 168 0 2 the subnet mask should be 255 255 255 0 Also to communicate with the Model 6221 the PC s Ethernet interface card must be set to
218. ce calibration 200nA to 100mA ranges Digital Multimeter Measure DC Current High 6220 6221 Amps Output Low Input Table 17 3 Front panel current calibration summary Range Current values 100mA 100mA OMA 100mA 20mA 20mA 20mA 2mA 2mA OmA 2mA 200uA 200 200 20 20nA 204A 2 2 OA 2 200nA 200nA OnA 200nA 20nA 20nA OnA 20nA 2nA 2nA OnA 2nA Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 9 Figure 17 2 Connections for current source calibration 2nA and 20nA ranges Picoammeter Measure DC Current High Step 3 Calibrate compliance 1 Connect the digital multimeter DMM to the Model 6220 6221 as shown in Figure 17 3 and select the DMM DC volts function with auto range enabled 2 From the main calibration menu select EXECUTE and press ENTER unit will display CALIBRATION SOURCE COMPLIANCE GUARD WAVE WAVE displayed only for 6221 3 Select COMPLIANCE then press ENTER The unit will display 20V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA 4 Press ENTER to output 2mA for 20V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 020 0000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT 5 Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value 6 Press ENTER The display will prompt COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA 7 Pr
219. ce sweep abort state ARM Arm the sweep ABORt Abort sweep Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance immediately LIST Custom sweep operation 4 CURRent lt NRf gt Define list of currents amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 lt NRf gt lt NRf gt APPend lt NRf gt Add current points to existing list 105e 3 to lt NRfs gt lt NRf gt 105e 3 POINts Query number of current list points CURRent Query list of current values DELay lt NRf gt Define list of delay values secs 1e 3 to 1 lt lt NRf gt 999999 999 APPend lt NRf gt Add delay values to existing list lt NRfs gt lt NRf gt POINts Query number of delay values in list DELay Query list of delay values COMPliance lt NRf gt Define list of compliance values volts 1e 3 to lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 105 APPend lt NRf gt Add compliance values to existing list 1e 3 to lt NRfs gt lt NRf gt 105 POINts Query number of compliance values in list COMPliance Query list of compliance values DELta Delta operation 5 NVPResent Query connection to 2182 2182A 1 yes 0 no HIGH lt NRf gt Set high source value amps 0 to 105e 3 1e3 HIGH Query high source value lt NRf gt Set low source value amps 0 to 105e 3 1e3 LOW Query low source value DELay lt NRf gt Set Delta delay seconds 1e 3 to 9999 999 2e 3 DELay Query Delta delay COUNt lt NRf gt Set number of cycles to
220. ce testing The current source can be tested for compliance The test can be set to fail when the source enters the compliance condition See Section 9 for details Buffer control When enabled buffer feed can be pre math readings or post math readings When disabled readings will not be stored in the buffer See Section 6 for details Return to Section 5 topics 5 14 Delta Pulse Delta and Differ NOTE ential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The SMPL annunciator blinks on and off for every other reading that is acquired from the Model 2182 2182A The blinking annunciator indicates that communications with the Model 2182 2182A are working properly That is the Model 2182 2182A is performing voltage measurements and successfully sending them to the Model 622x Figure 5 6 Data flow and read commands A Front panel operation 2182 2182A Rdgs 622x Delta Pulse Delta or Diff Cond Reading Reading Units 622x Averaging Filter 622x Math d 622x Recall 622x Buffer Display Pulse Delta can only be be performed by the Model 6621 Feature can be enabled or disabled When disabled reading falls through to next block in the diagram B Remote operation 2182 2182A Rdgs 622x Delta Pulse Delta or Diff Cond Reading Reading Units 622x Averaging Filter A SENSe DATA LATest SENSe DATA FRESh TRACe FEED SENS1 B CALC1 DATA
221. ces 5V output The digital I O port provides a 5V output that can be used to drive external logic or relays Maximum current for this line is 500mA This line is protected by a self resetting fuse one hour recovery time Return to Section 9 topics 9 6 Limit Test and Digital I O Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SOT line The SOT start of test line provides an alternate method of triggering the unit You can set up the unit to trigger on a positive going negative going or a both positive and negative going pulse See triggering in Section 8 for complete details Simplified schematic The simplified schematic for the digital outputs is shown in Figure 9 3 Note that this illustration shows the schematic for one digital output All four digital output circuits are identical Figure 9 3 Digital I O port simplified schematic M lt Pin 5 External Voltage Flyback 33V 7N 5V Digital Output Flyback Diode 1kQ Pull up lt Digital Output te Protection Va T Diode lt Pin 9 Digital Ground V Sink mode controlling external devices Each output can be operated from an external supply voltage range from 5V to 33V applied through the external device being driven The high current sink capacity of the output driver allows direct control of relays solenoids and lamps no additional circuitry needed As shown in Figure 9 3 each of the four digital open collector outputs
222. ch is closed the OUTPUT is enabled and can be turned on Figure 2 3 shows the connector for INTERLOCK It is a quick disconnect screw terminal block Pull the terminal block off the rear panel to connect the inter lock switch The interlock switch is to mounted on a test fixture such that the switch will open disable the OUTPUT when the test fixture lid is opened The switch will close enable the OUTPUT when the test fixture lid is closed See Using a test fixture on page 2 20 for details on using INTERLOCK with a test fixture Figure 2 3 INTERLOCK INTERLOCK Test Fixture Normally OUTPUT disabled Sich with switch open NOTE The maximum allowable interlock circuit impedance is 10 WARNING An open INTERLOCK only disables the output from the Model 622x If an external source is being used in the test circuit its voltage will be present in the test circuit A hazardous voltage from an external source could be connected directly to the OUTPUT connector of the Model 622x As a general rule of safety always turn off all external sources before making or breaking connections to the test circuit Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 5 Output configurations There are four configurations that can be used for current source output Triax inner shield is connected to Output Low which is connected to Earth Ground see Figure 2 4A Triax inner shield is connected to Cabl
223. cing current To source current 1 connect the test circuit DUT to the output 2 set the source range output value and compliance 3 enable the output filter if desired and finally 4 turn the output on 1 Connect test circuit DUT to Model 622x output WARNING Before making or breaking connections the Model 622x must be turned off and the power cord must be discon nected from the AC outlet Also power must be removed from all external test circuits and instrumentation Connection information is provided in Section 2 Keep in mind that there are two basic output triax connector configurations that can be selected Inner shield connected to Output Low Cable Guard is not available Inner shield connected to Cable Guard with Output Low connected to the outer shield Earth Ground of the triax connector 2 Set the source and compliance values Figure 3 3 explains how to set the source and compliance values for the Model 6220 Figure 3 4 explains how to set the source and compliance values for the Model 6221 While in the edit mode AUTO range can be used but range changes will not occur during the editing process After setting the I source value for a fixed range enabling AUTO range will select the optimum lowest range for the source value Remote programming Autorange can be used when setting the I source value With autorange enabled the Model 622x will automatically select the optimum lowest r
224. continuously repeating sweeps Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 21 Table 4 5 Custom list sweep commands Command Description SOURce 1 LIST CURRent lt NRf gt Defines list of currents lt gt lt NRE gt lt NRf gt 0 105 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 LIST CURRent APPend lt NRf gt Adds current points to existing list lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 105 to 0 105 A SOURce 1 LIST DELay lt NRE gt Defines list of delay values lt gt NR lt NRf gt 0 to 999 9999 s SOURce 1 LIST DELay APPend lt NRf gt Adds to list of delay values lt NRf gt NR lt NRf gt 0 001 to 999999 999 s SOURce 1 LIST COMPliance NRf Defines list of compliance values lt NRE gt NR lt NRf gt 0 1 to 105 V SOURce 1 LIST COMPliance APPend lt gt Adds to list of compliance values lt NR gt NR 5 NHf 0 1 to 105 V SOURce 1 LIST CURRent POINts Query of current list points SOURce 1 LIST DELay POINts Query of delay list points SOURce 1 LIST COMPliance POINts Query of delay list points 1 SOUR LIST CURR lt NRf gt lt NRfs gt lt NRf gt Define current list SOUR LIST CURR APP lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Append to current list Use these commands to initially define a current list and to add
225. cted from AC line power System connections depend on the system configuration being used see Figure 5 2 Connections for the two system configurations are explained as fol lows Connections stand alone system System connections for this configuration are shown in Figure 5 3 RS 232 The Model 622x communicates with the Model 2182 21824 via the RS 232 interface The Model 622x sends setup commands to the Model 2182 2182A and receives data readings from the Model 2182 21824 Make sure to use a null modem RS 232 cable for this connection Trigger Link The Trigger Link synchronizes triggering between the Current Source and the Nanovoltmeter Trigger Link connections assume that the Model 2182 21824 is using the factory default hard wired configuration EXT TRIG input line 2 VMC output line 1 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 7 CAUTION Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance will not work if the Model 2182 2182A is not using the default Trigger Link con figuration The hard wired default configuration for the Trigger Link lines of the Model 2182 2182A can be changed by qualified service personnel To return the Model 2182 21824 to the default con figuration see Changing trigger link lines in Section 5 Dis assembly of the Model 2182 2182A Service Manual Figure 5 3 System connections stand alone operation
226. cted to the 1kO resistor and 10V source as shown in Figure 3 1A the Model 622x operates as a 200mW source supplying power to the external test circuit When the external voltage is decreased to 30V as shown in Figure 3 1B the Model 622x instead operates as a sink The Model 622x dissipates 200mW of power 10mA x 20V 200mW Figure 3 1 Source and sink examples A Source operation B Sink operation 10mA 1kQ 10mA 1kQ 622x 10 Operating boundaries Figure 3 2 shows the four quadrants of operation for the Model 622x When oper ating in the first I or third 1 quadrant the Model 622x is operating as a source Figure 3 1A shows an example of quadrant operation current and voltage both positive When operating in the second or fourth IV quadrant the Model 622x is oper ating as a sink Figure 3 1B shows an example of quadrant IV operation current positive and voltage negative Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 5 Figure 3 2 Output boundaries source and sink Quadrant IV Quadrant I Sink Source gt V 105V 105V Quadrant 111 Quadrant II Source Sink Output response Output response is the time it takes for an output change to settle to within 1 of its final value For the Model 6220 output response settling time can be as fast as 100us typical For the Model 6221 output response can be as fast as 2us typical for th
227. ction 5 topics 5 62 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 4 Set measurement units Volts are the default units for the Model 622x but can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Sie mens reading see Measurement units on page 5 16 for details The commands to set measurement units are listed in Table 5 1 The following example shows the command to select conductance Siemens measure ment units UNIT S Select Siemens measurement units 5 Setup arm and run Differential Conductance Details on the commands to set up and arm Differential Conductance are provided in Table 5 5 The following demonstrates the proper command sequence to set up arm and run Differential Conductance for the example in Figure 5 14 RST Restores 622x defaults SOUR DCON STARt 0 Sets start value to OWA SOUR DCON STEP 10e 6 Sets step size to 10pA SOUR DCON STOP 50e 6 Sets stop value to 50pA SOUR DCON DELTa 20e 6 Sets delta value to 20UA SOUR DCON DELay 1 3 Sets delay to ims SOUR DCON CAB ON Enables Compliance Abort TRAC POIN 6 Sets buffer size to six points SOUR DCON ARM Arms Differential Conductance INIT IMM Starts measurements A Trace points specifies the size of the buffer Buffer size should be the same value as the number of Differential Conductance readings in the test See Section 6 for details on all buffer comma
228. cycle corresponds to the fraction of the total wave cycle that is rising A 50 duty cycle corresponds to a symmetric triangle wave The left waveform in Figure 7 2B has a 100 duty cycle the center wave form has 0 duty cycle and the right waveform has a 50 duty cycle Amplitude units The front panel allows setting wave amplitude in either RMS or peak units The default is peak The RMS selection will only apply for sine wave RMS 0 70710678 x peak or triangle wave RMS 0 57735027 x peak and be ignored for other waveform types The wave amplitude units are available for front panel only remote operations always receive and return the units in peak The choice between RMS and peak from the front panel is not saved as part of a stored setup Power cycling the instrument always resets the front panel menu to the default of peak When editing the wave amplitude the label Peak or RMS will be displayed if the waveform type is affected by the RMS vs peak selection ramp or sine waves only Return to Section 7 topics 7 8 Wave Functions 6221 Only Figure 7 2 Duty cycle A Square Wave Duty Cycle Duty Cycle Setting B Ramp Wave Duty Cycle 100 Duty 0 Duty Cycle Setting Cycle Setting Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 50 Duty Cycle Setting Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 9 Phase marker The phase marker Figure 7 3 allows
229. d SOUR PDEL ARM is used to deter mine if Pulse Delta is armed A returned 1 indicates that Pulse Delta is armed A 0 indicates that Pulse Delta is not armed If the Model 6221 is already armed for another action e g Differential Con ductance or Delta the Pulse Delta arm command will un arm the other action and arm Pulse Delta Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 51 Differential Conductance Differential measurements can be used to study the individual slopes of an I V or V I curve By applying a known differential current dl to a device differential voltage dV measurements can be performed With dl and dV known differential conductance dG and differential resistance dR can be calculated Basic measurement process The basic process for differential voltage measurements is shown by the example in Figure 5 13 As shown two current steps are applied to a device and voltage is measured at each step From these two source measure points A and B differ ential current dl differential voltage dV differential conductance dG and dif ferential resistance dR can be calculated as shown in the illustration These measurements examine the straight line slope between points A and B Figure 5 13 Basic differential measurements 4 B Ap dl ls lA dG di dV 40pA 200A 20 40uV 20 0 55 Isource 200A dV
230. d the output of the Model 622x will turn off The test fixture lid must be closed in order to turn on the output Use suitable insulated wires to connect the test fixture interlock to the INTERLOCK quick disconnect block on the rear panel of the Model 622x Return to Section 2 topics 2 22 Output Connect ions Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual B Three 5 way binding posts or one 3 lug female triax connector If using the supplied triax cable terminated with alligator clips mount three 5 way binding points to the test fixture If using a triax cable that is terminated with 3 slot male triax connectors on both ends e g Model 7078 TRX 3 mount a 3 lug female triax bulkhead connector to the test fixture Connect the triax cable to the Model 622x OUTPUT C Banana jacks Output Low and or banana jack Guard can be accessed at the LO and GUARD banana jacks on the Model 622x Use banana plug cables to make these connections D m F Chassis ground the chassis of the test fixture must be connected to chas sis ground of the Model 622x For the Guard triax configuration the chassis of the test fixture can be connected to the chassis ground screw on the rear panel of the Model 622x This connection to the test fixture could be a direct soldered connection a banana plug connection or a screw terminal connec tion Binding posts 5 way copper binding posts will accommodate cables termi nated with banana p
231. d allow the run ning waveforms to complete If RESTART IMMEDIATELY is selected another trigger will cause the waveform to restart immediately when retriggered Set inactive value value before and after triggered waveforms a b Navigate the MORE menu then select INACTIVE VAL Using the arrow keys set the value between 1 0000 and 1 0000 Arm and trigger the waveform a b Press WAVE to arm the waveform generator Press TRIG to trigger the unit The Model 6221 will turn on its output and begin to source an amount of current controlled by the inactive value When an external trigger is detected on the specified trigger link line the generator will begin to output the waveform Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 21 Remote wave function operation Procedures for programming and generating waveforms for each of the four waveform types are given on the following pages Each of these procedures includes commands for a typical wave function example Table 7 3 summarizes parameters for each of these examples See SCPI commands wave func tions on page 7 27 for details on wave function commands NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while Wave is armed or running The SAV and RCL commands will generate error 413 Not al lowed with mode armed Table 7 3 Waveform example parameters Waveform Parameters for waveform examples Sine wav
232. d for a 3uA source level the 20uA source range will be used Note that the output current goes to zero during the range change FIXED With this option the source remains on the range it is on when the sweep is started For sweep points that exceed the source range capa bility the source will output the maximum level for that range For example if the source is on the 2mA range when the sweep is started it will remain on the 2mA range for the entire sweep If the configured sweep points are 1mA 2mA 3mA 4mA and 5mA the sweep will be 1mA 2mA 2 1mA 2 1mA and 2 1mA NOTE The FIXED mode should be used when optimum sweep speed is a consideration Sweep delay The sweep delay parameter determines how long the Model 622x will remain on each sweep step once the output current is set to the step value For linear and logarithmic staircase sweeps the sweep delay period is the same for every step in the sweep For customs sweeps the sweep delay for each step can be indepen dently programmed The programmable range for the sweep delay is from 0 001s to 999999 999s Sweep count This setting determines how many sweeps to perform FINITE Use this option to enter a discrete number of sweeps to perform INFINITE Select this option to continuously repeat the configured sweep Use the EXIT key to stop the sweep Return to Section 4 topics 4 10 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Front panel sweep operation
233. d queues page 11 4 Programming and reading registers page 11 5 Programming enable registers page 11 5 Reading registers page 11 6 Status byte and service request SRQ page 11 7 Status byte register page 11 7 Service request enable register page 11 8 Serial polling and SRQ page 11 9 Status byte and service request commands page 11 9 Status register sets page 11 10 Register bit descriptions page 11 10 Queues page 11 20 Output queue page 11 20 Error queue page 11 20 11 2 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Overview The Model 622x provides a series of status registers and queues allowing the operator to monitor and manipulate the various instrument events The status structure is shown in Figure 11 1 The heart of the status structure is the status byte register This register can be read by the user s test program to determine if a service request SRQ has occurred and what event caused it Status byte and SRQ The status byte register receives the summary bits of four status register sets and two queues The register sets and queues monitor the various instrument events When an enabled event occurs it sets a summary bit in the status byte register When a summary bit of the status byte is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the RQS MSS bit will set to indicate that an SRQ has occurred Status register sets A typical status register set is made up of a conditi
234. ddle step of the last cycle As shown in Figure 5 14 the 50p4A stop level is actually the second last step of the sweep The stop level can be set from 105mA to 105mA The default start level is 10pA Delta The specified Delta is the differential current dl for the sweep It is alter nately added to and subtracted from each subsequent step in the sweep As shown in Figure 5 14 is added to the odd numbered steps and then sub tracted from the even numbered steps Model 2182 2182A A D readings are per Return to Section 5 topics 5 56 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual formed at each stepped delta level Delta is a magnitude and is therefore always set as a positive value Delta can be set from 0 to 105mA The default Delta set ting is 1 Delay The delay for Differential Conductance is used to allow the current source to settle when the output changes to the next stepped delta level This delay occurs after a trigger from the Model 2182 21 82A is received This delay is shown in Figure 5 15 Delay can be set from 1ms to 9999 999s The default delay setting is 2ms Compliance Abort By enabling YES Compliance Abort Differential Conduc tance operation will abort if the current source goes into compliance By default Compliance Abort is disabled NO Details on setting the sweep parameters are explained in Operation on page 5 59 NOTE The source ran
235. de all elements send FORM ELEM ALL To include only the default elements READing and TSTamp use the DEFault parameter as follows FORM ELEM DEF Reading READ The returned reading is for Delta Pulse Delta 6221 or Differential Conductance An overflow reading is returned as 9 9E37 When a specified data element has invalid data associated with it NAN Not A Number will be the response NAN is returned as 9 9E37 Timestamp TST Timestamp references the returned data string to a point in time The timestamp operates as a timer that starts at zero seconds when the delta test is started The first delta reading is timestamped at zero seconds For buffer readings timestamp can be referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer absolute format which is timestamped at 0 seconds or to the time between each stored reading delta format The TRACe TSTamp FORMat com mand is used to select the timestamp format see Section 6 Units UNIT The available measurement units are shown in Figure 13 1 The reading from the Model 2182A is in volts With one of the other measurement units selected Q W or S the Model 6221 performs the appropriate calculation to convert the voltage reading to ohms watts or siemens From the front panel a Pulse Delta reading can be expressed and displayed as an average power reading or a peak power reading When Pulse Delta power is read using remote programming the returned UNITs element does
236. des the reading and the data elements in the following order Reading with Units Timestamp Current Source Average Voltage Compliance State and Reading Number Buffer statistics The following statistics are available on the stored buffer readings MIN and MAX provides the minimum and maximum readings stored in the buffer It also indicates the buffer location of these readings The PK PK peak to peak value is the difference between the maximum and minimum readings stored in the buffer PK PK MAX MIN Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 13 Mean is the mean average of the buffer readings Mean is calculated as follows X n n Ms 1 Where Xjis stored reading n is the number of stored readings The STD DEV value is the standard deviation of the buffered readings Standard deviation is calculated as follows 2 Avg X y jel 1 n Where 5 a stored reading n is the number of stored readings Avg is the mean of the buffer readings NOTE If any readings stored in the buffer are the result of an overflow or compliance condition the buffer statistics calculation will not be performed Buffer recall via front panel operation will show a series of dashes in place of the requested buffer statistics value For remote opera tion the corresponding buffer statistics will be repre sented by the value 9 91637
237. ding can also be returned as an average voltage reading See Section 5 for details on how average voltage is calculated If the readings being returned are not Differential Conductance readings nothing is returned in this element position if AVOL is selected as a data element FORMat BORDer lt name gt Parameters NORMAL Normal byte order for IEEE 754 binary format SWAPped Reverse byte order for IEEE 754 binary format For normal byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Single precision Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 8 Double precision For reverse byte order data is sent as follows Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Single precision Byte 8 Byte 7 2 Byte 1 Double precision The 0 header Figure 13 2 is not affected by this command The header is always sent at the beginning of the data string for each measurement conversion The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is ignored when the ASCII format is selected The SWAPped byte order must be used when transmitting binary data to any IBM PC Return to Section 13 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes SYSTem key press codes 13 9 All SYSTem commands except the KEY command are covered in other sections of the manual Table 14 8 lists all SYSTem commands and provides references on where to find more information SYSTem KEY l
238. dings from the Model 2182 2182A will be unfiltered Noisy Delta readings can be fil tered by the Model 622x before sending them into the buffer See Section 6 for details Delta operation front panel The system configuration for front panel stand alone operation is shown in Figure 5 2A on page 5 5 1 Connections are shown in the following figures All power must be removed from all components in the system before making connections Figure 5 3 page 5 7 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 DUT test connections 2 Configure communications for the Models 2182 2182A and 622x as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 3 On the Model 2182 21824 select the desired measurement range using the RANGE keys and the integration rate using the RATE key Rate must be set to an integer value 1 2 3 up to 50 or 60 If some other rate is selected it will automatically be changed to 1PLC by the Model 622x during the arming process 4 Onthe Model 622x press CONFIG and then DELTA to access the CONFIGURE DELTA menu For details on these settings see Configura tion settings on page 5 24 a Set HIGH I LOW DELAY COUNT and COMPLIANCE ABORT b When finished use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure 5 Setthe measurement units The basic Delta reading is in volts which is the default setting However it can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Siemens read
239. disabled in KI 220 mode Changing Model 622x trigger modes by sending the P command will always reset the memory location back to 1 The Model 220 leaves it where it was Return to Section 15 topics 15 6 220 Language Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 15 topics 16 Performance Verification Section 16 topics Introduction page 16 2 Test requirements page 16 3 Environmental conditions page 16 3 Warm up period page 16 3 Line power page 16 3 Recommended test equipment page 16 4 Test equipment connections page 16 4 Calculating test limits page 16 4 Example limit calculation page 16 4 Restoring factory defaults page 16 5 Test summary and considerations page 16 5 Test summary page 16 5 Test considerations page 16 5 Verification procedures page 16 6 DC current output accuracy page 16 6 Compliance accuracy page 16 8 Waveform function accuracy page 16 9 Amplitude flatness page 16 9 Frequency accuracy page 16 10 16 2 Performance Verification Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction WARNING The information in this section is intended only for qualified service personnel Do not attempt these procedures unless you are qualified to do so Information is provided in this section to offer recommendations to the owner of the Model 622x to perform test procedures to the extent that is required by their quality system in the event that they have elected not to return the instrum
240. ductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The affects of heating can be eliminated by not performing the measurement at point C low pulse For this 2 point measurement technique Pulse Delta is calcu lated as follows CE _ 2 10 01 2 0 01 2 PulseDelta 20mV 2 10mV Measurement units The fundamental Pulse Delta measurement explained above is in volts The read ing can instead be converted into Ohms W Siemens S or Power W Details on selecting Measurement units are provided on page 5 16 With Ohms or Siemens measurement units selected the reading is calculated as follows W V I The calculation for power depends on the power reading type that is presently selected Peak or Average and is discussed as follows Peak power and average power With Power units selected a Pulse Delta reading can be expressed and dis played as a Peak power reading or an Average power reading Peak power is the default setting Figure 5 9 shows how Pulse Delta voltage is calculated Peak power is calculated using the basic power equation W IV where is the high pulse current I High and V is the calculated Pulse Delta voltage The average power over the entire Pulse Delta cycle can calculated by factoring in the duty cycle Duty cycle is the percentage of time that the pulse is high during the Pulse Delta cycle For example assume the period of the Pulse Delta cycle is 1ms If the pulse is h
241. e STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABle NRf Command and parameter ENABle Query command PRESet Command Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root command STATus and serves as a path The second level is made up of another path OPERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows Stat oper enab lt NRf gt Stat oper enab stat pres Return to Section 10 topics 10 16 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root com mand stat and moves down the command levels until the command is exe cuted Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example show ing two commands in one program message Stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root com mand stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command When the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets back to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be e
242. e 8 Recall stored Differential Conductance readings Model 2182 2182A Differential Conductance readings were sent to the buffer of the Model 622x Send the following read command to read the buffer TRACe DATA Read Differential Conductance readings stored in 622x buffer Return to Section 5 topics 5 64 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Setup commands Setup and arm commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Commands sent from the PC to the Model 622x to set up and arm Differential Conductance are listed in Table 5 3 Additional information for each command are provided in notes that follow the table Table 5 5 Differential Conductance commands Command Description Default SOURce 1 DCONductance NVPResent Queries if 2182 2182A is con nected 1 yes 0 SOURce 1 DCONductance STARt lt NRf gt Sets start value amps 2 10e 6 lt NRf gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DCONductance STEP lt NRf gt Sets step size amps 1e 6 lt NRf gt 0 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DCONductance STOP NRf Sets stop value amps 2 10e 6 lt NRf gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DCONductance DELTa lt NRf gt Sets delta value amps 2 1e 6 lt NRf gt 0 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DCONductance DELay NRf Sets delay seconds 2 0 002 lt NRf gt 1e 3 to 9999 999 SOURCE 1 DCONductance CABort b Enable or disable Compliance 0 Abort 2 lt b gt 0 or OFF
243. e 124 Bit B4 Wave Started WStrt Set bit indicates that the Wave mode has been started Error status code 125 Bit B5 Waiting for Trigger Event Trig Set bit indicates that the Model 622x is in the trigger layer waiting for a trigger event to occur Error status code 171 Bit B6 Waiting for Arm Event Arm Set bit indicates that the Model 622x is in the arm layer waiting for an arm event to occur Error status code 172 Bit B7 Wave Stopped WStop Set bit indicates that the Wave mode has been aborted Error status code 126 Bit B8 Filter Settled Filt Arming one of the delta tests will clear 0 this bit A set bit indicates that the delta test has started and the filter is set tled Error status code 180 Bit B10 Idle State Idle Set bit indicates the Model 622x is in the idle state Error status code 174 Bit B11 RS 232 Error RSE Set bit indicates that one of the following RS 232 errors has occurred 800 RS 232 Framing Error detected 802 RS 232 Overrun detected 803 RS 232 Break detected 805 Invalid system communication setting 808 RS 232 Invalid Format Error 809 Not allowed with RS 232 Error status codes 800 through 809 Return to Section 11 topics 11 14 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 11 5 Operation event status SEE RSE Idle Filt WStop Arm Trig Wstrt Swp SwpA SwpD Cal B15
244. e page 7 22 Frequency 1kHz Amplitude 10mA Offset 1mA Phase marker off Duration 5s Square wave page 7 23 Frequency 10kHz Amplitude 1mA Offset 0 Duty cycle 5096 Phase marker 180 line 1 Duration 10s Ramp wave page 7 24 Frequency 50kHz Amplitude 5mA Offset 0 Duty cycle 25 Phase marker 90 line 1 Duration 15s Arbitrary wave page 7 25 Arbitrary points 0 5 0 25 0 0 3 0 4 Range best fixed Frequency 100kHz Amplitude 25mA Offset 0 Phase marker Off Duration 20s Return to Section 7 topics 7 22 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Programming sine waves 1 Restore defaults with this command RST Configure the waveform Examples The following commands configure 1kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 10mA 1mA offset and phase marker off SOUR WAVE FUNC SIN Select sine wave SOUR WAVE FREQ 1e3 Set frequency to 1kHz SOUR WAVE AMPL 1 2 Set amplitude to 10mA SOUR WAVE OFFS 1e 3 Set offset to 1mA SOUR WAVE PMAR STAT OFF Turn off phase marker SOUR WAVE DUR TIME 5 5 second duration SOUR WAVE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range Arm and trigger the waveform turn on output SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform SOUR WAVE INIT Turn on output trigger waveform To stop generating the waveform and turn the source output off before the duration elapses send this command SOUR WAVE ABOR Stop
245. e Cursor Keys to place blinking 0123456789 0000 cursor on digit to be edited i While in the edit mode use the Value b Use Value Adjust Keys to increment K Adjust Method or Numeric Entry or decrement the value of the digit Method to edit values Use these editing i techniques for both methods Nomeric Entry Method 255 i To the set l source value to zero or the Cursor Keys to placa blinking H V compliance value to 0 10V minumum b Ker on the MSD digit to be edited ENTER EXIT Keys 7 8 ress the 0000 ke Key in a digit by pressing a number y key 0 9 Cursor moves to the next To toggle the I source polarity press digit Edit each digit as needed the key Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 11 Source compliance editing notes The following notes apply to source editing for both the Models 6220 Figure 3 3 and 6221 Figure 3 4 1 The displayed source and or compliance value can only be edited if the DC source mode is selected Select a fixed range that will accommodate the source value to be set Note that after a source value is set Step 4 in Figure 3 3 pressing AUTO range will select the best fixed range if it is not already selected Details on Autorange are provided on page 3 13 The Model 622x must be in the edit mode in order to edit source and com pliance val
246. e Guard and Output Low is con nected to Earth Ground see Figure 2 5A Triax inner shield is connected to Output Low which is disconnected from Earth Ground Floating see Figure 2 4B This is the default setting Triax inner shield is connected to Cable Guard Output Low is accessed at the LO banana jack and is disconnected from Earth Ground Floating see Figure 2 5B Using the Model 622x with the triax inner shield connected to Output Low makes it compatible with the Keithley Model 220 current source WARNING To prevent electric shock and or damage to the Model 622x DO NOT exceed the maximum Max voltage levels indicated in Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 CAUTION To prevent damage to internal fuses of the Model 622x current from output low to earth ground must be limited to 1A Use a fuse or other current limiting device in the external test circuit One internal fuse is located between the Triax Output Low and banana jack LO The other internal fuse is located between Triax Output Low and earth ground Return to Section 2 topics 2 6 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual triax inner shield connected to Output Low A Triax Output Low setting Earth Ground B Triax Output Low setting Floating 1622 OUTPUT T ji uic yin Output Low Output Low black black Earth Ground Earth Ground Earth 1 Earth 1 Ground green Ground FVR green 1 Boot color for alligator clip if usin
247. e compliance the overshoot will decay in lt 1us and will typically not adversely affect your test or damage the DUT Calculating overshoot The overshoot that typically occurs is lt 1V with worse case being a maximum of 2V The overshoot that will actually occur depends on the change in output current relative to the full scale current of the presently selected source range The following calculations for overshoot are approximations It is assumed that the unit is not in compliance at the beginning of the step but then enters compli ance after the step occurs In the calculations the 2V term represents the maxi mum overshoot that can occur Overshoot Current Step Current Range x 2V For example on the 2mA range a 2mA step change is 100 of range and will result in 2V overshoot Overshoot 2mA 2mA x 2V 2V On the same range 2mA a step change of 0 2mA only results in an overshoot of 200mV Overshoot 0 2mA 2mA x 2V 0 1x2V 200mV A small current step size lessens the chance of driving the source into compli ance Small current steps are typically used for slow sweeps and the waveform function The larger step sizes are typically used for fast sweeps and the delta tests The delta tests generate square waves or pulses which have a fast rising edge Return to Appendix topics E 12 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Effect of compliance setpoint on settling times If the compliance vo
248. e default is 19 2k Make sure the programming terminal that you are connecting to the Model 622x can support the baud rate you selected Both the Model 622x and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate Data bits stop bits and parity The RS 232 interface settings for data bits stop bits and parity are fixed at eight data bits one stop bit and no parity These settings cannot be changed Terminator The Model 622x can be configured to terminate each program message that it transmits to the controller with any of the following combinations of CR and lt LF gt LF line feed default CR carriage return LFCR line feed carriage return CRLF carriage return line feed Return to Section 10 topics 10 26 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Flow control signal handshaking Signal handshaking between the controller and the instrument allows the two devices to communicate to each other regarding being ready or not ready to receive data Software flow control Software flow control is in the form of X_ON and X_OFF characters and is enabled when XonXoFF is selected from the RS 232 FLOW CTRL menu When the input queue of the Model 622x becomes more than 3 4 full the instrument issues an X OFF command The control program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the Model 622x issues the X ON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below 1 2 full The Model 622
249. e for running the sweep 4 SOURce 1 SWEep ABORt Abort sweep immediately 5 SOURce 1 SWEep SPACing name Selects sweep type LiNear lt name gt LINear LOGarithmic or LIST SOURce 1 SWEep POINts n Sets sweep points 11 n 1 to 65535 SOURce 1 SWEep RANGing name Selects sweep source ranging BEST lt name gt AUTO BEST or FlXed SOURce 1 SWEep CABort b Sets compliance sweep abort state OFF SOURce 1 SWEep COUNt NRf b ON or OFF Sets sweep count 19 lt NRf gt 1 to 9999 or INFinite Set step parameter negative for negative going sweep Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 19 1 SOUR CURR STAR lt n gt Set start current SOUR CURR STOP lt n gt Set stop current SOUR CURR STEP lt n gt Set step current Use these commands to set the start and stop currents for linear and logarithmic staircase sweeps and to set the step current for linear staircase sweeps Setting the stop value more positive than the start value will result in a positive going sweep Conversely setting the stop value more negative than the start value will result in a negative going sweep Setting the step current negative will also cre ate a negative going sweep The STEP value is subject to the condition that the total number of points calculated does not exceed the maximum number of points allowed in the sweep For example even thou
250. e higher source ranges If desired the output response of the Model 6221 can be set to match the output response of the Model 6220 both typically 100us For the Models 6220 and 6221 an analog filter can be enabled to slow down the output response For a high impedance load the analog filter reduces overshoot excessive noise and instability oscillation Analog filter The Model 622x has an analog filter that when enabled will slow down the output response settling time of the current source When the analog filter is enabled a capacitor typically 33pF is placed across the output Depending on the load impedance the analog filter may or may not signif icantly increase the settling time of the current source For example assume the Model 6221 is on the 2mA range and FAST response is selected For this configuration the settling time is specified at 2us typical Also Return to Section 3 topics 3 6 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual assume the load impedance is 1kQ With the analog filter enabled the additional settling time five time constants is calculated as follows Additional settling time 5RC 5 x 1kO x 33pF 0 165ys Enabling the analog filter adds 0 165us settling time which is not a significant increase in comparison to 2us Now assume the load is 1MQ The additional settling time with the analog filter enabled is 165 5 x 1MO x 33pF The analog filter greatly increased the s
251. e read commands see Data flow and read commands on page 5 13 Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 11 Buffer Programming example mX b This command sequence performs a single mX b calculation and displays the result on the computer CRT Note that Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conduc tance must be running when the CALC1 read command is sent CALC1 FORM MXB Select mX b math format CALC1 KMAT MMF 2e 3 Set scale factor M to 2e 3 CALC1 KMAT MBF 5e 4 offset B to 5e 4 CALC1 STAT ON Enable CALC1 math CALC1 DATA Request latest CALC1 reading The Model 622x has a buffer data store to store readings and related data ele ments for one to 65 536 buffer readings see Buffer data elements on page 6 12 Buffer readings are readings from the Model 2182 21824 that were processed by the Model 622x as delta readings Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance Also stored are statistics for the readings These include maximum minimum aver age mean standard deviation and peak to peak see Buffer statistics on page 6 12 For front panel operation the buffer is always active enabled Post math delta readings are automatically stored in the buffer Remote programming provides more control of the buffer The buffer can be disabled When enabled buffer feed can be pre math delta readings or post math delta readin
252. e sweep configuration menu b Select TYPE and then press ENTER c Select CUSTOM and then press ENTER to choose a custom sweep d Select POINTS press ENTER and then enter the number of sweep points 64 000 maximum e Choose AUTO COPY press ENTER and then enable YES or disable NO auto copy With auto copy enabled compliance and delay values will be automatically copied to all sweep point locations f Select ADJUST POINTS and then set the current value compliance and delay for the first sweep point g Set the current value and if not using auto copy compliance and delay for each remaining sweep point h From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER and then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired i Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER and then select BEST AUTO or FIXED as appropriate j From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select COMPLIANCE ABORT press ENTER and then choose to abort YES or not to abort NO the sweep if compliance is reached while the sweep is in progress k Press EXIT to return to normal display Run sweep a Press the SWP key to arm the sweep The output will turn on b Press TRIG to start the sweep c Press EXIT to abort the sweep before it is finished d Turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key when the sweep is finished NOTE A custom sweep cannot be saved as a user set up Attempting to do so will generate
253. e two guards are summarized as follows Triax Cable Guard Banana Jack Guard 1mV Accuracy typical Use to measure voltage 10mV Accuracy typical Use for cable and DUT guarding Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 9 When to use Cable Guard When to use Cable Guard is a judgement call that must be made by the user The information on Triax Cable Guard will provide a basic understanding on the prin ciples of guarding In general Cable Guard is used to reduce leakage current for high impedance DUT and reduce capacitance in the triax cable and at the DUT to improve output response rise time Lower capacitance results in faster output response While Cable Guard will greatly reduce capacitance in the triax cable and at the DUT there are other possible sources of high capacitance that can greatly degrade the overall effectiveness of guarding The DUT or test circuit may inherently have high capacitance and or the voltme ter used in the test system may have high capacitance These capacitances which cannot be guarded out may negate the need for Cable Guard especially for low impedance DUT The Keithley Model 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter has rel atively high input capacitance 300pF and 500pF in special mode only Triax Cable Guard A triax cable has insulation resistance and capacitance between its conductors A typical triax cable could typically have 1TQ ft of i
254. each range must be completed Table 17 7 CAL PROT SENS command parameter ranges First Second Third Fourth Sense range parameter parameter parameter parameter 20V 418 0 to 422 0 1 05 to 1 05 18 0 to 22 0 1 05 to 1 05 full scale curr 1V at curr full scale at curr 1V at curr 100V 90 to 110 18 9 to 23 1 90 to 110 18 9 to 23 1 full scale curr 21V at pos curr full scale at curr 21V at neg curr Notes 1 Parameter steps for each range may be performed in any order but all four parameter steps for each range must be completed 2 There are two internal voltage compliance ranges 20V 100V but externally it appears as if there is only one 100V range The calibration for this range must be performed on the 2mA source range All four 20V steps must be completed before any of the 100V steps Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 17 8 CAL PROT GUAR command parameter ranges Step Parameter STEP 1 0 00 to 50 0e 3 STEP2 50 0e 3 to 0 0 NOTE Step1 and Step 2 may be performed in any order but both must be completed and each step must be initialized with INIT before being run Table 17 9 Calibration errors Number Description 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 Date of calibration not set Next date of calibration
255. ecting the KI 220 language are provided in Section 10 Table 15 1 DDC emulation commands Mode Command Description Note Display DO D3 These display commands are accepted but do not do any Note 3 thing since the Model 622x can display all information at once Function FO Put current source in standby F1 Turn output on Prefix GO Location with Prefix G1 Location without Prefix G2 Location with Prefix G3 Location without Prefix G4 Full Buffer with Prefix G5 Full Buffer without Prefix Self Test JO This digital self test command has no effect on the Model Note 2 622x EO1 KO Send EOI K1 Send no EOI SRQ MO SRQ disabled M1 IDDC IDDC No Remote M2 Over Voltage Limit M4 End of Buffer M8 End of Dwell Time Delay M16 Input Port Change Program PO Single Notes 12 14 P1 Continuous P2 Step Return to Section 15 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 15 1 cont DDC emulation commands 220 Language 15 3 Range RO Auto R1 1nA R2 10nA R3 100nA R4 1 R5 10pA R6 100 R7 1mA R8 10mA R9 100mA Trigger TO Start on Talk T1 Stop on Talk T2 Start on GET T3 Stop on GET T4 Start on X T5 Stop on X T6 Start on External Trigger T7 Stop on External Trigger Terminator YO CRLF Note 11 Y1 LF CR Y2 CR Y3 LF Y4 None Inputs Current Source Note 8 V Voltage Limit Note 5 W Dwell Time B Buffer Address L Memory Location Notes 7 10 I O Port O 0 15 Set Output Control Bits
256. ed factory controlled laboratory out of doors etc What power line voltage is used Ambient temperature F Relative humidity Other Any additional information If special modifications have been made by the user please describe Be sure to include your name and phone number on this service form 12 06 Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies KEITHLEY A GREATER MEASURE CONFIDENCE Keithley Instruments Inc Corporate Headquarters 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY www keithley com 12 06
257. ed as follows For details on these ter minals see Output configurations on page 2 5 Center conductor The center conductor of the triax connector is always con nected to Output High of the current source Inner shield The inner shield of the triax connector can be connected to Output Low or Cable Guard See Triax inner shield on page 2 7 for details on the inner Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 3 shield connection setting See Triax Cable Guard on page 2 9 for details on using the Cable Guard Outer shield The outer shield of the triax connector is always connected to Earth Ground of the Model 622x see Ground points for details Frequency variable resistor FVR The outer shield Earth Ground of the triax connector is isolated from the chassis of the Model 622x by a Frequency Variable Resistor FVR The FVR shown in Figure 2 1 is used to isolate the current source circuitry from high frequencies that may be present on the chassis of the Model 622x As frequencies on the chassis increase the resistance of the FVR increases to dampen its effects Ground points The various ground points used by the Model 622x are shown and explained in Figure 2 1 The ground point for signal connections to external circuitry is Earth Ground Earth Ground is the outer shield of the triax connector and is isolated from the Chassis by the FVR Keep in mind t
258. ed by colons for example 00 60 1A 00 04 0B The MAC address is assigned at the factory and cannot be changed by the user SYST COMM ETH SAVE Save Ethernet setting changes This command saves the Ethernet address changes and reboots the instru ment When the IP address Ethernet gateway or subnet mask is changed the change does not take effect until either the SYST COMM ETH SAVE com mand is sent or the next time the Model 6221 is power cycled SYST PASS CEN lt string gt Enable protected commands This command enables protected commands Commands that are not pro tected are listed in Table 10 3 Send the password as a string of characters The password is case sensitive and can include both standard ASCII and non ASCII characters from 1 to 255 Make sure to enclose the password in quotes For example with the default password the following would be sent SYST PASS DEFAULT Note that the password and command protection state are not affected by RST or SYSTem PRESet SYST PASS CDIS lt string gt Disable protected commands This command disables protected commands All commands except those listed in Table 10 3 will be disabled when this command is sent with the cor rect password The password is case sensitive and can include both standard ASCII and non ASCII characters from 1 to 255 It must be enclosed in quotes For example with the default password the following would be sent to disable all protected commands
259. elta measurement technique 5 22 Delta triggering sequence 4 2422 0 5 26 Pulse Delta 3 point measurement technique 5 32 Pulse timing tpe ERO UTOR ee e denen 5 36 Pulse sweep output examples 2 0000 01010 nemen 5 38 Pulse Delta triggering sequence two lows measured 5 44 Basic differential measurements essere 5 51 Differential Conductance measurement process sse 5 52 Differential Conductance triggering sequence 5 59 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Digital filter types moving and repeating eee 6 5 Filtet aiio P 6 7 Butter recall oee es Ee EEE mia Ere oM bp 6 15 Wave Functions 6221 Only Offset example RUGGED RE dee cee 7 7 7 8 Phase matket 2 n EGRE 7 9 Waveform triggering eene nnne enne 7 11 Waveform retriggering essent 7 13 Triggering Trigger model for front panel operation 8 2 Trigger model for remote operation 8 3 Device action block of trigger model 2 8 6 Trigger link connection operation 2 8 13 Trigger link input pulse specifications
260. en rennen ene 16 6 Compliance accuracy 2 tre rit bab eb cae Dd 16 8 Waveform function rennen 16 9 Calibration Introduction 15st Gee het e E DOR ha ne ints eR 17 2 Calibration requirements esee ennt entente tnnt 17 3 Environmental conditions sees 17 3 Warm up period e 17 3 Line POWER fuss ilies REOR RID 17 3 Recommended calibration equipment sese 17 4 Calibration equipment connections 17 4 Restoring factory defaults 00 0 eee enne nennen 17 4 Calibration summary and considerations 2 17 5 Calibration SUMMAI D 17 5 Calibration considerations 2 17 5 Calibration stas ese deep ewe 17 5 Front panel calibration 2 2 17 5 eeose e i n EEREN 17 14 SCPI commands calibration oo ieee eese 17 20 Calibration dates count and password sese 17 24 Viewing calibration dates and count 4 00000 17 24 Changing the calibration password sss 17 24 Specifications Error and Status Messages RR ERR ER TT
261. ence Manual Figure 3 4 Source and compliance editing Model 6221 DC Output Rotary Knob amp Cursor Keys Range Keys Select Key EDIT key i Select next EDIT l LOCAL fixed Numeric Entry Keys Select best 10123456789 0000 i fixed range ENTER EXIT Keys i PUSH TO ENTER i mo oct naxt 2 lt gt range is ani ce eL ee ee ee ee ee ee ee A Perform the following steps to set source and compliance values for the Model 6221 The notes in the steps refer to the Source compliance editing notes on page 3 11 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select DC output mode Press the DC Output Select Key to select the DC output mode Select source range 2_ Use the Range Keys to select a source range Enter source editing mode 5 Use the EDIT Key to select the l source field or V compliance field EDIT annunciator turns on The edit ing mode will cancel if an editing action is not performed within six sec onds To re enter the edit mode for the same field press a Cursor Key or push and release the Rotary Knob Set source or compliance value 6 8 Use the Value Adjust Method or Numeric Entry Method to edit values Use these editing tech niques for both methods e To set the l source value to zero or set the V compliance value to 0 10V minimum press the 0000 key toggle the I source polarity press the
262. end 8 RI ring indicator 9 22 The Model 622x does not use all RS 232 signals See Table 10 5 Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 29 Ethernet interface reference Ethernet standards The Model 6221 conforms to these standards TCP IP EEE 802 3 SCPI 1996 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Typical Ethernet systems The four typical Ethernet systems using a Model 6221 are shown in Figures 10 5 through 10 8 The simplest system connects a Model 6221 directly to a PC equipped with a NIC Network Interface Card as shown in Figure 10 5 The Ethernet cable can be up to 100 meters in length Note that a cross over cable must be used for a direct PC connection Figure 10 5 Direct 6221 connection to PC PC with NIC installed Keithley 6221 Ethernet cross over cable RJ 45 male male Up to 100 meters gt Return to Section 10 topics 10 30 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Adding a hub as shown in Figure 10 6 expands the system into a small LAN Local Area Network The hub allows additional Ethernet instruments to be con nected to the PC Figure 10 6 Small LAN system using a hub PC with NIC installed RJ 45 Outlet Ethernet Cables 3 RJ 45 male male a Hub To other Ethernet resources Keithley 6221 Up to 100 meters gt Adding a second NIC in the PC as s
263. enerator lt b gt ON or OFF SOURce 1 WAVE EXTRig ILINe lt NRf gt Specify trigger link input trigger line 18 0 lt NRf gt 0 none or 1 to 6 SOURce 1 WAVE EXTRig IGNore lt b gt Sets whether or not to restart OFF waveform upon retriggering 19 lt b gt ON or OFF SOURce 1 WAVE EXTRig IVALue lt NRf gt Sets inactive value to output before 0 00 after waveform lt NRf gt 1 to 1 SOUR WAVE FUNC lt name gt Select wave function As soon as this command is received the waveform takes effect After the wave mode is armed SOUR WAVE ARM the SOUR WAVE INIT command is required to start the function output For ARBitrary X 2 0 4 If no X is supplied then ARBO is selected Location 0 is the volatile waveform memory location If this command is sent when the waveform is armed the Model 6221 will re arm itself If the waveform must be reloaded while the output is enabled the inactive value will be output during this period An error 525 Cannot save ARBO as user setup is returned when you try to save a setup with the WAVE function set to ARBO This limitation is necessary because ARBO is stored in volatile memory and will not be valid after the unit is power cycled When you attempt to do so the WAVE function will be changed to SINE default this error will be generated and the save will then proceed normally Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6
264. ent to Keithley for routine verification calibration Any verification procedure for this instrument should account for measurement uncertainties that arise from test equipment tolerances Before proceeding the laboratory should characterize the components used with the testing process in order to correct for test equipment tolerance and to estimate measurement uncertainty appropriately NOTE The test procedures in this section provide a rela tively low cost method of verifying instrument performance The techniques used for these tests should be adequate for most users However in some cases measurement uncertainty may not be sufficient for those with more stringent require ments If necessary contact your Keithley repre sentative or the factory for information on more comprehensive procedures to verify Model 622x performance Return to Section 16 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Performance Verification 16 3 Test requirements Be sure that you perform the verification tests Under the proper environmental conditions After the specified warm up period Using the correct line voltage Using the proper test equipment Using the specified reading limits Environmental conditions Conduct the procedures in a test environment that has An ambient temperature of 18 to 28 C 65 to 82 F A relative humidity of less than 70 unless otherwise noted Warm up period Allow the Model 622x to warm
265. er that DHCP must be enabled see Configuring the Model 6221 Ethernet interface on page 10 5 When adding the device to a network if a DHCP server is available the DHCP server will download the IP address subnet mask and gateway address to the Model 6221 upon powering it up on the network Contact the IS IT department for access to the DHCP server The network parameters acquired from the DHCP can be viewed from the Model 6221 front panel COMM ETHERNET menu or accessed by remote If no DHCP server is available these values must be manu ally assigned to ensure proper operation of the device and to avoid conflicts with other devices on the network Return to Section 10 topics 10 34 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Manual IP configuration When connecting the Model 6221 directly to the Ethernet port of a PC or to a hub that is not part of a larger network the IP address and subnet mask must be con figured manually the gateway address is not usually relevant for smaller net works The IP address is a 32 bit identifier consisting of four one byte 8 bits sections commonly identified in dotted decimal format i e 145 90 120 240 The subnet mask is a second 32 bit identifier that designates what portion of the IP address identifies the subnet and what portion identifies the device i e 255 255 255 0 In this example 145 90 120 is the network address and 240 is the device address Gateway addresses are typi
266. er its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs another measurement conversion A D 2 An output trig ger pulse is then sent back to the Model 622x Model 622x The Model 622x outputs the programmed high I High cur rent level After the Delta Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182 21824 Model 2182 2182A After its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs another measurement conversion A D 3 Delta is then calculated by the Model 622x The Model 2182 21824 outputs a trigger pulse to the Model 622x to start the next Delta cycle if Delta count is 21 Otherwise Delta will stop Figure 5 6 shows the data reading flow process from the Model 2182 21824 to the Model 622x Figure 5 8 Delta triggering sequence 622x 2182 622x 2182 oe 2182A Output 2182A rigger A D 1 Trigger A D 3 2182 2182A 2182 2182A 622x 2 524 Output 622x ei Output Delta gt Trigger gt Trigger Delta test Trigger gt Trigger Delay Delay Delay I High Delta 622x Reading i Start Delta i 622x 2182 Note Delta 2182A_ Time periods not Delay Trigger i drawn to scale Say 2182 2182A 622 Output i i Output E Trigger i Trigger A D 2 i 4 First Delta Cycle gt Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 27 Operation NOTE Delta rea
267. er type Valid characters for the non decimal parameter values are shown as follows lt NDN gt format Valid characters Binary 1 s and 0 s Hexadecimal 0 through 9 and A through F Octal 0 through 7 Reading registers Any register in the status structure can be read by using the appropriate query command The following explains how to interpret the returned value response message The actual query commands are covered later in this section Table 11 3 through Table 11 6 The response message will be a value that indicates which bits in the register are set That value if not already binary must be converted to its binary equivalent For example for a binary value of 100101 bits B5 B2 and BO are set The returned value can be in the binary decimal hexadecimal or octal format The FORMat SREGister command is used to select the data format for the returned value Table 11 2 For non decimal formats one of the following headers will accompany the returned value to indicate which format is selected B Header for binary values H Header for hexadecimal values Q Header for octal values Table 11 2 SCPI command data formats for reading status registers Command Description Default FORMat FORMat subsystem SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status registers ASCii name ASCiiDecimal format HEXadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary
268. ered in Section 17 The mainframe serial number and revision levels are provided by System identification on page 1 16 Details on the Beeper are provided on page 1 16 The TEST main menu item is explained as follows Return to Section 1 topics 1 20 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual After pressing the MAIN key select TEST from the menu The menu items are explained as follows DISPLAY TESTS The display tests include the following KEYS Use to test front panel key operation When a key is pressed its label name will be displayed To exit press the EXIT key twice DISPLAY PATTERNS There are five parts to the display test Each time ENTER is pressed the next part of the test sequence is selected The five parts of the test sequence are as follows All digit segments and annunciators are displayed All digit segments are displayed Forthe first digit a segment line is scrolled up and down Forthe first digit a segment line is scrolled left to right All digits are sequentially displayed left to right The segments of each digit are sequentially displayed When finished abort the display test by pressing EXIT CHAR SET Use this menu item to show the display symbols used by the Model 622x Editing controls Source and compliance editing When the Model 622x is in the edit mode EDIT annunciator on the editing con trols are used to set source and compliance values The ty
269. erential current dl sweep and measures differential voltage dV This function uses a 3 point moving average algorithm to calculate dV With dl known and dV calculated the Model 622x can then calculate differential conductance dG or differential resistance dR Figure 5 1C shows differential conductance measurements Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 1 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurements A Delta measurements 2182 2182A 2182 2182A 2182 2182A A D l High gt 622x l Source l Low 4 2 Ist Delta Cycle A D A D 2182 2182 2182A 2182A i AD AD 2nd Delta Cycle Delta Cycle 4th Delta Cycle B Pulse Delta measurements 6221 I Source 2182A 2182A A D A D 2182A 2182A 2182A 2182A A D A D A D A D Pulse Delta Pulse Delta Reading Reading i 1st 2 DELTA Reading 4th 2182 2182A A D 2182A A D 2182A 2182A A D A D Pulse Delta Reading Nth Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 151 Pulse Delta e 2nd Pulse 3rd Pulse Delta Cycle Cycle C Differential Conductance measurements 622x Start ist Diff Cond Cycle 2nd Diff Cond Cycle gt 1 3rd Diff Cond Cycle Cycle Ath Diff Cond Cycle Return to Section 5 topics 5 3 5
270. ering on page 8 13 for detailed information When this mode is enabled the instrument waits for an external trigger pulse on a specified trigger link line and starts the configured waveform within 1s of the falling edge of the trigger pulse see Figure 7 4 To use this mode you must first enable it using a remote command or from the front panel If the front panel approach is taken the desired trigger link line can also be set at that time A separate command is required to select the trigger link input line over the bus Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 11 Figure 7 4 Waveform triggering Output Waveform Waveform Starts Within 1us of Trigger Pulse Leading Edge High Trigger Link Input Pulse See Section 8 Front panel external trigger control External trigger selections are included with the waveform configuration menu shown in Table 7 2 on page 7 15 An example of how to set up this mode is detailed in Using the external trigger mode on page 7 20 Remote external trigger control Remote commands to control the external trigger mode are listed in Table 7 4 on page 7 27 and a program example is shown in Programming an externally trig gered waveform on page 7 26 Return to Section 7 topics 7 12 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Controlling waveform retriggering behavior By default the waveform will restart
271. error 528 Cannot save CUSTOM sweep setup Return to Section 4 topics 4 14 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote sweep operation Procedures for programming and running a sweep for each of the three sweep types are given on the following pages Each of these procedures includes commands for a typical sweep example Table 4 3 summarizes parameters for each of these exam ples See SCPI commands sweeps on page 4 18 for details on sweep com mands NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while sweep is armed or running The SAV and RCL commands will generate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed Table 4 3 Sweep example parameters Sweep type Parameters for sweep examples Linear staircase sweep page 4 15 Start current 1mA Stop current 10mA Step current 1mA Delay 1s Source range best fixed Compliance abort off Sweep count 1 Bias current 100A Compliance 10V Logarithmic staircase sweep page 4 16 Start current 1mA Stop current 10mA points 5 Delay 2s Source range best fixed Compliance abort off Sweep count 1 Bias current 104A Compliance 5V Custom list sweep page 4 17 points 5 Points 3mA 1mA 4mA 5mA 2mA Delay 3s 1s 4s 5s 2s Compliance 3V 1V 4V 5V 2V Source range auto Compliance abort off Sweep count 1 Bias current 50uA Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 15 Running
272. erwise Pulse Delta will stop Figure 5 6 shows the data reading flow process from the Model 2182A to the Model 6221 Return to Section 5 topics 5 44 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 12 Pulse Delta triggering sequence two lows measured Pulse Width Ngee i 1 6221 Output Trigger 2182A A D 2 Source 2182A Output i A Delay ie Trigger Pulse Width I High 6221 Output Pulse Width Trigger P 6221 Output 2182A A D 3 6221 Trigger Pulse Delta Output 1 2182A A D 1 Reading Source I 2182A Output Source I 2182A Output Delay Trigger Delay UN Trigger I Low t Low High Low 10 EN gt lt gt One Line Cycle One Line Cycle i One Line Cycle Power Line Voltage Operation NOTE Pulse Delta readings from the Model 2182A will be unfiltered Noisy readings can be filtered by the Model 622x before sending them into the buffer See Section 6 for details Pulse Delta operation front panel The system configuration for front panel stand alone operation is shown in Figure 5 2A on page 5 5 1 Connections are shown in the following illustrations All power must be removed from all components in the system before making connections Figure 5 3 page 5 7 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 DUT test connections 2
273. ery command sent over the serial port SYSTem COMMunicate SERial ENTer When communicating over the serial port there are no errors reported if a Model 2182A is not connected to the serial port Examples The following commands demonstrate proper syntax for sending commands and returning responses to queries over the serial port SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG 1 Select 1V range for 2182A SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG Send range query SYST COMM SER ENT Return response to query Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 47 4 Set measurement units Volts are the default units for the Model 6221 but can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Sie mens reading see Measurement units on page 5 16 for details The commands to set measurement units are listed in Table 5 1 The following example shows the command sequence to select average power measure ment units UNIT W Select power Watts measurement units UNIT POWer AVERage Select Average power type 5 Set up arm and run Pulse Delta Details on the commands to set up and arm Pulse Delta are provided in Table 5 4 The following example dem onstrates the proper sequence to set up arm and run a Fixed output RST Restores 6221 defaults SOUR PDEL HIGH 10e 3 Sets pulse high value to 10mA SOUR PDEL LOW 0 Sets pulse low value t
274. ery Delta and Differential Conductance reading and two or three A Ds for every Pulse Delta reading When the stack is full the readings are averaged to calculate the final filtered delta reading The filter count can be set from 2 to 300 However only readings within the filter window will be displayed and stored or transmitted see Filter window on page 6 5 for details Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 3 Filter type There are two averaging filter types moving and repeating These filter types are shown in Figure 6 1 Moving filter Basic moving filter operation For the moving filter every delta reading yields a filtered Delta reading The moving filter uses a first in first out memory stack As a new Delta reading is placed in the stack the oldest delta reading is removed from the stack and a filtered reading is calculated When the averaging filter is enabled the first A D conversion is placed into the stack and copied to the other locations in the memory stack to fill it For example if filter count is 10 then the first A D reading and nine copies are loaded into the stack The readings are averaged to yield the first reading Settled filtered readings will not occur until all the copied A D readings are purged out of the stack For filter count 10 the first nine averaged readings will be unsettled Figure 6 1A shows the moving filter process
275. ery TRIG output trigger Arm layer commands control entire sweep Trigger Layer commands control individual sweep steps Table 14 11 Units command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI UNIT Commands to set reading units for Delta Pulse Delta 5 and Differential Conductance VOLT Volts readings are sent from 2182 2182A to 622x DC lt name gt Specify reading units V OHMS W or SIEMens V DC Query reading units POWer Power reading type for Pulse Delta 6221 TYPE lt name gt Set power units reading type PEAK or AVERage AVER TYPE Query power units reading type The lt name gt parameter for Siemens can be sent as S SIEM or SIEMENS Return to Section 14 topics ection 15 topics troduction page 15 2 220 Language 15 2 220 Language Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction The Model 622x can be used to emulate the Keithley Model 220 current source by using the KI 220 language mode with GPIB remote operation When using the 220 language mode Device Dependent Commands DDCs used by the Model 220 are also used to control the Model 622x The DDC emulation com mands used by the Model 622x are listed and explained in Table 15 1 The KI 220 language mode is set from the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu and is selected using the following key press sequence Press COMM gt Select GPIB gt Set the address 0 30 gt Select KI 220 language Details on sel
276. ess ENTER to output 2mA for 0 1V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 0 100000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT 8 Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Return to Section 17 topics 17 10 Calibration 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Press ENTER The display will prompt 20V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Press ENTER to output 2mA for 20V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 020 0000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt 1V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Press ENTER to output 2mA for 0 1V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 0 100000V Use 4 gt A V ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt 100V COMPLIANCE CAL Press ENTER to Output 2 0000mA Press ENTER to output 2mA for 100V compliance calibration The instru ment will prompt as follows DMM RDG 100 0000V Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will
277. essing LOCAL or DISP or cycling power cancels the message and dis ables the text message mode Return to Section 13 topics 13 4 DISPlay FORMat SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual FORMat subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to select the format for transferring delta data over the bus and are listed in Table 13 2 Table 13 2 Format commands Command Description Default FORMat lt type gt lt length gt Specify data format ASCii lt type gt ASCii REAL 32 SREal DREal or REAL 64 lt length gt 32 for REAL type FORMat ELEMents lt item list Specify data elements RDG item list READing TSTamp UNITs RNUMber TST SOURce COMPliance AVOLtage or item list ALL or DEFault FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify binary byte order Note lt name gt NORMal or SWAPped FORMAT SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading for reading status registers name ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BlNary For details see Reading registers on page 11 6 Note RST default is NORMAL SYSTem PRESet default is SWAPped FORMat lt type gt lt length gt Parameters ASCii ASCII format SREal Binary IEEE 754 single precision format REAL 32 Binary IEEE 754 single precision format DREal Binary IEEE 754 double precision format REAL 64 Binary IEEE 754 double precision format NOTE length is not used for the ASCii SREal
278. ettling time from 2us to approximately 167us NOTE The above example is only intended to show how load impedance affects settling time when using the analog filter Actual settling times will also depend on other impedances present in the test circuit such as capacitance and leakage resistance in cabling and in the test fixture For load impedances lt 10kQ the analog filter has little effect on the output response At the 10kQ load impedance point the filter capacitor across the load creates a filter response of less than 1MHz which is the maximum output band width of the Model 6221 for the higher current ranges For load impedances greater than 1MQ the reduced response of the filtered out put can significantly reduce overshoot noise and instability oscillation With the analog filter disabled the output capacitance of the Model 622x is 10pF If not sure about using the analog filter experimentation may be the best way to determine which analog filter state enabled or disabled provides the best results An external user supplied filter can be effective at re ducing high frequency noise generated by the Model 622x current source For details see External user supplied filter on page E 7 Response speed setting 6221 only The filter response speed of the Model 6221 can be set for FAST or SLOW For the SLOW setting the output response of the Model 6221 is the same as the out put response of the
279. ew IP address Format IP 000 000 000 000 GATEWAY Set view Ethernet gateway Format GW 000 000 000 000 SUBNET Set view subnet mask Format SN 000 000 000 000 DHCP Select DHCP control ON or OFF PASSWORD Select whether to clear communications password 5 NO Do not clear password YES Clear password The Ethernet interface is not available on the Model 6220 2 The MAC address is displayed only and cannot be changed by the user Typical decimal notation address shown Formats shown only for example Actual numeric values depend on settings 4 Itis not necessary to manually set the IP address Ethernet gateway and subnet mask if DHCP control is ON and the LAN has a DHCP server See Ethernet settings on page 10 33 5 See Password on page 10 6 and Table 10 2 for password details Configuring the GPIB interface 1 Press the COMM key select GPIB and press ENTER 2 If you are changing to the GPIB from a different interface the Model 622x will perform a power on reset and you must re enter the COMM menu 3 Set the primary ADDRESS to the desired value 0 30 default 12 and then press ENTER 4 Choose SELECT LANGUAGE press ENTER and then chose either the SCPI SCPI 1996 0 which includes 488 2 or 220 DDC language Press ENTER to complete your selection See GPIB interface reference on page 10 19 for full details on using the GPIB interface Return to Section
280. ey 24xx SourceMeter to characterize a device s electrical DC parameters Such a test system for a BUT is shown in Figure E 4 The Model 622x current source can be configured to sweep a number of base cur rents for the test The Model 24xx SourceMeter is configured to sweep voltage and measure current External triggering Trigger Link is used between the two instruments to synchronize the testing process When the test is started the Model 622x will output the first base current and send a trigger pulse to the SourceMeter to start its operations The SourceMeter will run the voltage sweep and measure current at each sweep point After the sweep is complete the SourceMeter sends a trigger to the Model 622x to output the next base current This back and forth triggering between the two instruments will con tinue until all the collector l V curves at the different base current levels are acquired Return to Appendix topics E 6 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure E 4 BJT characterization test system 24xx i SourceMeter 622x l Source Figure E 5 shows an example of l V curves acquired for four base current levels Vc is the measured collector current and Vcg is the voltage at each sweep point Details on Sweep are provided in Section 4 and details on Triggering are pro vided in Section 8 The same information for the Model 24xx SourceMeter is provided in the Model 2400 Series User s Manual which i
281. fore making connections Figure 5 3 page 5 7 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 DUT test connections Configure communications for the Models 2182 2182A and 622x as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 On the Model 2182 21824 select the desired measurement range using the RANGE keys and the integration rate using the RATE key Rate must be set to an integer value 1 2 3 up to 50 or 60 If some other rate is selected it will automatically be changed to 1PLC by the Model 622x during the arming process On the Model 622x press CONFIG and then COND to access the DIFF CONDUCTANCE menu See Configuration settings on page 5 55 for details on these settings a Setthe START STOP STEP DELTA DELAY and compliance abort CMPL ABORT parameters b When finished use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Set the measurement units The basic Differential Conductance reading is in volts which is the default setting However it can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Siemens reading See Measurement units on page 5 16 for details To set the measurement units press the UNITS key to display the READING UNITS menu Select VOLTS OHMS WATTS or SIEMENS Measurement units can be changed while Differential Conductance is running On the Model 622x press the COND key to arm Differential Conductance Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 56 The
282. g example Assuming the Models 622x and 2182A are configured to perform Delta measurements as explained in Section 5 the following com mand sequence will arm Delta and start Delta measurements After all Delta mea surements are completed an ASCII 1 will be placed in the output queue SOUR DELTa ARM Arms Delta INIT I MM Starts Delta measurements OPC Sends OPC Return to Section 12 topics 12 4 Common Commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual C SAV lt NRf gt save Save present setup in memory RCL lt NRf gt recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters 0 Memory location 0 1 Memory location 1 2 Memory location 2 3 Memory location 3 4 Memory location 4 Use the SAV command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command The RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Three setup configurations can be saved and recalled The Model 622x ships from the factory with SYSTem PRESet defaults loaded into the available setup memory If a recall error occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values Programming example SAV 2 Saves present setup in memory location 2 RST Sets 622x to RST defaults RCL 2 Returns recalls 622x to setup stored in memory location 2 D RST reset Return Model 622x to RST defaults When the RST command i
283. g sequence for the first Differential Conductance cycle is shown in Figure 5 15 and is explained as follows Model 622x When Differential Conductance is started from the Model 622x it outputs the first stepped delta current level After the Differential Conductance Delay expires an output trigger pulse is sent to the Model 2182 2182A to start its operations Model 2182 2182A After its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs a measurement conversion A D Rdg 1 An output trig ger pulse is then sent back to the Model 622x Model 622x The Model 622x outputs the next stepped delta current level After the Differential Conductance Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182 21824 The Differential Conductance Delay is used to allow the current source to settle after a level change Model 2182 2182A After its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs another measurement conversion A D Rdg 2 An output trigger pulse is then sent back to the Model 622x Model 622x The Model 622x outputs the third stepped delta current level After the Differential Conductance Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182 21824 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 59 Model 2182 2182A After its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs another measurement conversion A D Rdg 3 The dif
284. g supplied triax cable E NE EEE 2 Frequency Variable 2 Resistor FVR See Chassis Figure 2 1 Chassis Figure 2 5 Output configurations triax inner shield connected to Cable Guard A Triax Output Low setting Earth Ground B Triax Output Low setting Floating 62 i Output High Output High OUTPUT rea rea Cable Guard Cable Guard black black 1 Output Low j Output Low Earth Ground T FvR2 FVR green Earth Earth Ground Ground 7 Boot color for alligator Earth Ground clip if using supplied 1 i Weg cable EAE SEE CAE o E 2 Frequency Variable POE eee E E E E Resistor FVR See Chassis Figure 2 1 Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 7 Triax inner shield The inner shield of the triax connector can be connected to Output Low to be compatible with the Keithley Model 220 Current Source or to Cable Guard Output Low is the default connection The current source OUTPUT must be OFF in order to change the inner shield set ting Perform the following steps to check or change the inner shield connection 1 If the current source output is on press the OUTPUT key to turn it OFF OFF message is displayed 2 Onthe Model 622x press the TRIAX key to display the CONFIGURE TRIAX menu 3 Using the cursor controls place the bli
285. ge 0 30 3 4 Power On Setup Conditions 5 Message Exchange Options a Input buffer size b Queries that return more than one response message unit c Queries that generate a response when parsed d Queries that generate a response when read Coupled commands 6 Functional elements required for SCPI com mands 7 Buffer size limitations for block data Syntax restrictions 9 Response syntax for every query command 0 Device to device message transfer that does not follow rules of the standard 11 Block data response size 12 Common Commands implemented by 622x Behavior of 622x when valid address is entered See Appendix C Cannot enter an invalid address Address changes and bus resets Determine by SYST POS Section 14 2048 bytes None All queries Common Commands and SCPI None See Table D 2 Contained in SCPI command subsystems tables see Section 14 Block display message buffer size is 40 characters max top line display is 20 characters bottom line is 32 characters See Programming Syntax in Section 10 See Programming Syntax in Section 10 None See Display Subsystem in Section 13 See Common Commands in Section 12 Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information D 3 Table D 1 cont IEEE 488 documentation requirements Requirements Descripti
286. ge available MAV bit in the status byte register sets A data message is cleared from the output queue when it is read The output queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty output queue clears the MAV bit in the status byte register A message is read from the output queue by addressing the Model 622x to talk after the appropriate query is sent Error queue The error queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the error queue When a message is placed in the error queue the error available EAV bit in the status byte register is set An error status message is cleared from the error queue when it is read The error queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty error queue clears the EAV bit in the status byte register The error queue holds up to 10 error status messages The commands to read the error queue are listed in Table 11 7 When you read a single message in the error queue the oldest message is read and then removed from the queue If the queue becomes full the message 350 queue overflow will occupy the last memory location On power up the error queue is empty When empty the mes sage 0 No Error is placed in the queue Messages in the error queue are preceded by a code number Negative num bers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The
287. ge for the Model 622x is automatically set to the best fixed range when Differential Conductance is armed NOTE Jitter For Differential Conductance step to step timing may jitter as much as 1ms This jitter can be eliminated by disabling the front panel For details see Step to step timing jitter on page 1 18 Arming process After Differential Conductance is configured the test is armed by pressing the COND key or sending SOUR DCON ARM During the arming process the Model 622x establishes communications with the Model 2182 2182A and performs a series of operations Communications setup commands sweep table and repeating filter The Model 622x performs a communications test and sends setup commands to the Model 2182 2182A These operations are explained in Communications test and setup commands on page 5 12 The Model 622x builds a sweep table of source values to be used for the Differen tial Conductance test For details see Internal sweep table on page 5 12 For Differential Conductance only the repeating average filter can be used if enabled If the moving average filter is enabled the filter type will change to repeating when Differential Conductance is armed See Section 6 for details refer to the repeating average filter Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 57 Differential Conductance step size When u
288. ger Layer Controls Sweep Steps Sweep Parameters Determine Number of Steps TRIGger OUTPut E SOURce DELay NONE Defaults c Output Trigger 8 4 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Trigger model operation Idle and initiate While in the idle state the instrument cannot perform sweeps Once the Model 622x is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model to perform sweeps and sweep steps Front panel operation As shown in Figure 8 1 the Model 622x immediately leaves the idle state when triggered to do so Operation remains in the arm and trigger layers of the trigger model until the sweep is done Operation cycles through the arm layer once for each sweep and cycles through the trigger layer once per sweep step The Model 622x can be put into the idle state at any time by pressing EXIT To take the instrument out of idle press the TRIG key Remote operation As shown in Figure 8 2 an initiate command is required to take the instrument out of idle The following command performs an initiate operation INITiate Once taken out of idle operation cycles through the arm layer once for each sweep and cycles through the trigger layer once per sweep step While operating within the trigger model not in idle most commands will not be executed until the instrument completes all of its programmed operations and returns to the idle state The ABORt command can be sent to return the in
289. gering between the two instruments will continue until all nine calibration points are completed Details on Custom Sweep are provided in Section 4 and details on Triggering are provided in Section 8 Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Applications 3 Resistivity measurements Certain semiconductor materials such as silicon have high resistivities The mea surement of their resistivity can be a difficult measurement To aid in the measure ment special probes of a hard metal such as tungsten are used Because contact resistance is so high a four point probe is usually employed The outer two con tacts supply a constant current and the inner two contacts measure the voltage drop across a portion of the sample With the geometry of the probe and wafer known resistivity can then be calculated The current source used must be stable and accurate The Model 622x is ideal for this application The accurate and stable current along with compliance voltage can be easily programmed before making the voltage measurement The electrometer requires a high impedance to overcome lead resistance prob lems The Keithley Model 6514 Electrometer has the high input impedance gt 200TQ in parallel with 20pF required to make the measurement accurately A simple test system to measure resistivity is shown in Figure E 1 For most wafers the resistivity is calculated from P ktV Where k is a constant based o
290. gger behavior When this command is disabled OFF the waveform will restart immediately upon each sequential external hardware trigger If the waveform output has not yet run to completion a new hardware trigger will preempt the current waveform and restart the waveform immediately Alternatively the unit can be configured to ignore triggers while a waveform is in process If set this way ON the current waveform will be output to completion before the unit will look for another trigger This setting only applies if the external trigger mode is enabled For example assume the Model 6221 is configured to output a single cycle of a sine wave at 1Hz external triggering is enabled and external triggers spaced 500ms apart are input The first trigger will start the waveform genera tor output If the ignore mode is ON every other trigger will be ignored since it occurs while the waveform output is in progress This will produce a continu ous sine wave If the ignore mode is OFF every trigger will restart the wave form so that only the first 180 of the sine wave is output This will produce a continuous full wave positive rectified sine wave SOUR WAVE EXTR IVAL lt NRf gt Set inactive value When the external trigger mode is on the output remains enabled while the unit waits for an external trigger The inactive value controls the current output before and after triggered waveforms It can be set to any value between 1 00 and 1 00 T
291. gh 1 13 is technically allowed if STARt and STOP are 0 and 100 mA a STEP of 1e 13 will return an error 2 SOUR CURR CENT n Set center current SOUR CURR SPAN n Set span current These commands give an alternate method of setting sweep parameters Note that the CENTer value will be checked against the start and stop values resulting in errors if out of that range For those sweeps that are specified using the CENTer and SPAN commands the STARt point will be the lower point and the sweep will always run from low to high You can sweep from high value to low value only by using the STARt and STOP commands to set the higher value as the STARt point For example if the center current is 50mA and the span is 100mA the sweep will range from OmA to 100mA 3 SOUR DEL lt n gt Set source delay for sweep This command allows you to set a time delay to allow the source value to set tle This delay is used for all steps of linear and log sweeps but it does not apply for custom sweeps since they use individual values see Table 4 5 4 SOUR SWE ARM Prepare arm sweep to run After being armed the sweep will begin with the next appropriate trigger If the Differential Conductance or Delta Mode is presently armed this command will un arm that sequence and arm a sweep If either Differential Conductance or Delta is already running however Error 221 Settings Conflict is returned When a sweep is armed the two second message SWEE
292. gs The timestamp can be set for the absolute format or the delta format see Buffer timestamp on page 6 13 NOTE Data reading flow from the Model 2182 21824 to the buffer of the Model 622x is explained in Data flow on page 5 13 and illustrated in Figure 5 6 Return to Section 6 topics 6 12 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Buffer characteristics Buffer size The buffer size automatically sets to accommodate the number delta readings to be performed For example if the test is configured to perform 1 000 delta mea surements the buffer size will be set to 1000 If the delta test is configured to perform an infinite number of delta measurements the buffer will be set to maximum size 65 536 readings After the 65 536th read ing the delta test continues but readings stop being stored The buffer size can be changed using remote programming Buffer commands are documented in Table 6 4 The following command demonstrates proper syn tax to set buffer size Example Configure buffer to store 500 delta readings TRACe POINts 500 Set buffer size to 500 Buffer data elements Data elements are stored along with each delta reading The data elements for front panel operation are shown in Figure 6 3 These include reading number timestamp reading units and the current source output value For remote programming the returned reading string for a buffer read command inclu
293. gs Pulse Delta settings from the front panel are described as follows These parame ters are set from the CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu that is accessed by pressing the CONFIG key and then the PULSE key The equivalent remote programming commands to configure Pulse Delta are summarized in Table 5 4 Return to Section 5 topics 5 40 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Fixed output settings These following parameters are set from the CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu that is accessed by pressing the CONFIG key and then the PULSE key and I Lo These settings specify the high and low level of the pulses Each high pulse returns to the programmed low pulse level Both I Hi and I Lo can be set from 105mA to 105mA The default setting for I Hi is 1mA and the default for I Lo is Width and source delay The pulse width specifies the time period that the output remains at the high and low pulse levels Pulse width can be set from 50us to 12ms The default setting for pulse width is 110ps The source delay is used to allow the pulse to settle before triggering the Model 2182A to perform a measurement conversion A D Source delay can be set from 16us default setting to 11 966ms Pulse width and source delay are shown in Figure 5 12 Note that the set pulse width and source delay determines the integration rate measure speed of the Model 2182A Integration rate is automatically set when
294. guarded con nections with the use of a safety shield Return to Section 2 topics 2 18 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 2 14 Cable Guard connections triax inner shield connected to Cable Guard Triax Cable black Output Low connected t th d Miu Earth Ground Boot color for alligator clip if green using supplied triax cable Using shielding and guarding together Figure 2 15 shows connections for a test system that uses a noise shield a safety shield and guarding Figure 2 15 Connections for noise shield safety shield and guarding Triax Cable dou t eee D CC CIT Metal Noise Shield Metal Safety Shield Chassis Ground Screw Earth Ground Earth Boot color for alligator clip if i lied tri le Triax inner shield connected to Cable Guard using supplica Output Low connected to earth ground Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 19 Banana Jack Guard connections When using a low impedance voltmeter to measure voltage it may be necessary to make the measurement at banana jack Guard see Figure 2 16 Keep in mind that banana jack Guard should only be used if voltmeter measurements at the DUT will result in significant loading errors Details on Banana Jack Guard are provided on page 2 12 Figure 2 16 Banana Jack Guard connections Banana Plug Cable Low I
295. hat are used for both data and with most commands Five bus management lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typical setup for controlled operation is shown in Figure C 1 Generally a sys tem will contain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators con troller talker and listener The controller controls the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instru ment any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener There are two categories of controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control from one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although several devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen command These talk and listen commands are de
296. hat is accessed by pressing the CONFIG key and then the DELTA key The equivalent remote programming commands to configure Delta are summa rized in Table 5 3 I High and I Low These settings specify the high and low level for the square wave output When setting the I High level the I Low level is set to the same mag nitude but negative polarity For example setting l High to 1mA sets l Low to 1mA Setting the I Low level has no affect on I High I High can be set from 0 to 105mA and l Low can be set from 0 to 105mA The default settings for high and low are 1mA and 1mA Delay The Delta delay occurs after a trigger from the Model 2182 21824 is received see Figure 5 8 and is typically used to allow the current source to set tle after changing polarity Delay can be set from 0 001 to 9999 999s The default delay is 2ms Count Delta count specifies the number of Delta readings to perform Delta count can be set to a finite number 1 to 65 536 or Infinity can be selected With an infinite count selected the Delta runs continuously The default count setting is Infinity The separate sweep count parameter can also be specified to control the number of measurement sets each composed of delta count readings that are repeated under trigger model control see Figure 8 2 Each set is run independently by restarting the delta mode s advanced moving average algorithm Compliance Abort By enabling YES Compliance Abort Del
297. hat the Chassis should never be used as a ground point for signal connections High frequencies present on the chassis of the Model 622x may result in higher noise on the output The Chassis should only be used as a safety shield Use the Chassis Screw for connections to the chassis of the Model 622x LO and GUARD banana jacks The LO and GUARD banana jacks are located on the rear panel and are shown in Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 LO and GUARD banana jacks LO GUARD 105Vpk LO banana jack The LO banana jack is electrically identical to the Output Low accessed at the triax connector However when using the CABLE GUARD and FLOATING triax settings Output Low is not available at the triax connector The LO banana jack must be used as Output Low see Output configurations on page 2 5 for details on the triax connector settings Return to Section 2 topics 2 4 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual GUARD banana jack The GUARD available at the banana jack is different from CABLE GUARD that can be accessed at the triax cable See Guards on page 2 8 for details on these two guards INTERLOCK The Model 622x is equipped with an INTERLOCK that is to be connected to an interlock switch see Figure 2 3 When the interlock switch is open the OUTPUT of the Model 622x is disabled and cannot be turned on If the OUTPUT is already on opening the Interlock switch will turn the OUTPUT off When the interlock swit
298. he back of this manual to provide the repair facility with the necessary information Contact information Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual If you have any questions please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Application Engineers at 888 Keithley 534 8453 or 800 552 1115 U S and Canada only You can also contact Applications Engineering online at www keithley com Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual fa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recom mended in the user documentation The symbol instrument indicates that the user should refer to the oper ating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The 2 symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Return to Section 1 topics 1 4 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Unpacking and ins
299. he data lines the source checks to see that NRFD is high indicating that all active devices are ready At the same time NDAC should be low from the previous byte transfer If these conditions are not met the source must wait until NDAC and NRFD have the correct status If the source is a control ler NRFD and NDAC must be stable for at least 100ns after ATN is set true Because of the possibility of a bus hang up many controllers have time out rou tines that display messages in case the transfer sequence stops for any reason Once all NDAC and NRFD are properly set the source sets DAV low indicating to accepting devices that the byte on the data lines is now valid NRFD will then go low and NDAC will go high once all devices have accepted the data Each device will release NDAC at its own rate but NDAC will not be released to go high until all devices have accepted the data byte The previous sequence is used to transfer both data talk and listen addresses as well as multiline commands The state of the ATN line determines whether the data bus contains data addresses or commands as described in the following paragraphs Figure C 2 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DATA X x SOURCE DAV SOURCE VALID a ALL READY ACCEPTOR NRED ALL ACCEPTED NDAC ACCEPTOR Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface The following paragraphs briefly describe the purpose
300. he value is interpreted the same as data values used to specify arbitrary waveform definitions where 1 represents the maximum neg ative current flow and 1 represents the maximum positive current Any value in between is linearly mapped between these two extremes to one of 65 536 discrete levels Return to Section 7 topics E Triggering Section 8 topics Trigger models page 8 2 Front panel trigger model page 8 2 Trigger model operation page 8 3 Trigger model operation page 8 4 Front panel trigger operation page 8 7 Using the trigger configuration menu page 8 7 Configuring triggering page 8 8 Remote trigger operation page 8 9 Programming triggering page 8 9 SCPI commands triggering page 8 10 External triggering page 8 13 External trigger connector page 8 13 Input trigger requirements page 8 13 Output trigger specifications page 8 14 External trigger example page 8 15 8 2 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Trigger models The trigger models control when to switch to the next point in a sweep and how many sweeps to perform see Section 4 for details on sweeps Note that the trig ger configuration does not affect other Model 622x operation including normal out put currents and Model 6221 wave functions Front panel trigger model The front panel trigger model is shown in Figure 8 1 Figure 8 1 Trigger model for front panel operation Trigger 622x O Press EXITO Idle
301. hock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury If this product is to be used by an operator a qualified person must ensure the operator is protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Basic connections Basic connections can be used for low voltage not greater than 30Vrms 42V peak testing where guarding and or noise shielding are not required Basic con nections to a DUT are shown in Figure 2 11 Use the connections shown in Figure 2 11A if the inner shield of the triax connector is connected to Output Low Use the connections shown in Figure 2 11B if the inner shield is connected to Cable Guard Return to Section 2 topics 2 16 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 2 11 Basic connections to DUT A Inner shield connected to Output Low B Inner shield connected to Cable Guard black Earth Ground Boot color for alligator clip if green using supplied triax cable Shields and guarding Noise shield connections Figure 2 12 shows typical noise shielding for the two triax connector configurations A noise shield is used to prevent unwanted signals from being induced into the test circuit A test current below 14A may benefit from effective shielding Typically the metal noise shield surrounds the DUT and is connected to Output Low Safety shield connections A safety shield must be used whenever hazardous voltages gt 30Vr
302. hown in Figure 10 7 expands the network system and provides improved performance because there is no corporate LAN data traffic on the instrument LAN It also provides additional security between two groups of users Finally Figure 10 8 shows a simplified diagram of a network sys tem using a router or servers Figure 10 7 Isolated LAN system using two NICs Network Interface Cards PC with two NICs installed RJ 45 Outlet To other Ethernet resources Increased security 1 Ethernet Cables 4 RJ 45 male male _ Up to 100 meters Keithley 6221 Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 31 Figure 10 8 shows a simplified diagram of a network system using a router or servers Figure 10 8 Enterprise wide or internet network system PC with NIC installed Enterprise wide or Internet Router or Servers RJ 45 RJ 45 Outlet Outlet 5 Cables RJ 45 male male wu Keithley 6221 lt Unlimited length NENNEN gt Ethernet connections The Model 6221 is connected to the Ethernet using a male to male RJ 45 Ether net cable see Figure 10 9 The Ethernet connector for the Model 6221 is shown in Figure 10 10 With power off connect one end of the cable to the Model 6221 and connect the other end to the Ethernet connector of the PC hub or receptacle Figure 10 9 RJ 45 Ethernet cable male male E
303. ifferent interface and RS 232 Pulse Delta or Differential Conduc then arm Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance Return to Section 5 topics 5 20 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Part 2 Delta Basic measurement process Delta voltage measurements use a current reversal technique to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs in the voltmeter test lead connections The simplest algorithm for a delta measurement uses the following 2 point source measure process 1 Source a positive current through the DUT and measure the voltage V1 2 Source a negative current through the DUT and measure the voltage V2 3 Calculate the delta reading as follows delta V1 V2 2 Each voltage measurement will include the thermal EMF When the two measurements V1 and V2 are averaged the thermal EMF will effectively be cancelled out of the delta reading For example assume the DUT is exactly 0 10 and the test current is 1mA Ideally the voltage across the DUT would measure exactly 100uV However assume that the voltage measurement test circuit has 10uV of EMF For a positive test current the voltage measurement will be 110uV 100 10uV For a negative test current the voltage measurement will be 90u V 100uV 10pV When using the fundamental delta process the two voltage readings V1 and V2 are averaged to cancel the 10uV of EMF delta V1 V2 2 11
304. igh for 0 25ms then duty cycle is 25 Mathematically duty cycle is expressed as follows Duty Cycle in 96 Pulse Width Pulse Interval x 100 Where Pulse Width 2 Time that the pulse is high Pulse Interval Time period of the Pulse Delta cycle Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 35 Average power is then calculated as follows W average power 1 x V x Duty Cycle Example Assume the following for Pulse Delta Pulse Delta voltage is 5V Pulse high I High current is 1mA Pulse low I Low current is 0mA Duty cycle is 25 With Watts as the selected measurement units the Peak power reading is calcu lated as follows W peak power I x V 5V 5mW Average power is calculated as follows W Average power 1 x V x Duty Cycle 1mAx x 0 25 1 25mW Pulse Delta power calculation restriction The algorithm for the Pulse Delta power calculation requires that the low pulse level I Low be very near zero If the low pulse is more than 6 counts at 3 1 2 digit resolution away from zero the validity of the power reading will be in question For example on the 2mA source range the set low pulse I Low level must be OnA 600nA The Model 6221 will report the questionable power reading but will not generate any front panel error messages However bit B4 Power Questionable of the Questionable Event Status Register
305. igital multimeter DMM to the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 16 3 Also connect the short ing connector to the INTERLOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections 2 Turn on the Model 6220 6221 and DMM and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding Set the DMM to the DC volts function and enable auto range 3 Setthe Model 6220 6221 current output to 10mA and the compliance to 10 000V and turn on the output See Section 3 for details on setting the output current compliance and range Verify that the DMM reading is within the following range 9 97 to 10 03V Set the Model 6220 6221 compliance to 100 00V Verify that the DMM reading is within the following range 99 8 to 100 2V Repeat steps 3 through 6 for a current output of 10mA DMM readings will be negative but they should be within the same range of magnitude as in steps 4 and 6 8 After testing first turn off the output then disconnect the test equipment Figure 16 3 Connections for compliance accuracy Digital Multimeter Measure DC Voltage High 6220 6221 9 High Input Output N Low Return to Section 16 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Performance Verification 16 9 Waveform function accuracy The following tests apply only to the Model 6221 Amplitude flatness NOTE Digital Multimeter DMM input impedance varia tions may affect the accuracy of amplitude flat ness
306. imal 26 Hexadecimal 1A Octal 32 Note that Figure 11 2 includes the decimal weight for each register bit To set bits B4 B3 and B1 the decimal parameter value would be the sum of the decimal weights for those bits 16 8 2 26 Figure 11 2 16 bit status register A Bits 0 through 7 Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Binary Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Decimal Weights 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 2 29 2 2 2 2 2 2 Bits 8 through 15 Bit Position B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 Binary Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Decimal Weights 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 215 214 213 21 217 219 29 2 The lt NDN gt non decimal numeric parameter type is used to send non decimal values These values require a header B H or Q to identify the data format being sent The letter in the header can be upper or lower case The lt NRf gt Return to Section 11 topics 11 6 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual numeric representation format parameter type is used to send decimal values and does not use a header The following examples show the proper parameter syntax for setting bits B5 B3 and B2 6101100 Binary format lt NDN gt parameter type h2C Hexadecimal format lt gt parameter type q54 Octal format lt NDN gt parameter type 44 Decimal format lt NRf gt paramet
307. imal representation of a sin gle byte with a value of 0 to 255 Note that the IP address parameter must be enclosed in quotes Example SYST COMM ETH ADDR 145 90 120 240 SYST COMM ETH MASK lt string gt Set subnet mask This command sets the subnet mask of the Model 6221 The mask parameter is of the form n n n n where each n is a decimal representation of a single byte with a value of 0 to 255 Note that the mask parameter must be enclosed in quotes Example SYST COMM ETH MASK 255 255 255 0 Return to Section 10 topics 10 10 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SYST COMM ETH GAT string Set Ethernet gateway This command sets the Ethernet gateway of the Model 6221 The gateway parameter is of the form n n n n where each n is a decimal representation of a single byte with a value of 0 to 255 Note that the parameter must be enclosed in quotes Example SYST COMM ETH GAT 145 90 120 1 SYST COMM ETH DHCP lt b gt Enable disable DHCP This command enables ON or disables OFF DHCP Dynamic Host Control Protocol When DHCP is enabled and used on a network with a DHCP server the Model 6221 IP address subnet mask and Ethernet gateway will be automatically assigned by the server SYST COMM ETH MAC Query MAC address This query requests the MAC address from the unit The returned value is in the form of hexadecimal values separat
308. in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 4 side by side rack mount kit Mounts Model 622x and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 196 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775A 6512 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 padded carrying case A carrying case for Model 622x Includes handles and shoulder strap Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 7 User s manual A printed copy of the User s Manual is a supplied item for the Model 622x It is also provided on the product information CD ROM as a PDF This manual pro vides the fundamental operating information for the instrument Reference manual This Reference Manual is provided on the Product Information CD ROM as a PDF This manual provides additional information on the topics covered in the User s Manual It also includes advanced operation topics and maintenance information Additional references Low Level Measurements handbook Keithley s guide for effective low current low voltage and high impedance measurements Refer to www keithley com for more details Front and rear panel familiarization Front panel summaries The front panels of the Models 6220 and 6221 are shown in Figure 1 1 The descriptions of the front panel controls follow Figure 1 1 NOTE Many of the keys that are used to select a function or operation are also used for configuration by first pressing the CON
309. ing See Measurement units on page 5 16 for details To set the measurement units press the UNITS key to display the READING UNITS menu Select VOLTS OHMS WATTS or SIEMENS Measurement units can be changed while Delta is running 6 Onthe Model 622x press the DELTA key to arm Delta Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 24 The Model 6221 is armed when the message DELTA ARMED Press TRIG to start is displayed briefly and the ARM annunciator turns on 7 Onthe Model 622x press the TRIG key to start taking Delta readings and send them to the buffer Return to Section 5 topics 5 28 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual If a finite Delta count is being used the Delta measurements will stop after the last Delta measurement is performed However Delta remains armed and can be run again by pressing the TRIG key The new Delta readings will overwrite the old readings in the buffer If the infinite Delta count is being used Delta will run continuously If the buffer fills Delta readings will stop being stored even though Delta continues to run 8 When finished press EXIT to disarm Delta 9 On the Model 622x press RECALL to access the Delta readings stored in the buffer Operation PC control The system configuration for PC control of the Model 622x is shown in Figure 5 2B 1 Connections are shown in the following figures All power must be removed from all co
310. ing a custom sweep 4 13 Remote sweep operatiOD 222222 4 14 Running a linear staircase sweep sse enne 4 15 Running a log staircase sweep sss nee enne 4 16 Running a custom sweep enne enne nennen innen nnne 4 17 SCPI commands sweeps esses 4 18 Coupled sweep commands esses nennen nennen 4 22 Sweep status model events 2 4 23 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Part M 5 2 M S 5 2 DP ECH OMAOVEL VIE M ER 5 2 Op ration OVeEVIeW iet eene ORO E He ei 5 2 TeSt SYSTEMS M T 5 4 Keithley instrumentation requirements 5 4 System configurations 5 4 System connectiODS a ERRARE 5 6 DUT test ConneCtlOhSs 5 8 Configuring communications 2 5 10 AMINE ProCESS eU 5 11 5 13 Data flow and read commands esses eene neret 5 13 Data TOW Eee 5 13 Read commands esie
311. ing filter setup and control are listed in Table 6 2 A pro gramming example follows the table Table 6 2 Averaging filter commands Command Description Default SENSe SENSe 1 AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window as 96 of range 0 00 SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt Specify filter count size 10 AVERage STATe lt b gt lt name gt MOVing or REPeat lt NRf gt 0 to 10 0 selects no window lt NRf gt 2 to 300 Enable or disable averaging filter OFF Programming example Repeating average filter This command sequence configures and enables the repeating filter for Differential Conductance SENS AVER TCON REP Select the repeating average filter SENS AVER WIND 1 Set filter window to 1 SENS AVER COUN 20 Set filter count to 20 SENS AVER ON Enable the repeating average filter Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 9 Math mX b and m X b reciprocal These math functions affect the results of the Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance operations Details on the delta operations are covered in Section 5 mX b and m X b manipulate delta readings X from the model mathematically according to the following calculations Y mX b Y m X b Where X is the normal delta reading m and b are user entered constants for scale factor and offset Y is the displayed result NOTE
312. inner shield is connected to Output Low the metal plate serves as a noise shield When triax inner shield is connected to Cable Guard the metal plate servers a guard plate Terminals and internal wiring DUT and test circuits are to be mounted on the guard plate using insulated termi nals To minimize leakage select terminals that use Teflon insulators Inside the test fixture use insulated wires for connections to DUT Use silver sol der for all connections Silver solder minimizes thermal EMFs Handling and cleaning test fixtures Dust body oil solder flux and other contaminants on connector and terminal insulators can significantly decrease the insulation resistance resulting in exces sive leakage currents Contaminants on DUT and test circuit components can cre ate a leakage path The leakage currents may be large enough to corrupt low level measurements Handling tips Do not touch the bodies of DUT or test circuit components If you cannot handle them by their leads use clean cotton gloves to install them in the test fixture Do not touch any connector or terminal insulator e If installing a test circuit that is on a PC board handle the board by the edges Do not touch any board traces or components Cleaning tips Use dry nitrogen gas to clean dust off connector and terminal insulators DUT and other test circuit components f you have just built the test fixture remove any solder flux using methanol al
313. ion for the arm layer is immediately satisfied after the instrument leaves the idle state Detection for each subsequent pass is satisfied when the programmed timer interval elapses The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes back into idle MANUAL ARM SOURce MANual Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied by pressing the TRIG key The Model 622x must be in the local mode for it to respond to the TRIG key Press LOCAL to place the Model 622x in local TLINK ARM SOURce TLINk Event detection for the arm layer is satis fied when an input trigger via the TRIGGER LINK connector is received by the Model 622x Note that if the source bypass is set to ONCE ARM DIRection SOURce operation will initially loop around the source detector after the instrument leaves the idle state Detection for each sub sequent pass is satisfied by an input trigger The bypass resets when the instrument goes into idle USTEST ARM SOURce NSTest Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied when a negative going pulse via the SOT line of the Digital I O is received See Digital I O port on page 9 5 fISTEST ARM SOURce PSTest Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied when a positive going pulse via the SOT line of the Digital I O is received See Digital I O port on page 9 5 UNSTEST ARM SOURce BSTest Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied when either a positive going or a negative goi
314. ion on test fixtures and boxes Model 7078 TRX GND This is a 3 slot male triax to BNC adapter GPIB cables and adapter connects Model 622x to the GPIB bus Model 7006 1 and Model 7006 2 Single shielded GPIB cables Terminated with one straight connector non stacking and one feed through style con nector Model 7006 1 is 1m long Model 7006 2 is 2m long A Model 7006 cable is recommended when using the Model 622x with the Model 2182 21824 for delta testing Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Con ductance Connecting the straight connector of the cable to the Model 622x makes it easier to also connect the required null modem serial cable to the RS 232 connector The null modem serial cable is a supplied item Models 7007 05 7007 1 7007 2 and 7007 4 Double shielded premium GPIB cables Each end is terminated with a feed through metal housing for longest life and best performance Model 7007 05 is 0 5m long 7007 1 is 1m long Model 7007 2 is 2m long Model 7007 4 is 4m long Return to Section 1 topics 1 6 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Models 7008 3 7008 6 and 7008 13 Single shielded standard GPIB cables Each end is terminated with a feed through molded plastic housing Model 7008 3 is 0 9m long 7008 6 is 1 8m long Model 7008 13 is 4m long Model 7010 Shielded IEEE to IEEE Adapter Provides additional clearance between the rear panel and GPIB cable connector Allows easier access to cables
315. is off Response speed is set as follows a Pressthe CONFIG key and then the OUTPUT key to display the output response menu NOTE If the output was on when attempting to access the output response menu the output will turn off Re peat Step above to access the output response menu b Using the controls for Menu navigation on page 1 20 select the FAST or SLOW 6220 STYLE response speed For remote programming the commands to set output response are documented in Table 3 2 The following example demonstrates proper syntax Example Enables the analog filter and for the Model 6221 sets the output response to fast CURRent FILTer ON Enables the analog filter OUTPut RESPonse FAST Sets the output response of the 6221 to FAST Return to Section 3 topics 3 16 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 4 Turn on the output NOTE In order to turn on the output an interlock switch must be connected to the INTERLOCK connector on the rear panel of the Model 622x Closing the in terlock switch will enable the OUTPUT allowing it to be turned on For details see INTERLOCK on page 2 4 The OUTPUT key toggles the output state on or off When the output is turned on the OUTPUT indicator light turns on For remote programming the command to control the output is documented in Table 3 2 The following example demonstrates proper syntax Example Turns the output
316. ist of consecutive buffer readings to return For this command the start and count are specified The first reading in the buffer is Rdg 0 Example to return the first 10 buffer readings TRACe DATA SELected 0 10 Returns Rdg 0 through Rdg 9 The CALC2 DATA command is used to read the selected buffer statistic mean standard deviation maximum minimum or peak to peak See Section 6 for details on the buffer Measurement units Volts ohms power or conductance The readings from the Model 2182 2182A for Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance are sent to the Model 622x as voltage readings These readings can be displayed by the Model 622x as Volts V Ohms Q power Watts W or conductance Siemens S readings The default units for the Model 622x is volts With Ohms Q units or Siemens S units selected a reading is calculated as follows VII S I V Where V is the Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance voltage reading is the current sourced by the Model 622x With Power units selected power is calculated as follows Delta Pulse Delta Differential Conductance 2 We IxV Wpgak 21x V W lava X Vave Wave x V x Duty Cycle 1 See page 5 34 for details on Peak power and average power for Pulse Delta 2 See page 5 54 for details on Average Voltage and Power for Differential Conductance Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference M
317. it for guard cal steps while the STEP commands use a DMM reading taken during the calibration procedure See the complete proce dure in Step 4 Calibrate guard circuit on page 17 19 Table 17 8 page 17 23 summarizes allowed ranges for each parameter 9 CAL PROT WAVE STEP1 Calibrate 6221 waveform generator This command calibrates the Model 6221 waveform generator This is an internal self calibration and requires no user inputs or external DMM readings This step should be run immediately after the SOURce calibration of the cur rent ranges Return to Section 17 topics 17 22 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 17 6 CAL PROT SOUR command parameter ranges First parameter Second parameter Third parameter Source range FS 0 FS 2nA 1 8 9 to 2 2e 9 2e 11 to 2e 11 1 8 9 to 2 2 9 20 18 9 to 22 9 2 10 to 2e 10 18e 9 to 22e 9 200nA 180e 9 to 220e 9 2e 9 to 2e 9 180 9 to 220e 9 2uA 1 8e 6 to 2 2e 6 2e 8 to 2e 8 1 8 6 to 2 2 6 20 18 6 to 22 6 2e 7 2 7 18 6 to 22e 6 200 180e 6 to 220e 6 2e 6 to 2e 6 180e 6 to 220e 6 2mA 1 8e 3 to 2 2e 3 2e 5 to 2e 5 1 8e 3 to 2 2e 3 20mA 18e 3 to 22e 3 2e 4 to 2 4 18e 3 to 22e 3 100mA 90e 3 to 110e 3 1e 3 to 1e 3 90e 3 to 110e 3 NOTE Parameter steps for each range may be performed in any order but all three parameter steps for
318. ituations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintenance information carefully before using the product Refer to the user documentation for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the product warranty may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equipment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the user documentation The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits perform safe installations and repair products On
319. key Value Adjust Method a Usethe Cursor Keys to place the blinking cursor on the digit to be edited b Turn the Rotary Knob clockwise to increment the value or counter clockwise to decrement Numeric Entry Method a Usethe Cursor Keys to place the blinking cursor on the digit to be edited b Keyin a digit by pressing a number key 0 9 The cursor moves to the next digit Edit each digit as needed Return to Section 3 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DC Current Source Operation 3 13 Autorange Front panel operation The AUTO range key is a single action control to select the best fixed range for the displayed source value After setting a source value pressing AUTO will ensure that the best fixed range is selected For example assume the source is set to 1mA on the 20mA range 01 000mA displayed When the AUTO key is pressed the range will change to the 2mA range which is the best range Autorange is only asserted enabled for the instant that the AUTO key is pressed Therefore the AUTO annunciator does not turn on If already on the best range pressing AUTO will have no action Remote operation For remote operation autorange remains active when it is enabled When the source value is changed the range will if needed automatically change to the best range for that value With auto range enabled the AUTO annunciator turns on to indicate that autorange is active For example assume autorange
320. kmark Y indicates that the command and its parame ters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is a SCPI command but does not conform to the SCPI standard set of commands It is not a recognized command by the SCPI consortium SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parame ters are explained by notes Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 3 Table 14 1 Calculate command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI CALCulate 1 CALC1 commands math calculations 6 FORMat lt name gt Select math format NONE MXB mX b or MXB RECiprocal m X b FORMat Query math format KMATRh Configure math calculations MMFactor lt NRf gt Set m for mX b and m X b calculation 1 0 9 99999e20 to 9 99999e20 MMFactor Query factor MAd Factor lt NRf gt Set m for mX b and m X b calculation 1 0 same as MMFactor MA1Factor Query factor MBFactor lt NRf gt Set b for mX b and m X b calculation 0 0 9 99999e20 to 9 99999e20 MBFactor Query b factor MAOFactor lt NRf gt Set b for mX b and m X b calculation 0 0 same as MMFactor MAOFactor Query factor STATe lt b gt Enable or disable CALC1 calculation OFF STATe Query state of CALC1 calculation DATA Read calculation LATest Return latest CALC1 reading FRESh Same as CALC1 DATA except reading only be returned once C
321. l for INTERLOCK INTERLOCK Maximum 1090 external circuit impedance POWER SUPPLY 100V to 240V rms 50 60Hz POWER CONSUMPTION 120VA WARRANTY 1 Year ENVIRONMENT For Indoor Use Only Maximum 2000m above Sea Level Operating 0 50 70 R H up to 35 Derate 3 35 50 C Storage 25 C to 65 C guaranteed by design EMC Conforms to European Union Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61326 1 SAFETY Conforms to European Union Directive 73 23 EEC EN61010 1 VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Random WARMUP Passive Cooling No fan DIMENSIONS Rack Mounting 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 5 in x 8 375 in x 14 563 in Bench Configuration with handle and feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 125 in x 9 375 in x 14 563 in SHIPPING WEIGHT 4 75kg 10 Ibs ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Model 237 ALG 2 Triaxial Test Lead 6 6ft Trigger Link cable RS 232 Null Modem cable Interlock terminal block User s Manual CD Manual LabVIEW Drivers 1 hour to rated accuracies HW 1 17 05 RevB Page 2 of 2 DATE 6 11 04 CKD DATE APP sk DATE 6 11 04 Keithley Instruments Inc KEITH LEY Cleveland Ohio 44139 PART NUMBER SPEC 6221 BRUNING 40 21 62198 SBG LTR COMPANY CONFIDENTAL 6221 AC and DC Current Source HISTORY Ver 1 Draft RKN on 7 01 03 Ver 2 Update spec per Meeting with Audit BJP AD Ver 3 Update spec per measurement capability EB Ver 4
322. l if the Model 622x is in remote To return to the local state press the LOCAL key For remote programming commands to select source range and set source and compliance values are documented in Table 3 2 Programming examples are also provided in the procedure for Sourcing current on page 3 14 Source and compliance editing Figure 3 3 shows how to set source and compliance values for the Model 6220 Figure 3 4 shows the source and compliance editing controls for the Model 6221 The procedure to set source and compliance values for the Model 6221 follow Figure 3 4 Source compliance editing notes for both procedures are provided on page 3 11 Return to Section 3 topics 3 10 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 3 3 Source and compliance editing Model 6220 Step 1 Select DC output mode Step 2 Select source range Step 3 Enter editing mode 3 5 The edit mode will cancel Select next higher EDIT if an editing action is fixed range LOCAL not performed within six Select l source field seconds Select best or V compliance field To re enter the edit mode fixed range EDIT annunciator for the same field press turns on a Value Adjust Key or a Select next lower Cursor Key these keys fixed range are shown in Step 4 Step 4 Set source or compliance value 2 6 7 8 Value Adjust Method Value Adjust Keys Numeric Entry Keys a Us
323. l number serial number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete Set the operation complete bit in the standard B command event register after all pending commands have been executed Operation complete Places an ASCII 1 into the output queue when query all pending selected device operations have been completed Option query Returns model number of any installed options NRf Recall command Returns Model 622x to the user saved setup C RST Reset command Returns Model 622x to the RST default D conditions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup as the user saved setup SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable Programs the service request enable register Section 11 command SRE Service request enable Reads the service request enable register Section 11 query STB Status byte query Reads the status byte register Section 11 TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to Model 622x E TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns F the result WAI Wait to continue Wait until all previous commands are executed G command Note A B C D E F G references are on the following pages Return to Section 12 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Common Commands 12 3 A IDN identification query Reads identification code The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number a
324. le in that order Use the SOUR CURR com mand as shown to set the output current value for each step For the 2 and 20nA ranges use the picoammeter with connections shown in Figure 17 2 Substitute the picoammeter reading for the DMM reading in the command listings Be sure to turn the output off send OUTP OFF before changing connections then turn the output back on OUTP ON before completing calibration 4 For the Model 6221 only a Disconnect the DMM from the Model 6221 OUTPUT jack b Send this command to calibrate the waveform generator CAL PROT WAVE STEP1 Calibrate waveform generator Return to Section 17 topics 17 16 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 17 4 Remote current calibration summary Range Currents Commands 100mA OUTP ON SOUR CURR RANG 0 1 100mA SOUR CURR 0 1 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading OmA SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading 100mA SOUR CURR 0 1 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt 20mA SOUR CURR RANG 2e 2 20mA SOUR CURR 2e 2 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading OmA SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading 20mA SOUR CURR 2e 2 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading 2mA SOUR CURR RANG 2e 3 2mA SOUR CURR 2e 3 CAL PROT SOUR lt FS DMM Reading OmA SOUR CURR 0 CAL PROT SOUR 0 DMM Reading 2mA SOUR CURR 2e 3 CAL PROT SOUR FS DMM Reading gt 200uA SOUR CURR RANG 2e 4 200A SOUR CURR 2e 4 CAL PROT SOUR lt FS DMM Reading gt OA S
325. le lt b gt The lt b gt indicates that a Boolean type parameter is required Thus to enable the display you must send the command with the ON or 1 parame ter as follows DISPlay ENABle ON or 1 Return to Section 10 topics 10 14 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Query commands The query command requests the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the command Most commands have a query form ARM TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental command ARM TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value ARM TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value ARM TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case and any case combination Examples RST SYSTem PRESet system preset Long form and short form versions A SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command tables in this manual use the long form version However the short form version is indicated by upper case characters SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRE
326. le bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the status byte register The commands to program and read the event enable registers are listed in Table 11 6 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers on page 11 5 and Reading registers on page 11 6 NOTE The bits of any enable register can be reset to 0 by sending the 0 parameter value with the appropriate enable command i e STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 11 6 Status Structure 11 19 Common and SCPI commands event enable registers Command Description ESE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt ESE STATus OPERation ENABle NDN or lt NRf gt MEASurement ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt ENABIe QUEStionable ENABlIe lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program standard event enable register see Parameters below Read standard event enable register STATus subsystem Operation event enable register Program enable register see Parameters below Read enable register Measurement event enable register Program enable register see Parameters below Read enable register Questionable event enable register Program enable register see Parameters below Read measurement event enable register
327. le buffer Recall For front panel operation perform the following steps to view stored readings and buffer statistics 1 Press RECALL The reading stored in buffer location 0 will be displayed along with the current source value and the timestamp 2 Asshown in Figure 6 3 use the edit keys to navigate through the buffer to view stored readings NOTE For front panel operation compliance is not indicated for buffer readings For remote programming the compli ance state in or out for each reading is returned if the COMP compliance data element is enabled For details on data elements see FORMat subsystem on page 13 4 3 To view buffer statistics use the EDIT LOCAL key Each press of this key displays the next statistic After the last statistic is displayed Std Dev pressing EDIT LOCAL will display the stored readings 4 When finished press EXIT to return to the normal display NOTE The buffer can be cleared by pressing the CONFIG key and then the RECALL key With the CLEAR BUFFER message displayed select YES Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 15 Figure 6 3 Buffer recall A Front panel edit keys to display buffer readings Model 6220 Model 6221 A A RANGE a v RANGE or or RANGE RANGE V V PUSH TO ENTER Buffer Readings Reading 123 45678mV 00000 Reading Number Current Source Isrc 1 0000mA Time
328. le the display Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual lt name gt lt NRf gt lt NDN gt n Remote Operations 10 13 Name parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group name MXB RECiprocal CALCulate FORMat MXB Select Mx B calculation Numeric representation format A number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an exponent e g 2 3E6 SO0URce SWEep COUNt 10 Set sweep count to 10 Non decimal numeric A non decimal value that can be used to program status enable registers A unique header identifies the format B binary H hexadecimal and Q octal SRE B10001 Set bits BO and B4 of Service Request Enable Register Numeric value Can consist of an NRf number or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum or MAXi mum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the low est allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value ARM TIMer 0 1 Sets timer to 100 msec ARM TIMer DEFault Sets timer to 0 1 sec ARM TIMer MINimum Sets timer to Os ARM TIMer MAXimum Sets timer to 99999 99 sec Angle brackets lt gt Used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the program message DISPlay ENAB
329. lone 5 4 Timestamp 13 7 Triax cable 2 15 Cable Guard 2 9 Triax connector 2 2 Inner shield 2 7 Output low 2 7 Trigger Link 5 7 Trigger link adapter 1 6 Trigger link cables 1 6 Unaddress commands C 11 Uniline commands C 9 Units 13 7 Universal multiline commands C 9 Unpacking 1 4 User setups 1 24 1 25 Using common commands and SCPI commands the same message 10 17 Warranty information 1 3 Waveform triggering 7 10 Front panel control 7 11 Inactive value 7 12 Programming 7 26 Remote control 7 11 Retriggering behavior 7 12 Using 7 12 7 20 KEITHLEY Service Form Model No Serial No Date Name and Telephone No Company List all control settings describe problem and check boxes that apply to problem J Intermittent LJ Analog output follows display J Particular range or function bad specify IEEE failure LJ Obvious problem on power up Batteries and fuses are OK 1 Front panel operational All ranges or functions are bad 1 Checked all cables Display or output check one J Drifts Unable to zero J Unstable Will not read applied input J Overload J Calibration only Certificate of calibration required 1 Data required attach any additional sheets as necessary Show a block diagram of your measurement system including all instruments connected whether power is turned on or not Also describe signal source Where is the measurement being perform
330. low pulse can be disabled This does not change the overall timing of the pulse output Eliminating the sec ond low pulse measurement changes the basic calculation to the following Pulse Delta 2Y 2X 2 Where Y is the measurement at the high pulse X is the measurement at the first low pulse Pulse Delta calculation example 3 point measurement technique Assume you want to measure the voltage across a low power 10 DUT The Pulse Delta process will reduce DUT heating and eliminate the effects of thermal EMFs Assume the Model 6221 is configured to output 10mA and OmA pulses Due to to a 10uV thermal EMF in the test leads the following Model 2182A measurement conversions A Ds are made for the first Pulse Delta cycle A D A 0 01mV A D B 10 01mV A D C 0 01mV The first Pulse Delta reading using the 3 point measurement technique is calcu lated as follows 2B A C 0 84 9 cy _ 2 10 01 0 01 0 01 2 PulseDelta 20mV 2 10mV The above 3 point measurement technique effectively eliminated the 10uV ther mal EMF from the Pulse Delta reading 2 point measurement technique Assume for the above example that DUT heating causes the A D measurement at point C to be 1 01mV Using the 3 point measurement technique Pulse Delta by calculation would instead be 9 5mV This results in 5 measurement error due to heating Return to Section 5 topics 5 34 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Con
331. lse value amps 2 1e 3 lt NRf gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 PDELta LOW NRf Sets low pulse value amps E 0 lt NRf gt 105e 3 to 105e 3 SOURCe 1 PDELta WIDTh NRf Sets pulse width seconds 2 110 6 lt NRf gt 50e 6 to 12 3 SOURce 1 PDELta SDELay lt NRf gt Sets pulse delay seconds 23 16 6 lt NRf gt 16e 6 to 11 996e 3 SOURce 1 PDELta RANGing lt name gt Selects fixed pulse range 2 4 BEST lt name gt BEST or FlXed SOURce 1 SWEep RANGing lt name gt Selects pulse sweep range 24 BEST lt name gt AUTO BEST or FlXed SOURce 1 PDELta COUNt lt NRf gt Sets the number of Pulse Delta intervals to per INF form lt NRf gt 1 to 65536 finite count or INFinity count SOURce 1 PDELta INTerval NRf Sets cycle time for fixed pulse PLCs 5 lt NRf gt 5 999999 SOURCe 1 DELay NRf Sets cycle time for lin log sweep seconds 2 314 lt NRf gt 1 3 to 999999 999 SOURce 1 LIST DELay NRf Sets cycle time for custom sweep seconds 2 31 lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1e 3 to 999999 999 SOURce 1 PDELta SWEep STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Sweep output mode 2 OFF lt b gt ON or OFF SOURce 1 PDELta LMEasure lt NRf gt Set number of low measurements 2 2 NHf 1 or 2 SOURce 1 PDELta ARM Arms Pulse Delta SOURce 1 PDELta ARM Queries Pulse Delta arm 1 armed 0 not armed Return to Section 5 topics 5 50
332. lt b gt Enable or disable Sweep output mode OFF STATe Query state of Sweep output mode LMEasure lt NRf gt Set number of low measurement per cycle 1 or 2 2 LMEasure Query number of low measurements ARM Arm Pulse Delta ARM Query arm 1 Pulse Delta armed 0 not armed Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 6 cont Source command summary SCPI Reference Tables 14 11 Command Description Default Sec SCPI DCONductance Differential Conductance operation 5 NVPResent Query connection to 2182 2182A 1 yes 0 no NVZero Query V zero value acquired from 2182 21824 STARt lt NRf gt Set start value amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 10e 6 STARt Query start value STEP lt NRf gt Set step size amps 0 to 105e 3 1e 6 STEP Query step size STOP lt NRf gt Set stop value amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 10e 6 STOP Query stop value DELTa lt NRf gt Set delta value amps 0 to 105e 3 1e 6 DELTa Query delta value DELay lt NRf gt Set delay seconds 1e 3 to 9999 999 2e 3 DELay Query delay CABort lt b gt Enable to abort test on compliance ON or OFF OFF CABort Query compliance sweep abort state ARM Arm Differential Conductance ARM Query arm 1 armed 0 not armed WAVE Wave function operation 7 FUNCtion lt name gt Select wave function SINusoid SQUare RAMP SIN or ARBitraryX where X 0 to 4 F
333. lta PULSE Unarmed I Hi 1mA I Low OmA Width 0 110ms Count Infinite Ranging Best Src Del 0 016ms Interval 5 PLC Sweep No Low Meas 2 lows per pulse RANGE 100mA range fixed Return to Section 1 topics 1 27 1 28 Getting Started Table 1 1 cont Front panel default settings Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Setting PRESET and RST Default Sweep SWP Unarmed Type Stair Start OmA Stop 100 Step 10mA Delay 1s Sweep Count Finite 1 Source Ranging Best Compliance Abort No TRIAX Inner Shield Output Low 220 Style Output Low Floating Trigger TRIG Arm Layer Arm In event Immediate Arm Out menu Line 2 Events Trig Layer Exit Off TL Enter Off Trig Layer Immediate Trigger In Trigger Out Line 2 Events Source Off Delay Off UNITS Volts WAVE Unarmed Type Sine Offset OmA Phase Marker Off Duration Infinite Ranging Best Fixed External triggering Mode Off Trigger link line 0 Ignore mode Off Restart Inactive value 0 0 Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 29 SCPI programming SCPI programming information is integrated with front panel operation throughout this manual SCPI commands are listed in tables and additional information that pertains exclusively to remote operation is provided after each table NOTE Except for Section 14 most SCPI tables in this manual are abridged to some degree That is the
334. lta it can be disarmed by sending the following command SOUR SWE ABOR Stops Delta and places the Model 2182A in the local mode 8 Recall stored Delta readings Model 2182A Delta readings were sent to the buffer of the Model 622x Send the following read command to read the buffer TRACe DATA Read Delta readings stored in 622x buffer Setup commands Delta setup and arm commands Commands to set up and arm Delta are listed in Table 5 3 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 31 Table 5 3 Delta commands Command Description Default SOURce 1 DELTa NVPResent Queries connection to 2182A 1 1 yes 0 no SOURce 1 DELTa HIGH lt NRf gt Sets high source value amps 2 1e 3 lt NRf gt 0 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DELTa LOW NR Sets low source value amps 2 1e3 lt NRf gt 0 to 105e 3 SOURce 1 DELTa DELay NRf Sets Delta delay seconds 2 0 lt NRf gt 0 to 9999 999 or INFinity SOURce 1 DELTa COUNt lt NRf gt Sets the number of cycles to run 2 INF lt NRf gt 1 to 65536 finite count or INFinity SOURce 1 SWEep COUNt lt NRf gt Sets the number of measurement sets to 1 repeat lt NRf gt 1 to 65536 finite count or INFinity SOURce 1 DELTa CSWitch b Enable cold switching mode 2 0 b 0 or OFF 1 or ON SOURCE 1 DELTa CABort lt b gt Enable
335. ltage is set to close to the expected load voltage load current times load resistance then the settling time of the step response will increase from the specified level In order to reduce this side effect the compliance voltage needs to be set gt 2V higher than the expected load voltage For example if a zero to 20mA step is sourced into a 100W load the resulting voltage would be a 0 to 2V step that would settle within 2us assuming the compli ance setpoint is gt 4V However if the compliance setpoint is set to 2 5V the set tling time could be expected to increase by several microseconds Preventing compliance overshoot There are three options that can be considered to prevent or minimize compliance overshoot Set compliance 2V above the operating voltage Use small current step changes Shuntthe output with a capacitor Set compliance 2V above operating voltage One way to avoid compliance overshoot is to set a compliance that is at least 2V above the expected static output voltage For example if the normal operating voltage across the load is 10V set the compliance to at least 12V Use small current step changes As explained in Calculating overshoot a small current step change in relation to the selected source range results in smaller overshoot If you limit the step size to 196 of the current range the maximum overshoot will typically only be 20mV Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference
336. lugs or spade lugs The cable supplied with the Model 2182 2182A is terminated with copper spade lugs A clean copper to copper connection minimizes thermal EMFs Safety earth ground the test fixture must have a screw terminal that is used exclusively for connection to safety earth ground See the Test fixture chassis WARNING before for more information on this connection Test fixture chassis The chassis of the test fixture must be metal so it can function as a safety shield The test box must have a lid that closes to prevent contact with live cir cuitry Make sure to install an interlock as previously described The test fixture must have a screw terminal that is used exclusively for con nection to safety earth ground WARNING To provide protection from shock hazards the test fixture chassis must be properly connected to safety earth ground A grounding wire 18 AWG or larger must be attached securely to the test fixture at a screw terminal designed for safety grounding The other end of the ground wire must be attached to a known safety Earth Ground Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 23 Noise Shield or Guard plate A metal plate will provide noise shielding or guarding for the DUT or test circuit It will also serve as a mounting panel for DUT or test circuits The guard plate must be insulated with appropriate spacing from the chassis of the test fixture When the triax
337. ly be selected based on the source values For fixed range the source range will be left on the range it was at when the waveform is started If the present current range is too low when the waveform is started Error 222 Parameter Out of Range is generated and the waveform does not initiate This command is not accepted while the wave is armed Error 404 Not allowed with Wave Armed 7 SOUR WAVE PMAR lt NRf gt Set marker phase SOUR WAVE PMAR STAT lt b gt Enable disable phase marker SOUR WAVE PMAR OLIN lt NRf gt Set phase marker output line Use these commands to enter the point in degrees 0 360 at which a 1s out put trigger pulse will be issued enable disable the phase marker and select the phase marker output line on the trigger connector Note that the phase marker output line cannot be the same as the trigger layer output trigger line usually 2 at default or the waveform external trigger line Attempts to set the phase marker line to the same line as either of these returns Error 221 Set tings Conflict See External trigger connector on page 8 13 for trigger con nector details Return to Section 7 topics 7 30 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 10 11 12 13 14 SOUR WAVE ARB DATA lt NRf gt NRf NRf Define arbitrary points This command creates the points list for the arbitrary waveform The data must be in the range 1 to 1 The maximum number of points allowed
338. ly properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley Instruments products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Measurement Category and Measurement Category as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 60664 Most measurement control and data I O signals are Measurement Category and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high transient over voltages Measurement Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often associated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category sources unless otherwise marked or described in the user documentation Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operat
339. mary Model 622x test procedures include DC current output amplitude accuracy Model 6220 and 6221 page 16 6 Compliance accuracy Model 6220 and 6221 page 16 8 Waveform function amplitude and frequency accuracy Model 6221 only page 16 9 Test considerations When performing the procedures sure to restore factory defaults as outlined above Make sure that the test equipment is properly warmed up and connected to the correct Model 622x connector Besure that a shorting connector is connected to the INTERLOCK connec tor or you will not be able to turn on the output for testing See Section 2 for details on the interlock Make sure the test equipment and Model 622x settings are correct Return to Section 16 topics 16 6 Performance Verification Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Verification procedures DC current output accuracy Follow these steps in order to test Model 6220 6221 DC output current accuracy 1 With the power off connect the digital multimeter DMM to the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 16 1 Also connect the short ing connector to the INTERLOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections 2 Turn on the Model 6220 6221 and DMM and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding Set the DMM to the DC current function and enable auto range 3 Setthe Model 6220 6221 output current to 100 000mA and turn on the out put See Section 3 for details on set
340. mary address 12 Return to Appendix topics C 14 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE command groups Command groups supported by the Model 622x are listed in Table C 6 Common commands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table C 6 IEEE command groups HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC 2 INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LISTEN LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TALK TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUEST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END OF IDENTIFY Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 15 Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part of the IEEE 488 standards define an instrument s ability to support various interface functions and should not be con fused with programming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the Model 622x are listed in Table C 7 Table C 7 Model 622x interface function codes
341. measurements 1 With the power off connect the DMM to the Model 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 16 4 Also connect the shorting connector to the INTER LOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections 2 Turn on the Model 6221 and test equipment and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding Select the AC current function on the DMM and enable auto range 3 Select the Model 6221 sine wave function by pressing the WAVE key 4 Setthe Model 6221 amplitude AMPL and frequency FREQ to 100mA at 1kHz and turn on the output 5 Note the DMM reading at 1kHz If your DMM has a dB reference function set the present reading to OdB 6 Setthe Model 6221 frequency to 100kHz 7 Verify that the 100kHz DMM reading is within 1dB of the reading in step 5 If your DMM does not have a dB function you can calculate the variation as follows dB 20 log l4 l2 where is the higher of the two readings 8 After testing first turn off the output then disconnect the test equipment Figure 16 4 Connections for waveform function amplitude flatness Digital Multimeter Measure AC Current Return to Section 16 topics 16 10 Performance Verification Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Frequency accuracy 1 With the power off connect the frequency counter to the Model 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 16 5 Also connect the shorting connec tor to the INTERLOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections
342. ment points steps in the sweep the current source level at each point the delay period at each step and the compliance set ting at each step When this sweep is started the current output goes from the bias level to the first point in the sweep The sweep will continue through the current source steps in the order they were programmed and stop after the last step The time duration at each step is determined by the delay setting for each point which can be set to a different value for each point Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 7 Current mA Bias Figure 4 4 shows an example of a custom sweep over the range of 1mA to 10mA with arbitrary steps When the sweep is triggered the current goes from the bias level to the first point in the sweep The unit cycles through the sweep points in the programmed order The current output remains at the last step when the sweep is done Note that the sweep delay period is different for each step Figure 4 4 Custom sweep example 1mA to 10mA arbitrary steps Sweep delay can be different for each step Return to Section 4 topics 4 8 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Setting sweep parameters Custom sweep editing A typical custom sweep editing display is shown below P12345 1 234567 mA Del 123456 789s Cmpl 100 00 V The leftmost value on the top line is the point number and the next value is the actual current setting The forma
343. ment units page 5 16 Volts ohms power or conductance page 5 16 Setting measurement units page 5 17 Display readings page 5 17 Error and status messages page 5 18 Basic measurement process page 5 20 Model 622x measurement process page 5 21 Configuration settings page 5 24 Arming process page 5 24 Triggering sequence page 5 25 Operation page 5 27 Setup commands page 5 30 Pulse Delta page 5 32 Model 6221 measurement process page 5 32 Pulse Delta outputs page 5 35 Configuration settings page 5 39 Arming process page 5 42 Triggering sequence page 5 43 Operation page 5 44 Setup commands page 5 49 Differential Conductance page 5 51 Basic measurement process page 5 51 Model 622x measurement process page 5 51 Configuration settings page 5 55 Arming process page 5 56 Triggering sequence page 5 58 Operation page 5 59 Setup commands page 5 64 5 2 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Part 1 Overview Keithley instrumentation requirements for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance are explained on page 5 4 Section overview This section is divided into two parts The topics in Part 1 provide support information for all three delta tests The topics in Part 2 page 5 20 provide the details for each delta test Operation overview The Model 6220 or 6221 Current Source can be used with a Model 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter to perform Delt
344. messages are listed in Appendix B On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the error queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue As listed in Table 11 7 there are commands to enable and or disable messages For these commands the lt list gt parameter is used to specify which messages to Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 21 enable or disable The messages are specified by their codes The following examples show various forms for using the lt list gt parameter lt list gt 110 Single message 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 220 Range entry and single entry Separated by a comma When you enable messages messages not specified in the list are disabled When you disable messages each listed message is removed from the enabled list To prevent all messages from entering the error queue send the enable com mand along with the null list parameter as follows STATus QUEue ENABle Table 11 7 SCPI commands error queue Command Description Default STATus STATus subsystem QUEue Read error queue Note 1 NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for error queue Note 2 ENABle Read the enabled messages DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 2 DISable Re
345. mpedance Voltmeter Output Boot color for alligator clip if using supplied triax cable Floating current source connections When using an external source in the test circuit it may be necessary to float the Model 622x off Earth Ground see Figure 2 17 Details on Floating the current source are provided on page 2 13 WARNING To prevent electric shock and or damage to the Model 622x DO NOT exceed 250Vpk between Output Low and Earth Ground Above 42Vpk 30Vrms a shock hazard exists between Output Low and Chassis A safety shield must surround the test cir cuit and be connected to a safety Earth Ground For details see Safety shield connections on page 2 16 Return to Section 2 topics 2 20 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 2 17 Floating current source connections A Inner shield connected to Output Low B Inner shield connected to Cable Guard High High Test circuit Test circuit Output LO Boot color for alligator clip if Banana Plug Cable using supplied triax cable NOTE Triax Output low must be disconnected from Earth Ground by using the following key press sequence Press TRIAX select OUPUT LOW select FLOATING The following command will also disconnect Output Low from Earth Ground OUTPut LTEarth OFF Using a test fixture Custom built test fixture A custom built test fixture needs to a accommodate a variety of con
346. mponents in the system before making connections Figure 5 4 page 5 8 System connections Figure 5 5 page 5 10 Test connections 2 Configure communications for the Models 2182 2182A and 622x as explained in Configuring communications on page 5 10 3 On the Model 2182 21824 select the desired measurement range and integration rate These Model 2182 21824 settings can be made from the front panel or remote programming can be used Rate must be set to an integer value 1 2 3 up to 50 or 60 If some other rate is selected it will automatically be changed to 1PLC by Model 622x during the arming pro cess For front panel operation use the RANGE keys to select the measurement range To set the integration rate use the RATE key Commands from the PC to control the Model 2182 2182A are addressed to the Model 622x Each command is then routed through the Model 622x out the serial port RS 232 to the Model 2182 21824 The following command word is used for this communication process SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SEND data Where data is a valid Model 2182 2182A command The following query command is used to return the response to a query command sent over the serial port SYSTem COMMunicate SERial ENTer When communicating over the serial port there are no errors reported if a Model 2182 21824 is not properly connected to the Model 622x Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pul
347. ms 42Vpeak will be present The metal safety shield must completely surround DUT test circuitry and must be connected to a known Safety Earth Ground and Chassis see Figure 2 13 Use 18AWG wire or larger for connection to safety Earth Ground and Chassis Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 2 12 Noise shield A Inner shield connected to Output Low Metal noise shield High black using supplied triax cable Figure 2 13 Safety shield A Inner shield connected to Output Low High Metal safety we shield Earth Ground pad green Ground Boot color for alligator clip if using supplied triax cable Cable Guard connections Boot color for alligator clip if green Chassis Screw Output Connections 2 17 B Inner shield connected to Cable Guard Output Low connected to Earth Ground Metal noise shield High 1 1 Earth Ground green B Inner shield connected to Cable Guard Output Low connected to earth ground High Metal safety Peer ROM shield Safety 1 Earth Earth Ground Ground Triax Cable Guard is used to provide guarding for the triax cable and can be extended all the way to the DUT at a metal guard plate Connections for Cable Guard are shown in Figure 2 14 A safety shield must be used whenever hazardous voltages gt 30Vrms 42Vpeak will be present in the test circuit Figure 2 15 shows a how to make
348. mulation commands NOTE While in the normal display state the ADDR key can also be used to set the GPIB address RS 232 1 Press COMM to open the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu 2 Select the RS 232 interface NOTE If a different interface was being used the Model 622x will reboot when RS 232 is selected If a reboot occurs repeat steps 1 and 2 and then proceed to step 3 3 Configure the RS 232 as follows Setthe BAUD rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K or 115 2K Set the TERMINATOR CR lt CR LF gt lt LF gt or lt LF CR gt Set the FLOW CTRL NONE or XON XOFF Ethernet Model 6221 only 1 Press COMM to open the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu 2 Select the ETHERNET interface NOTE If a different interface was being used the Model 622x will reboot when ETHERNET is selected If a reboot occurs repeat steps 1 and 2 and then proceed to step 3 Return to Section 1 topics 1 24 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 3 For the ETHERNET set the MAC address IP GATEWAY and SUBNET Also enable ON or disable OFF DHCP control Error and status messages Error and status messages are displayed momentarily During operation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either of status or error variety as listed in Appendix B Messages both status and error are held in queues For information on retrieving messages
349. n 8 topics 8 16 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual For this example the Model 622x and switching mainframe are configured as follows Model 622x Switching Mainframe Factory Defaults Restored Factory Defaults Restored Trig In Event TLink Scan List 111 1110 Trigger Input Line 2 Number of Scans 1 Trigger Output Line 1 Channel Spacing TrigLink Trigger Output Delay Event ON Configure Sweep Section 4 To run this test properly set up the sweep with 10 points with the desired currents see Section 4 To start the test press STEP on the switching mainframe to take it out of idle and start the scan The switching mainframes output pulse triggers the Model 622x to output the sweep point current The Model 622x then sends an output trigger pulse to the switching mainframe to close the next channel This process contin ues until all 10 sweep points are swept and channels are sequentially scanned Details of this testing process are explained in the following paragraphs and are referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 8 9 Figure 8 9 Operation model for triggering example 70010r 7002 Press STEP to start 622x L ide Bypass Wait for Trigger Link k 4 Wait for Trigger 1 Trigger Link Trigger y v Scan Output o Channel Current Y od Y Trigger Trigger Output 11906 11199 Output Trigger E Trigger
350. n selecting Measurement units With Ohms dR or Siemens dG measurement units selected the reading is cal culated as follows dR dV dl dG dl dV With Power measurement units selected power is calculated using Average Volt age and Average Current and is explained in the following paragraphs Average Voltage and Power Average Voltage calculation Average Voltage is the average bias voltage that was present across the device when the corresponding Differential Conductance reading was taken For remote operation the Average Voltage reading for Differential Conductance will be included in the returned data string when the AVOLtage data element is selected See FORMat subsystem on page 13 4 for details on selecting data elements Average Voltage is calculated as follows 2 Y 2 2 AvgVolt vgVo 5 X 2Y Z AvgVolt vgVo 1 Where AvgVolt is the Average Voltage corresponding to a given Differential Voltage dV reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the dV reading Power calculation With WATTS power measurement units selected power for Differential Conduc tance is calculated using Average Voltage see Average Voltage calculation above and Average Current Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 55 Average Current is calculated by the Model 622x as follows X Y Z Y AvgCur
351. n stored in the buffer yet Return to Section 6 topics 6 4 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 3 With the filter settled the storage of filtered Delta readings begin The next 25 Delta cycles yields 25 filtered readings which are stored in the buffer 4 After the 257 Delta reading is stored in the buffer the Delta test stops For the above example 35 Delta cycles were performed The first 10 Delta cycles filled the filter stack and the next 25 Delta cycles filled the buffer Repeating filter Basic repeating filter operation As shown in Table 6 1 the repeating average filter can be used with Delta Pulse Delta Fixed output and Differential Conduc tance As shown in Figure 6 1B the repeating filter takes a specified number count of reading conversions averages them and yields a reading It then flushes its stack and starts over The filter stack must be filled with delta readings and then averaged to yield and store one filtered delta reading The stack is emptied and the fill and average process is repeated to yield and store another filtered reading This fill and average process is repeated for every specified delta cycle For example assume the repeating average filter count is 10 and the delta test is con figured to perform 25 cycles For these test parameters 250 delta cycles will be performed to store 25 filtered delta readings in the buffer Differential C
352. n the geometry of the wafer and probe tis the sample thickness V is the measured voltage is the current in the sample Figure E 1 Resistivity measurement test system Hi 6514 622x Electrometer Current Source Return to Appendix topics E 4 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Diode characterization With the Model 622x it is possible to plot I V current voltage characteristics of a diode over several decades A simple test system for diode characterization is shown in Figure E 2 The Model 6514 with its high input resistance gt 200TQ in parallel with 20pF will allow the voltage measurement to be made accurately Figure E 3 shows several examples of diodes whose curves have been plotted using the test system shown in Figure E 2 NOTE A standard DMM cannot be used to accurately measure the voltage across the diode because its much lower input resis tance would cause loading error However a standard DMM can be used to make the voltage measurement at the banana jack GUARD terminal of the Model 622x see Banana Jack Guard on page 2 12 Figure E 2 Diode characterization test system Current Source 6514 Electrometer Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Applications 5 Figure E 3 Diode curves 100 10 Wout o 100pA VF 0 1V 0 2V 0 3V 0 4V 0 5V 0 6V Transistor characterization The Model 622x can be used with a Keithl
353. nator Return to Section 15 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 220 Language 15 5 12 13 Terminators are selected using Y lt n gt where n 0 4 The default terminator is CR LF gt which is YO in this notation For the UO query string the Model 622x will return a in the Y position for the default terminator like the Model 220 does Otherwise we will return the digit 1 4 will be returned for the other choices When a sweep is halted on the Model 220 by pressing the Start Stop key the output remains on and the source remains at the last memory value it was at when the sweep is stopped Stopping a sweep on the Model 622x with the EXIT key resets you to the first memory location and turns the output off Note that in the KI 220 mode with the Program Command set to Continuous or Single P1 or PO the Model 622x TRIG key will behave like the Model 220 Start Stop key e g one push starts the sweep the next pauses etc The Model 220 has only a single external trigger line available In the 220 language mode only TLINK line 1 will function as the external trig ger input To avoid confusion and the possibility of getting into undesirable states the entire CONFIG gt TRIG menu will be locked out in the 220 mode The trigger output pulse will always be issued on TLINK line 2 and it will be issued at the end of the Dwell time Delay time Unlike Model 622x operation the trigger output pulse cannot be
354. nce volts 0 1 to 105 10 3 COMPliance Query voltage compliance FILTer Analog filter 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable analog filter STATe Query state of analog filter OFF STARt lt n gt Set start current amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 0 4 STARt Query start current STOP lt n gt Set stop current amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 100e 3 4 STOP Query stop current STEP lt n gt Set step current amps 1e 13 to 105e 3 1e 2 4 STEP Query step current CENTer lt n gt Set center current amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 0 4 CENTer Query center current SPAN n Set span current amps 2e 13 to 210e 3 100e 3 4 SPAN Query span current DELay lt n gt Set source delay seconds 1e 3 to 999999 999 1 4 DELay Query source delay SWEep Source sweep operation 4 SPACing lt name gt Select sweep type LINear LOGarithmic or LIST LIN SPACing Query sweep type POINts lt n gt Set sweep points 1 to 65535 11 POINtS Query sweep points RANGing lt name gt Select sweep ranging AUTO BEST or BEST RANGing Query sweep ranging Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 9 Table 14 6 cont Source command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI COUNt lt NRf gt Set sweep count 1 to 9999 or INFinity 1 COUNt Query sweep count CABort b Enable to abort sweep on compliance ON or OFF OFF CABort Query complian
355. nd Differential Conductance are covered here Additional arming information that is unique to each delta test can be found at the following locations Additional Arming process information for Delta is provided on page 5 24 Additional Arming process information for Pulse Delta is provided on page 5 42 Additional Arming process information for Differential Conductance is pro vided on page 5 56 Return to Section 5 topics 5 12 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Communications test and setup commands If a sweep or delta test is already running sending arm command causes error 221 Settings Conflict The Model 622x performs communication tests with the Model 2182 21824 If a Model 2182 2182A is not detected error 241 Hardware Missing is reported f RS 232 is the selected interface for the Model 622x error 809 Not Allowed with RS 232 occurs Select a different interface for the Model 622x f communications over the Trigger Link cannot be established error 419 Trigger Link cable not connected Check that the Trigger Link cable is properly connected between the Model 622x and the Model 2182 21824 The Model 622x sends setup commands to the Model 2182 21824 This includes the command to disable Front Autozero on the Model 2182 2182A to increase system speed On the Model 2182 21824 the REM remote annunciator turns on and all front panel controls
356. nd controls Note lt b gt ON or OFF DISPlay TEXT lt a gt Define top line ASCII message 2 Note Up to 20 characters DISPlay TEXT STATe lt b gt Enable disable top line message Note lt b gt ON or OFF DISPlay ATTRibutes Query attributes of top message characters Blinking 1 or not blinking 0 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT lt a gt Define bottom line ASCII message 2 Note Up to 32 characters DISPlay WINDow2TEXT STATe lt b gt Enable disable bottom line message Note lt b gt ON or OFF DISPlay ATTRibutes Query attributes of bottom message characters Blinking 1 or not blinking 0 Note RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on the display circuitry a text message or the state of the message modes Pressing LOCAL or cycling power enables ON the display circuitry cancels all text messages and disables OFF the message modes Pressing DISP will also enable the display 1 With front panel circuitry turned off the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen and all front panel controls except LOCAL and DISP are disabled Normal display operations can be resumed by sending DISPlay ENABle on to enable the display pressing the LOCAL or DISP key or cycling power DISPlay TEXT a Define top display message DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT a Define bottom display message Message Types String aa a or aa a Indefinite Block 0aa a Definite Block XY
357. nd firmware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC MODEL 622x xxxxxxx yyyyy zzzzz w Where xxxxxxx is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision levels of the digital board ROM and display board ROM Note that yyyyy also provides build date and time information w is the board revision level B OPC operation complete Sets OPC bit OPC operation complete query Places a 1 in output queue When OPC is sent the OPC bit in the standard event register will set after all pending command operations are complete When OPC is sent an ASCII 1 is placed in the output queue after all pending command operations are complete Typically either one of these commands is sent after the INITiate command The INITiate command is used to take the instrument out of idle in order to perform measurements While operating within the trigger model layers all sent com mands except DCL SDC IFC SYSTem PRESet RST GET and ABORt will not execute After all programmed operations are completed the instrument returns to the idle state at which time all pending commands including OPC and or OPC are executed After the last pending command is executed the OPC bit and or an ASCII 1 is placed in the output queue NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation or OPC should be used with SYST PRES which is a slow responding command Programmin
358. ndix topics E 14 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Appendix topics Index Symbols A RST default setup 1 25 Accessories 1 5 Adapters 1 5 Address commands C 10 Addressed multiline commands C 10 Analog filter 3 5 Applications Calibration source E 2 Diode characterization E 4 Resistivity measurements E 3 Transistor characterization E 5 Arming process 5 11 ASCII data format 13 5 Average voltage 13 8 Averaging filter 6 1 Commands 6 8 Filter count 6 2 Filter window 6 5 Moving filter 6 3 Repeating filter 6 4 Setup and control 6 8 Banana jack Guard 2 8 2 12 Connections 2 19 Baud rate 10 25 Beeper 1 16 Buffer 6 11 Buffer data elements 6 12 Buffer size 6 12 Buffer statistics 6 12 Buffer timestamp 6 13 Commands 6 16 Recalling readings 6 14 Storing readings 6 14 Bus command summary C 7 Bus configuration C 4 Bus description C 3 Byte order 13 8 Cable capacitance 2 9 Cable Guard 2 8 Connections 2 17 Capabilities 1 2 Carrying case 1 6 Case sensitivity 10 14 Cleaning test fixtures 2 23 Clearing registers and queues 11 4 Command execution rules 10 17 path rules 10 16 words 10 12 Command codes C 12 Command groups C 14 Common commands 12 2 C 11 Communications Model 2182 2182A 5 10 Model 622x 5 11 Communications test 5 12 Compliance 3 3 Compliance overshoot 3 3 Condition registers 11 17 CONFIG LOCAL key 10 24 Connections DUT 5 8 Ethernet 10 31 System 5 6 Connections to
359. nds B Theinitiate command starts Differential Conductance readings After all Differential Conductance readings are performed Differential Conductance will stop running At this point another initiate command will re start Differ ential Conductance New Differential Conductance readings will overwrite the old Differential Conductance readings in the Model 622x buffer 6 Read Differential Conductance readings While Differential Conduc tance is running the latest Model 2182 21824 reading can be read by the Model 622x using the following command SENS DATA Reads the latest Delta reading The above read command reads the last Differential Conductance reading that was performed by the Model 2182 21824 If this command is sent before a new reading is available the last Differential Conductance reading will again be returned Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 63 NOTE If a read command is sent when Differential Con ductance is not running error 221 Settings Con flict will occur See Table 5 2 for details on errors associated with Differential Conductance opera tion NOTE Details on using Model 622x Read commands are provided on page 5 15 7 When finished with Differential Conductance it can be disarmed by send ing the following command SOUR SWE ABOR Stops Delta and places the Model 2182 2182A in the local mod
360. nection requirements including connections to an external voltmeter such as the Keithley Model 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter Figure 2 18 shows a test fixture that can be custom built The included connectors and terminals will accommodate any connection scheme covered in this section The internal wiring to the DUT will of course depend on the connection scheme used Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 21 Figure 2 18 Custom built test fixture To 622x Normally open SPST momentary switch lt Metal Chassis Insulated Terminal Post 1 of 9 To haa D i Noise Shield Chassis Metal Guard Plate screw terminal 1 Output High y 2 Output Low or Cable Guard F 3 Earth Ground Safety Earth Ground The following describes recommended connections for the test fixture shown in Figure 2 18 Note that the connectors for B C and E must be insulated from the metal chassis of the test fixture Test fixture connections To minimize thermal EMFs which could corrupt low level measurements use copper connectors for the DUT test circuit A Two 5 way binding posts wire the binding posts to a normally open inter lock switch as shown in Figure 2 18 The interlock switch must be installed such that when the lid of the test fixture is opened the switch will open and when the lid is closed the switch will close When the test fixture lid is opene
361. ner shield of the triax connector Cable Guard is routed through the test box to the DUT Figure E 7 Filter circuit examples A Output Lo on inner shield 4 Metal case Pe R of filter box Triax In Triax Out From 622x To DUT B Guard on inner shield cci ERI 14 Metal case j inb m of filter box Triax In Triax Out From 622x To DUT Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Applications 9 Filter circuit considerations The filter can be tailored around the specific DUT impedance levels and speed response requirements Almost any range of resistance R and capacitance C can be used as long as the corresponding voltage drops are within the dynamic range of the Model 622x Care should be taken when using inductors L since there are maximum limita tions of inductance that the Model 622x can tolerate 10pH preferably Because of this limitation it is best to use ferrite inductors that do not exhibit as much phase shift for the same increase in impedance as regular inductors The flexibility of adding a wide range of resistor and capacitor values in addition to the ferrite provides a wide range of options to aid in the overall reduction of noise High current applications For higher current applications resistors may not be the best choice and a single capacitor may suffice This capacitance will interact with the load impedance assuming a resistance of R and provide the f
362. ng pulse via the SOT line of the Digital I O is received See Digital I O port on page 9 5 Return to Section 8 topics 8 6 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual ARM SIGNal remote only Used as a one time bypass for the ARM layer control source and move on to the next layer in the trigger model the TRIGger layer event detection in this case Trigger In source The Trigger In control sources which control individual Sweep steps are explained as follow IMMEDIATE TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Event detection for the trig ger layer is satisfied immediately allowing operation to continue to perform a sweep step TRIGGER LINK TRIGger SOURce TLINk Event detection for the trig ger layer is satisfied when an input trigger via the TRIGGER LINK connec tor is received by the Model 622x Note that if the source bypass is set to ONCE TRIGger DIRection SOURce operation will loop around the source detector on the initial pass through the arm layer Detection for each subsequent pass is satisfied by an input trigger The bypass resets when the Model 622x leaves the trigger layer TRIGger SIGNal remote only Used as a one time bypass for the TRIGGER layer control source and move on to the next layer in the trigger model the device action in this case Device action The device action block of the trigger model is where a sweep step is performed Figure 8 3 Each step sets the current source to the progr
363. nge and the output will be returned to zero SOUR WAVE INIT Start waveform function This command normally starts the programmed waveform function Note that the output must be on OUTP ON for the waveform signal to appear at the output terminals If the external trigger mode is enabled the waveform will not start until an external trigger is received The inactive value will be output until then SOUR WAVE ABOR Abort waveform function This command immediately aborts the waveform and returns the Model 6221 to the DC mode with the output off and the source set to zero Note that this command has the same effect as SOUR SWEep ABORt see SCPI com mands sweeps on page 4 18 Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 31 15 16 SOUR WAVE DUR TIME lt NRf gt Set duration of waveform in time This command sets the time duration in seconds that the waveform will run after being started with the INIT command The default setting is INFinity sec onds and valid choices range from 100e 9 seconds to 999999 999 seconds or INFinity The last duration type sent takes precedence This command is not accepted while the wave is armed Error 404 Not allowed with Wave Armed SOUR WAVE DUR CYCL lt NRf gt Set duration of waveform in cycles This command sets the time duration in number of cycles that the waveform will run after being started with the INIT command The
364. nges does not quite meet that requirement For optimum calibration to factory specifications it is recommended that the Model 622x be returned to the factory for calibration Table 17 1 Recommended calibration equipment Manufacturer model Description Key specifications Digital Multimeter Measure 200nA to 100mA DC 100ppm Agilent 3458A Measure 25 0 1V 20V 21V and 100V DC 100ppm Picoammeter Measure 2nA and 20nA DC 2000ppm Keithley 6487 Calibration equipment connections For the sake of clarity only actual signal lines are shown in equipment connection drawings in this section To ensure calibration integrity be sure to use appropriate triax cables or where appropriate coax cables for all signal connections Restoring factory defaults Before performing the calibration procedures restore the instrument to its factory defaults as follows 1 Press SETUP 2 Select PRESET then restore the factory default conditions by pressing ENTER Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 5 Calibration summary and considerations Calibration summary Model 622x calibration procedures include Front panel calibration page 17 5 Remote calibration page 17 14 Calibration considerations When performing the procedures sure to restore factory defaults as outlined above Make sure that the test equipment is properly warmed up and connected to the co
365. nking cursor on INNER SHIELD and press the ENTER key to display the TRIAX INNER SHIELD options 4 Placethe cursor on OUTPUT LOW 220 STYLE or GUARD and press the ENTER key 5 Press the EXIT key to return to the normal display state Remote programming triax inner shield Changing the inner shield connection can only be done with the current source OUTPUT OFF Otherwise error 403 Not allowed with output on will occur Commands for triax inner shield connection OUTPut ISHield Query connection for triax inner shield OUTPut ISHield name Connect inner shield to Cable Guard or Output Low lt name gt GUARd OLOW Example Turns off the current source OUTPUT and connects the inner shield of the OUTPUT connector to Cable Guard OUTPut OFF OUTPut ISHield GUARd Triax output low Output Low can be connected to Earth Ground which is the outer shell of the triax connector or it can float By default Output Low floats Perform the following steps to check or change the Output Low connection 1 the Model 622x press the TRIAX key to display the CONFIGURE TRIAX menu 2 Using the cursor controls place the blinking cursor on OUTPUT LOW and press the ENTER key to display the TRIAX OUTPUT LOW options Return to Section 2 topics 2 8 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Guards 3 Place the cursor on FLOATING or EARTH GROUND and press the ENTER key 4 Press the EXIT key
366. nly be defined via remote Waveform triggering with firmware and later Return to Section 7 topics 7 16 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Generating a sine wave 1 If you intend to use fixed ranging manually set the range high enough to accommodate both the amplitude and offset setting 2 Configure the waveform as follows a Press CONFIG then WAVE to enter the wave function configuration menu Select TYPE then press ENTER Select SINE then press ENTER to choose a sine wave To add a DC offset select OFFSET from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the offset as desired To use the phase marker select PHASE MARKER set the STATE to ON use OUTPUT POINT to set the phase setting and OUTPUT LINE to set the trigger line Again from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu choose RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED or FIXED as desired From the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select DURATION then set the desired waveform duration From the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select AMPL UNIT then set the desired amplitude units PEAK or RMS Press EXIT to return to normal display 3 Set frequency and amplitude a b Press the FREQ key then set the frequency to the desired value Press the AMPL key then set the amplitude as required 4 Generate waveform a b Press the WAVE key to arm the wave function Press TRIG to turn on the output and start generating the waveform The outpu
367. nnector but a few may require a different type of connecting cable See your controller s instruc tion manual for information about properly connecting to the IEEE 488 bus NOTE You can only have 15 devices connected to an IEEE 488 bus including the controller The maxi mum cable length is either 20 meters or two meters times the number of devices whichever is less Not observing these limits may cause er ratic bus operation Primary address The Model 622x ships from the factory with a GPIB address of 12 When the instrument powers up it momentarily displays the primary address You can set the address to a value of 0 30 Do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the same GPIB bus Usually controller addresses are 0 or 21 but see the controller s instruction man ual for details Make sure the address of the controller is the same as that speci fied in the controller s programming language To make sure the unit s interface is properly selected and configured or to check or change the setting see Interface selection and configuration on page 10 3 Return to Section 10 topics 10 22 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual General IEEE 488 bus commands Commands and associated statements General commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same general meaning regardless of the instrument Table 10 4 lists the general bus commands Table 10
368. not set Calibration data invalid DAC calibration overflow DAC calibration underflow Source offset data invalid Source gain data invalid Sense offset data invalid Sense gain data invalid Not permitted with cal locked Not permitted with cal un locked Return to Section 17 topics Calibration 17 23 17 24 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration dates count and password Viewing calibration dates and count Front panel calibration dates and count To view last calibration date calibration due date and count 1 Press the MENU key 2 Select CAL and press ENTER The main calibration menu will be dis played 3 Select VIEW DATES and press ENTER The instrument will display the next calibration date last calibration date and the calibration count For example NEXT CAL 05 15 2005 Last cal 05 15 2004 Count 0001 Remote calibration dates and count To view calibration dates and count via remote send these queries CAL PROT DATE Query last cal date CAL PROT NDUE Query next cal date CAL PROT COUN Query cal count For the dates the instrument will return a string of characters with the year day and month delimited by commas Changing the calibration password To change the calibration password first unlock calibration using the present password then enter or send the new password Front panel password To change the password 1 Press the MENU ke
369. nsulation resistance and 100pF ft of cable capacitance Unguarded triax cable example inner shield connected to Output Low The example in Figure 2 6 shows the effects of using an unguarded output config uration as shown in Figure 2 4 to source 100nA to a 1GQ DUT Rpur As shown a 100GQ insulator resistance 4 and a 100pF C cable capacitance exist between output high and output low Cable capacitance Cable capacitance slows down the response current rise time at the DUT When the Model 622x output is turned on or a step change occurs there is an initial current surge through C Current will stop flowing through the capacitor after it fully charges A current is considered to be settled when it is within 196 of its final value It takes approximately five RC time constants 51 for the capacitor to charge and allow the settled current to flow through the DUT As calculated in Figure 2 6 one RC time constant 1 is 99ms Therefore a set tling time of 495ms 51 is required to allow sufficient settling for the source The higher the capacitance and impedance of the DUT the longer the current rise time at the DUT Return to Section 2 topics 2 10 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Leakage current After capacitor C 4 charges it is effectively removed from the test circuit assuming the source level remains constant What is left is the 100GQ insulator resistance R 4 in parallel wi
370. nt Enable Register Register Operation Complete Query Error Device Specific Error Execution Error Command Error User Request Logical Power On Always Zero ESR ESE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt ESE Measurement Event Registers Condition Event Event Enable Register Register Register Reading Overflow Interlock Asserted Over Temperature Compliance RAV _ gt TN 3 Logical OR Reading Available Trace Notify TN Buffer Available Buffer Half Full Buffer Full Buffer 1 4 Full Buffer 3 4 Full Always Zero CONDition ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt ENABle o ass ass Logica e STB SRE lt gt or lt NRf gt SRE Master Summary Status MSS MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit MAV Message Available ESB Event Summary Bit RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status OSB Operation Summary Bit Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte MSS bit is in STB response Operation Event Registers Event Register Condition Register Event Enable Register Calibrating Sweep Done Sweep Aborted Sweeping Wave Started Wait for Trigger Wait for Arm Wave Stopped Filter Settled Logical Idle RS 232 Errors Always Zero CONDition ENABle lt NDN gt or lt
371. nt Model 2182 2182A A D The new A D replaces the oldest A D in the Delta calculation Return to Section 5 topics 5 22 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 7 Delta measurement technique 2182 2182A 2182 2182A 2182 2182A A D A A D C A D E I High Y 622x time I Source 2182 2182 2182 2182A 2182A 2182A ADB ADD ADF ist Delta Cycle gt i i 2nd Delta Cycle noo 3rd Delta Cycle lt 4th Delta Cycle 1st Delta Reading 842 1 3rd Delta Reading gt 25 Cay 2nd Delta Reading 4th Delta Reading EL following equation can be used to calculate any Delta reading Delta A e 1 Where X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for a Delta reading n Delta Cycle Number 1 Example Calculate the 21st Delta reading X Y and Z are the three A D measurements for the 21st Delta reading n Delta Cycle Number 1 21 1 20 Therefore _ X E e 20 Delta 525124 1 X 2Y Z 4 Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 23 The 1 term in the Delta calculation is used for polarity reversal of every other calculated Delta reading This makes all calculated Delta readings in the test the same polarity Delta calculation example Assume you want to mea
372. nt Source Operation Current source output capabilities 2 eene 3 2 Source Cur c 3 2 COMPANCE M T 3 3 Output power source or sink ssesesseseseeeeeenereeneen nennen 3 3 3 5 Setting source and compliance sse nennen nennen 3 9 Source and compliance editing sese 3 9 Atran ia E eben ous EEE E 3 12 Nu 3 12 SOULCING CUNTEDE Ec 3 13 Remote programming source output commands sese 3 15 Sweeps OVGIVIEW zoe uenti ie rdiet i et An e ORE ed 4 2 4 2 Sweep Overview en 4 2 Sweep characteristics 1 4 4 Linear staircase SWEEPS Mm 4 4 Logarithmic staircase SWEEPS 2 4 5 CUSTOM SWEEPS M 4 6 Setting sweep parameters oo eee cee 4 8 Front panel sweep operation 2 4 10 Using the sweep configuration menu 2 0 0 0 ce eee eseeeeeseessetaeceseeseeeeeseeeeeees 4 10 Performing a linear staircase sweep esses nennen 4 11 Performing a log staircase sweep 4 enne 4 12 Perform
373. nt burns The jh symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame If this symbol is on a product it indicates that mercury is present in the display lamp Please note that the lamp must be properly disposed of according to federal state and local laws The WARNING heading in the user documentation explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in the user documentation explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock and fire replacement components in mains circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety approvals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To
374. ntrol For the RS 232 interface you can use only the SCPI language to program the instrument Ethernet interface 6221 only When using the Ethernet interface you must manually set the IP address Ethernet gateway and subnet mask if DHCP is not used The MAC address is fixed and cannot be changed by the user For the Ethernet interface you can use only the SCPI language to program the instru ment Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 3 Languages For the GPIB interface there are two programming languages to choose from e SCPI language 488 2 KI 220 DDC language NOTE For the RS 232 and Ethernet interfaces only the SCPI language can be used to program the in strument When the RS 232 or Ethernet interface is selected the language automatically defaults to SCPI SCPI language Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is fully supported by the GPIB RS 232 and Ethernet interfaces DDC language The Model 622x implements most DDCs device dependent commands available in the Keithley Model 220 current source The available commands are provided in Section 15 See the Model 220 Instruction Manual for details on operation This manual is available for download at www keithley com NOTE The unit will reset if the language is changed SC PI or KI 220 DDC Interface selection and configuration When you select enable a new interface the presen
375. nts can be included for each buffer location READing TSTamp UNITs RNUMber SOURce COMPliance and AVOLt age Elements in the list must be separated by a comma At least one element must in the list Elements not listed will not be included in response message for TRACe DATA As an alternative to listing the data elements the DEFault or ALL parameter can be used DEFault selects the READing and TSTamp elements and ALL selects all seven elements NOTE Details on data elements are provided in Section 13 7 Buffer statistics read command CALC2 DATA Use this read command to read the result of the calculation If there is a significant amount of data in the buffer some statistic operations may take too long and cause a bus timeout error To avoid this send CALC2 DATA and then wait for the MAV message available bit in the Sta tus Byte Register to set before addressing the Model 622x talk See Section 6 for details Return to Section 6 topics 7 Wave Functions 6221 Only Section 7 topics Overview page 7 2 Section overview page 7 2 Wave function overview page 7 2 Wave function characteristics page 7 3 Setting waveform parameters page 7 4 Editing parameters page 7 4 Amplitude and offset editing page 7 4 Amplitude page 7 5 Frequency page 7 6 Offset page 7 6 Duty cycle page 7 7 Amplitude units page 7 7 Phase marker page 7 9 Duration page 7 10 Arbitrary waveforms page 7 10 Using the
376. o 0mA SOUR PDEL WIDT 500e 6 Sets pulse width to 500us SOUR PDEL SDEL 100e 6 Sets source delay to 100us SOUR PDEL COUN 200 Sets pulse count to 200 SOUR PDEL RANG BEST Selects the best source range SOUR PDEL INT 10 Sets pulse interval to 10 PLC SOUR PDEL SWE OFF Disables sweep function SOUR PDEL LME 2 Set for two low pulse measurements TRAC POIN 200 Sets buffer to 200 points SOUR PDEL ARM Arms Pulse Delta INIT IMM Starts Pulse Delta measurements A Trace points specifies the size of the buffer Buffer size should be the same value as Pulse Delta count See Section 6 for details on all buffer com mands B Theinitiate command starts Pulse Delta readings After the specified finite number of Pulse Delta readings are performed Pulse Delta will stop run ning At this point another initiate command will re start Pulse Delta New Pulse Delta readings will overwrite the old Pulse Delta readings in the Model 6221 buffer If the INFinity count is set Pulse Delta will run continuously If the buffer fills Pulse Delta readings will stop being stored even though Pulse Delta continues to run 6 Read Pulse Delta readings While Pulse Delta is running the latest Model 2182A Pulse Delta reading can be read by the Model 6221 using the following command SENS DATA Reads the latest Pulse Delta reading Return to Section 5 topics 5 48 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 622
377. o 1GQ 1 nSiemen DELTA MODE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS and DIFFERENTIAL CONDUCTANCE Controls Keithley Model 2182A Nanovoltmeter at up to 24Hz reversal rate 2182 at up to 12Hz Source Notes 1 Settling times are specified into a resistive load with a maximum resistance equal to 2V Ifullscale of range See manual for other load conditions Settling times to 0 1 of final value are typically lt 2x of 1 settling times Noise current into lt 100Q RMS Noise 10Hz 20MHz 2nA 20mA Range Less than 1mVrms 5mVp p into 50 2 load Typical values are non warranted apply at 23 C represent the 50 percentile and are provided solely as useful information HW 1 17 05 Rev B Page of 2 KEITHLEY Fae ikea 44133 SPEC 6220 DATE D DATE 6 11 04 CKD DATE SPECIFICATIONS BRUNING 40 21 62198 SBG 6220 Programmable Current Source GENERAL SPECIFIC COMMON MODE VOLTAGE 250V rms DC to 60Hz COMMON MODE ISOLATION gt 10 Q lt 2 SOURCE OUTPUT MODES Fixed DC level Memory List REMOTE INTERFACE IEEE 488 and RS 232C SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments DDC command language compatible with Keithley Model 220 PASSWORD PROTECTION 11 characters DIGITAL INTERFACE Handler Interface Start of test end of test 3 category bits 5V 300mA supply Digital I O 1 trigger input 4 TTL Relay Drive outputs 33V 500m lt A diode clamped OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Teflon insulated 3 lug triax connector for
378. o Appendix topics C 16 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual RL Remote Local Function RL1 defines the ability of the instrument to be placed in the remote or local modes E Bus Driver Type The instrument has open collector bus drivers E1 TE Extended Talker Function The instrument does not have extended talker capabilities TEO LE Extended Listener Function The instrument does not have extended lis tener capabilities LEO Return to Appendix topics D TEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Appendix topics Introduction page D 2 D 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Introduction Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The IEEE 488 2 standard requires specific information about how the Model 622x implements the standard Paragraph 4 9 of the IEEE 488 2 standard Standard 488 2 1987 lists the documentation requirements Table D 1 provides a summary of the requirements and provides the information or references the manual for that information Table D 2 lists the coupled command used by the Model 622x The Model 622x complies with SCPI version 1996 0 The tables in Section 14 list the SCPI confirmed commands and the non SCPI commands implemented by the Model 622x Table D 1 IEEE 488 documentation requirements Requirements Description or Reference 1 IEEE 488 Interface Function Codes 2 Behavior of 622x when the address is set out side the ran
379. odel 622x uses two interfaces for communications It uses the RS 232 to communicate with the Model 2182 2182A and it uses the GPIB or Ethernet Model 6221 only to communicate with the PC Configure the Model 622x for communications as follows 1 RS 232 On the Model 622x press the COMM key and then select RS 232 from the communications setup menu a Setthe BAUD rate to 19 2K b Set FLOW CTRL flow control to NONE Press the ENTER key The Model 622x will reboot if RS 232 was not the previously selected communications interface For details on RS 232 configuration for the Model 622x see Section 10 2 GPIB or Ethernet The GPIB or the Ethernet Model 6221 only must be the selected interface to allow communications with the PC On the Model 622x press the COMM key and then select GPIB or ETHERNET 6221 only from the communications setup menu GPIB Set the IEEE 488 address 0 to 30 Ethernet 6221 Set the IP Gateway Subnet and DHCP After configuring the GPIB or Ethernet press ENTER The configured communications interface will be selected and the Model 622x will reboot See Section 10 for details on configuring the GPIB and Ethernet Arming process After a delta test is configured it must be armed before it can be run The details to configure arm and run each delta test are provided in Part 2 page 5 20 of this section The arming operations that are common to all three delta tests Delta Pulse Delta a
380. odes 13 11 Performance Verification Connections for DC current output accuracy 200nA to 100mA ranges 16 6 Connections for DC current output accuracy 2nA and 20nA ranges 16 7 Connections for compliance accuracy 20 0000400 16 8 Connections for waveform function amplitude flatness sess 16 9 Connections for waveform function frequency accuracy 16 10 17 Figure 17 1 Figure 17 2 Figure 17 3 Figure 17 4 C Figure C 1 Figure C 2 E Figure E 1 Figure E 2 Figure E 3 Figure E 4 Figure E 5 Figure E 6 Figure E 7 Calibration Connections for current source calibration 200nA to 100mA ranges 17 8 Connections for current source calibration 2nA and 20nA ranges 17 9 Connections for compliance calibration 17 11 Connections for guard calibration sess 17 12 IEEE 488 Bus Overview IEEE 488 bus configuration nennen C 4 IEEE 488 handshake 6 Applications Resistivity measurement test system 8 E 3 Diode characterization test system esses eene E 4 ewe m E 5 BJT characterization test system E 6 BJT collector family curves 2 ennemi E 6 pepe sortes
381. offset 0 to 105mA AMPL UNIT Select amplitude units PEAK or RMS Front panel only DUTY CYCLE Enter duty cycle 0 to 100 square and ramp only PH MKR Select phase marker and line STATE Turn phase marker ON or OFF OUTPUT POINT 0 to 360 OUTPUT LINE Set trigger output line OFF 1 to 6 DURATION Set duration of waveform INFINITE Continuous waveform SET TIME Set duration in time 0 001s to 999999 999s SET CYCLES Set duration in cycles 0 001 to 99999999900 RANGING Select ranging for selected wave function BEST FIXED Select best range based on wave amplitude FIXED Stay on fixed range when waveform is armed MORE Expand to show additional menu items TRIG MODE Configure low jitter external waveform triggering MAN BUS Disable external trigger mode default NONE Enables external trigger mode with no line selected TLNK 1 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 1 2 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 2 3 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 3 4 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 4 5 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 5 6 Enables external trigger on trigger link line 6 RE TRIG Configure response to external retriggering IGNORE TRIG Ignore subsequent triggers while outputting a wave RESTART IMMEDIATELY Restart waveform immediately upon each trigger INACTIVE VAL Set output value before and after triggered waveforms Arbitrary waveforms can o
382. oint sweep from 1mA to 10mA Lo Scale 10 Stop 10 5 6234 3 1623 Log Points 5 1 7783 Sweep delay is the same for each step Return to Section 4 topics 4 6 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The programmable parameters for a log sweep include the start and stop current levels the number of measurement points for the sweep and the sweep delay The specified start stop and point parameters determine the logarithmic step size for the sweep Step size for the sweep in Figure 4 3 is calculated as follows Log Step Size log10 stop log10 start Points 1 _ log10 10 log10 1 5 1 _ 1 0 4 0 25 Thus the five log steps for this sweep are 0 0 25 0 50 0 75 and 1 00mA The actual current source levels at these points are listed in Table 4 1 the current level is the anti log of the log step Table 4 1 Logarithmic sweep points Measure Source level point Log step mA Point 1 0 1 Point 2 0 25 1 7783 Point 3 0 50 3 1623 Point 4 0 75 5 6234 Point 5 1 0 10 When this sweep is triggered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start current source level 1mA and sweep through the symmetrical log points and then remain at the last point when the sweep is done The time duration at each step is determined by the sweep delay Custom sweeps This sweep type lets you configure a customized sweep Programmable parame ters include the number of measure
383. ollowing single pole low pass filter response Fadb 1 21RC Again the only real limitation is the maximum settling time response that can be tolerated which in this case would be approximately five RC time constants ST 5RC Where Ris in Ohms C is in Farads and ST is the settling time in seconds to approximately 1 of the final settled value For additional higher frequency attenuation of noise a ferrite can be inserted in the Hi and Lo sides that will act as a resistor at the higher noise frequencies to attenuate the noise spikes in the 1MHz and higher range Low current applications For the other extreme where high DUT impedances are used along with the nA current ranges the capacitance will have a large effect on settling time Therefore capacitance in the filter circuit should be in the 10pF to 1nF range to achieve a response time that is tolerable In this case minimizing the capacitance is desired To help improve the filtering capability the series resistors in the Hi and or Lo sides will help reduce the overall noise coming out of the 622x These can be sized as large as needed and can be tolerated up to the point of the maximum voltage drop that is desired Return to Appendix topics E 10 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual For example when sourcing 2nA two 1 resistors one in the Hi side and one in the Lo side would contribute only 4mV of additional drop 2nA x 2MQ 4mV Two 1GQ resisto
384. olution TIMer Query timer interval TCONfigure DIRection lt name gt Control ARM source bypass SOURce or ACC ACCeptor DIRection Query ARM source bypass ASYNchronous ILINe lt NRf gt Set ARM input signal line 1 to 6 1 ILINe Query ARM input signal line OLINe lt NRf gt Set ARM output signal line 1 to 6 2 OLINe Query ARM output signal line OUTPut lt name gt Enable disable ARM output trigger TENTer NONE TEXit or NONE OUTPut Query ARM output trigger TRIGger Trigger layer commands 8 SEQuence 1 SOURce lt name gt Select event detector IMMediate or TLINk IMM SOURce Query selected event detector SIGNal Bypass TRIG control source TCONfigure DIRection lt name gt Control TRIG source bypass SOURce or ACC DIRection ASYNchronous ILINe lt NRf gt ACCeptor Query TRIG source bypass Set TRIG input signal line 1 to 6 1 Arm layer commands control entire sweep Trigger Layer commands control individual sweep steps Return to Section 14 topics 14 18 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 10 cont Trigger command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI ILINe Query TRIG input signal line lt NRf gt Set TRIG output signal line 1 to 6 2 OLINe Query TRIG output signal line OUTPut lt name gt Enable disable TRIG output trigger NONE SOURce 1 DELay or NONE OUTPut Qu
385. on and operation keys Top Row FILT PRES DC SWP COND DELTA 6220 V 6221 PULSE WAVE Middle Row COMM ADDR DISP TRIG UNITS RECALL 6220 lt gt 6221 AMPL FREQ Enables disables analog filter Enables disables the pre set source value Press CONFIG gt PRES to set the source value for PRES Selects DC current source function Arms the sweep function Press CONFIG gt SWP to configure the sweep Arms Differential Conductance Press CONFIG gt COND to configure Differential Conductance Arms Delta Press CONFIG gt DELTA to configure Delta Increments value Decrements value Arms Pulse Delta Press CONFIG gt PULSE to configure Pulse Delta Arms Wave mode Press CONFIG gt WAVE to configure Wave Configures communications GPIB RS 232 or Ethernet 6221 Can also press CONFIG gt COMM to configure communications Sets GPIB address Turns off display Press LOCAL or DISP to turn display back on Starts a sweep delta or wave 6221 test or causes a manual trigger event Press CONFIG gt TRIG to configure triggers Use to select measurement units for a delta function Can also press CONFIG gt UNITS to select measurement units Displays buffer readings and statistics Press CONFIG gt RECALL to access menu to clear the buffer Moves cursor blinking digit or menu item to the left Moves cursor blinking digit or menu item to the right Sets the amplitude for the wave
386. on or Reference Calibration query information Trigger macro for DDT Macro information Response to IDN identification Storage area for PUD and PUD Resource description for and Effects of RST and SAV TST information Status register structure Sequential or overlapped commands 23 Operation complete messages Section 17 Not applicable Not applicable See Common Commands in Section 12 Not applicable Not applicable See Common Commands in Section 12 See Common Commands in Section 12 See Status Structure in Section 11 All are sequential except INIT which is overlapped OPC OPC and WAI see Common Commands in Section 12 Table D 2 Coupled commands Sending Changes To SOUR DELT HIGH lt value gt SOUR DELT LOW lt value gt HIGH value Return to Appendix topics D 4 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Appendix topics Appendix topics Calibration source page E 2 Resistivity measurements page E 3 Diode characterization page E 4 Transistor characterization page E 5 External user supplied filter page E 7 Compliance overshoot prevention page E 11 E Applications E 2 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration source The Model 622x with its high accuracy can be used as a current calibra
387. on reg ister an event register and an event enable register A condition register is a read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating condi tions of the instrument When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset When an event register bit is set and its cor responding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the status byte register Queues The Model 622x uses an output queue and an error queue The response messages to query commands are placed in the output queue As vari ous programming errors and status messages occur they are placed in the error queue When a queue contains data it sets the appropriate summary bit of the status byte register Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 11 1 Model 622x status mode structure Questionable Event Registers Event Enable Register Event Register Condition Register Power Calibration Always Zero CONDition EVENI ENABle Output Queue ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Status Structure 11 3 Logical OR Error Queue Service Status Request Byte Enable Register Register Standard Event Registers Event Eve
388. onductance When using the repeating filter the actual step size run for the test is the programmed step size divided by the filter count Step Size repeating filter Programmed Step Size Filter Count For example assume the programmed step size is 10A and the Filter Count is 10 When the Differential Conductance test is run the actual step size will be 1A 10pA 10 Return to Section 6 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Averaging Filter Math and Buffer 6 5 Figure 6 1 Digital filter types moving and repeating A Moving filter count 10 Conversion 10 Conversion Conversion 12 9 1 1 e Reading e Reading 11 e 12 Conversion 20 Conversion 30 19 29 18 28 17 27 16 26 15 Reading e 425 Reading 14 2 e 24 3 13 23 12 22 Conversion 1 Conversion 11 Conversion 21 Filter window The averaging filter uses a noise window to control filter threshold As long as the signal remains within the selected window A D conversions continue to be placed in the stack If the signal changes to a value outside the window the filter resets and the filtering process starts over The noise window which is expressed as a percentage of measurement range allows a faster response time to large signal step changes e g sweep step A reading conversion outside the plus or minus noise window fills the filter stack immediately If the noise does not exceed the selected wind
389. ong with clean foam tipped swabs or a clean soft brush Clean the areas as explained in the next tip Toclean contaminated areas use methanol and clean foam tipped swabs After cleaning a large area you may want to flush the area with methanol Blow dry with dry nitrogen gas After cleaning the test fixture and any other cleaned devices or test circuits should be allowed to dry in a 122 F 50 C low humidity environ ment for several hours Return to Section 2 topics 2 24 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 2 topics 3 DC Current Source Operation Section 3 topics Current source output capabilities page 3 2 Source ranges page 3 2 Compliance page 3 3 Output power source or sink page 3 3 Output response page 3 5 Setting source and compliance page 3 9 Source and compliance editing page 3 9 Sourcing current page 3 14 Remote programming source output commands page 3 16 NOTE Supplied example software allows you to control a Model 622x from any PC using simple mouse clicks through a virtual front panel For details see Using the example software on page 10 35 3 2 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Current source output capabilities Nine ranges to source current from 100fA to 105mA Compliance can be set from 0 1V to 105V in 10mV steps Maximum output power is 11W Four quadrant source and sink source operation
390. ons page 10 31 Ethernet settings page 10 33 Using the example software page 10 35 10 2 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Selecting and configuring an interface Interfaces The Model 6220 supports two built in remote interfaces GPIB interface RS 232 interface The Model 6221 supports three built in remote interfaces GPIB interface e RS 232 interface Ethernet interface You can communicate to the Model 622x using one interface at a time At the fac tory the GPIB bus is selected The interface selection is stored in non volatile memory it does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset NOTE Even if the GPIB or Ethernet interface is selected you can still use SYST COMM SER SEND SYST COMM SER ENTer to send and receive commands to another instrument through the Model 622x RS 232 interface See Remote inter face configuration commands on page 10 6 GPIB interface The GPIB is the IEEE 488 interface The Model 622x must be assigned a unique primary address At the factory the address is set to 12 but it can be set to any value from 0 to 30 However the address cannot conflict with the address assigned to other instruments in the system You can use either the SCPI or KI 220 DDC Model 220 DDC emulation language to program the instru ment RS 232 interface When using the Model 622x RS 232 interface you must set baud rate terminator and flow co
391. or Standard B4 page 11 11 203 Command protected Standard B4 page 11 11 200 Execution error Standard B4 page 11 11 171 Invalid expression Standard B5 page 11 11 170 Expression error Standard B5 page 11 11 161 Invalid block data Standard B5 page 11 11 160 Block data error Standard B5 page 11 11 154 String too long Standard B5 page 11 11 151 Invalid string data Standard B5 page 11 11 150 String data error Standard B5 page 11 11 148 Character data not allowed Standard B5 page 11 11 144 Character data too long Standard B5 11 11 141 Invalid character data Standard B5 page 11 11 140 Character data error Standard B5 page 11 11 124 many digits Standard B5 page 11 11 123 Exponent too large Standard B5 page 11 11 121 Invalid character in number Standard B5 page 11 11 120 data error Standard B5 page 11 11 113 Undefined header Standard B5 page 11 11 112 mnemonic too long Standard B5 page 11 11 111 Header separator error Standard B5 page 11 11 110 Command header error Standard B5 page 11 11 109 parameter Standard B5 page 11 11 108 Parameter not allowed Standard B5 page 11 11 105 GET not allowed Standard B5 page 11 11 104 Data type error Standard B5 page 11 11 102 Syntax error Standard B5 page 11 11 101 Invalid character Standard B5 page 11 11 100 Command error Standard B5 page 11 11 B 4 E
392. or disable Compliance Abort 2 0 lt b gt 0 or OFF 1 or ON SOURce 1 DELTa ARM Arms Delta SOURce 1 DELTa ARM Queries Delta arm 1 armed 0 not armed 1 Use the NVPResent command to determine if a suitable Model 2182 21824 with the correct firmware revision is properly connected to the RS 232 port This query com mand can be used for the system configuration shown in Figure 5 2B on page 5 5 2 See Configuration settings on page 5 24 for details on these settings 3 After setting up Delta using the above setup commands the ARM command arms Delta During the arming process the Model 622x communicates with the Model 2182 21824 Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 24 When armed Delta will start when the Model 6221 is triggered Delta can be un armed by sending the following command SOURce SWEep ABORt The query form for the arm command SOUR DELT ARM is used determine if Delta is armed A returned 1 indicates that Delta is armed A 0 indicates that Delta is not armed If the Model 6221 is already armed for a another action e g Differential Conductance or Pulse Delta the Delta arm command will un arm the other action and arm Delta Return to Section 5 topics 5 32 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Pulse Delta Use the Keithley Model 2182A with the Model 6221 to run Pulse Delta
393. or when trying to measure a 10MO DUT Half the sourced current 5 flows through the DUT and the other half flows through the voltmeter The result is a voltage reading of 50V instead of the expected 100V A higher impedance DUT results in even more error while a lower impedance DUT results in less error A technique to eliminate the loading factor is to make the measurement at the banana jack Guard terminal As shown in Figure 2 9B there is no loading on the DUT All of the sourced current 10uA is applied to the DUT The 100V across the DUT is also seen at the Guard terminal Accuracy for Guard is typically 1mV Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 13 Cable Guard which has less noise than banana jack Guard can also be used to measure voltage as previously described For best accuracy it is recommended that banana jack Guard be used NOTE For the Keithley Model 2182 2182A Nanovoltmeter the input impedance for the 100V range is 10M Therefore for higher impedance DUT voltage should be measured at banana jack Guard or Cable Guard Figure 2 9 Using banana jack Guard to measure voltage A 50 measure error due to voltmeter loading 450V Low Impedance Voltmeter Vout 1 5pA x 10MQ 50V Vg 1 R 5pA x 10MO 50V Loading Error i Vnus Vpur 50V 100V 50 B Using banana jack Guard to measure voltage
394. orm duration TIME lt NRf gt Set waveform time duration seconds 100e 9 INFinity to 999999 999 or INFinity TIME Query waveform time duration CYCLes lt NRf gt Set waveform duration in cycles 1e 3 to INFinity 99999999900 or INFinity CYCLes Query waveform duration in cycles ARM Arm waveform function INITiate Start waveform output ABORt Abort waveform output EXTRig Waveform external trigger commands ENABle b Enables disables mode to externally trigger the OFF waveform generator lt b gt ON or OFF ENABle Query if external waveform trigger is enabled ILINe lt NRf gt Specify trigger link input trigger line 0 lt NRf gt 0 none or 1 to 6 ILINe Query trigger link line IGNore lt b gt Sets whether or not to restart waveform upon OFF retriggering lt b gt ON or OFF IGNore Query retrigger mode IWALue lt NRf gt Sets inactive value to output before after 0 00 IVALue waveform lt NRf gt 1 to 1 Query inactive value Available with firmware revision A03 and later Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 13 Table 14 7 Status command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI STATus Commands status registers Note 1 117 MEASurement Measurement event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the enable register
395. ors in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with impedance limited sources NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective devices to limit fault current and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the connecting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separate main input power disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator 11 07 For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting cables or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth g
396. ously locked out with the LLO command GET Group Execute Trigger The GET command is used to trigger devices to perform a specific action that depends on device configuration for example take a reading Although GET is an addressed command many devices respond to GET without addressing Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted The commands include LAG Listen Address Group These listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address and are used to address devices to listen The actual command byte is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 TAG Talk Address Group The talk commands are derived from the primary address by ORing the address with 40 Talk commands are used to address devices to talk SCG Secondary Command Group Commands in this group provide addi tional addressing capabilities Many devices including the Model 622x do not use these commands Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 11 Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted UNL Unlisten Listeners are placed in the listener idle state by the UNL com mand UNT Untalk Any previously commanded talkers will be placed in the talker idle
397. ow the reading is based on the average of the reading conversions If the noise does exceed the selected win dow the reading is a single reading conversion and new averaging starts from this point The window can only be set remotely and can be assigned any value from 0 00 to 10 The filter window is expressed as a percent of range For example with the Model 2182 2182A on the 10V range a 10 window means that the filter win dow is 1V Return to Section 6 topics 6 6 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual The noise window for the two filter types are compared in Figure 6 2 For the fil ters using the Filter Window 1 it also shows a window violation occurring after the sixth A D conversion When the voltage makes the transition from Voltage A to Voltage B the window violation causes the A A D conversions to be flushed out of the stack and replaced with copies of the first B A D conversion NOTE The noise window cannot be set from the front panel It can only be set using remote programming Filter example Filter Type Moving Filter Window 0 01 of range Filter Count 10 Ten readings fill the stack to yield a filtered reading Assume the next reading which is the 11 is outside the window reading will be processed displayed however the stack will be loaded with that same reading Each subsequent valid reading will then displace one of the loaded readings in the stack The
398. ower read ing see Peak power and average power on page 5 34 for details For remote operation the returned reading string for a Delta Pulse power reading does indicate if it is a peak or average reading Use the UNIT POWer command see Table 5 1 to determine if the power reading is peak or average Return to Section 5 topics 5 18 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 3 When recalling buffer statistics such as Average or Standard Deviation for Pulse Delta power readings only the power units for the first stored reading is checked to determine if it is a Peak or Average power reading The result of the buffer statistic will have the same units W for Average or Wp for Peak as the first stored reading Error and status messages Common errors associated with remote programming for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance are listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Error status codes and messages Code and Message Description Remedy 221 Settings Conflict Occurs when sending the NVPResent command with the RS 232 interface selected for the Model 622x Occurs when an ARM command is sent while a sweep or a delta test is running Occurs when attempting to start Pulse Delta while on a FIXED range that is too low Select a different interface and then send query Do not send an ARM command while a sweep or delta test is already running Select a
399. page 1 14 Power up sequence page 1 15 Beeper and keyclick page 1 16 Source preset page 1 17 Disabling the front panel page 1 17 1 Getting Started Menus page 1 18 CONFIG menus page 1 18 Direct access menus page 1 19 Editing controls page 1 20 Source and compliance editing page 1 20 Menu navigation page 1 20 Password page 1 22 Interface selection page 1 22 GPIB and language page 1 23 RS 232 page 1 23 Ethernet Model 6221 only page 1 23 Error and status messages page 1 22 Default settings page 1 22 Front panel setups page 1 25 Remote operation setups page 1 25 SCPI programming page 1 22 Optional command words page 1 29 Query commands page 1 29 1 2 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Introduction Capabilities and features Source DC current from 0 1pA to 105mA Voltage compliance limit from 0 1V to 105V in 10mV steps 11W four quadrant sink or source operation duty cycle limitation for high power sink Analog filter to slow down output response Triax cable guarding to optimize output response speed and reduce leak age currents in high impedance test circuits Banana jack guard output for voltage measurements Sweep functions linear staircase logarithmic staircase and custom Waveform functions 6221 only sine square ramp and arbitrary function generator Five user saved setups Delta testing when used with the Keithley Model 2182 or 2182A Delta Uses
400. page 9 5 SOT line page 9 6 Simplified schematic page 9 6 Sink mode controlling external devices page 9 6 Source mode logic control page 9 8 Setting digital output lines page 9 8 SCPI commands force digital I O pattern page 9 9 9 2 Limit Test and Digital I O Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Limit test Overview As shown in Figure 9 1 there is one limit test that can be performed on a DUT Limit 1 is used to test whether or not the Model 622x current source is in or out of compliance If the source is not in compliance limit test PASS all four lines of the digital I O port will be low The Model 622x be programmed to apply a specific 4 bit fail pattern on the digital I O lines Digital I O connector on page 9 5 if the source is in compliance limit test FAIL Figure 9 1 Limit 1 test compliance Fail Limit 1 Test EUER S Compliance Not In Compliance In Compliance j Programming limit testing The example below shows how to enable limit testing and set a failure pattern of 9 1001 The FAIL query is also used to determine if the limit test has passed or failed CALC3 LIM STAT ON Enable limit test CALC3 LIM SOUR2 9 Set fail pattern to 9 1001 CALC3 LIM FAIL Query pass fail of limit test With the above programming a binary pattern of 1001 will appear on the digital I O lines if the limit test fails source in compliance and the FAIL query will return
401. pattern of the output To determine the value add up the decimal weight values for the desired HI lines Output HI Line 4 3 2 1 Decimal Weight E 4 2 h For example to set output lines 3 and 1 HI 0101 bit pattern set the output value to 5 4 1 Return to Section 9 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Limit Test and Digital O 9 9 For example send these commands to force a digital I O pattern of 0101 5 by remote CALC3 FORC STAT ON Enable pattern force CALC3 FORC PATT 5 Set I O to 5 0101 SCPI commands force digital I O pattern Digital I O commands are listed in Table 9 3 Additional information for each com mand is provided in notes that follow the tables Table 9 3 Digital I O commands Command Description Default CALCulate3 FORCe STATe lt b gt Enable disable I O pattern force state 0 b 1 or 0 CALCulate3 FORCe PATTern NRf Set I O pattern 2 15 lt NRf gt 0 to 15 1 CALC3 FORC STAT lt b gt Enable disable I O pattern force state If true then ignore all limit results from the limit commands page 9 3 and take the CALC3 FORC PATT value described below and force it on the digital output lines When turned on with the FORCe STATe the FORCe PAT Tern supersedes any results from the compliance limit described in Limit test on page 9 2 2 CALC3 FORC PATT lt NRf gt Set I O pattern Pattern to be forced on the digital o
402. pection Inspection for damage The Model 622x was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before ship ment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment Before removing the Model 622x from the bag observe the following handling precautions Handling precautions Always grasp the Model 622x by the covers After removing the Model 622x from its anti static bag inspect it for any obvious signs of physical damage Report any such damage to the ship ping agent immediately When the Model 622x is not installed and connected keep the unit in its anti static bag and store it in the original packing carton Package content The following items are included with every Model 622x order Model 622x current source with line cord Protective triax Shield Cap CAP 28 1 e 237 ALG 2 Triax cable terminated with alligator clips one end Model 8501 Trigger Link cable CA 351 null modem serial cable e CA 180 3A Ethernet crossover cable Model 6221 only Accessories as ordered Certificate of calibration Model 622x User s Manual P N 622x 900 00 Product information CD ROM that contains PDFs of the 622X User s and Reference Man
403. pical way to enter the edit mode is to press the EDIT key Details on Source and compliance editing are provided on page 3 9 Menu navigation When the Model 622x is not in the edit mode EDIT annunciator off the editing controls see Figure 1 3 are used to navigate menus to make selections and or set values Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 1 3 Menu editing keys 6220 Editing Keys Cursor Keys 6221 Editing Keys Rotary Knob amp Cursor Keys Getting Started 1 21 Value Adjust Keys CT RANGE Adjust Value Adjust Keys RANGE 4 V RANGE Z PUSH TO ENTER lt J cursor gt Numeric Entry Keys 0123456789 0000 Numeric Entry Keys 0123456789 0000 Cursor Keys TED left right ENTER EXIT Keys ENTER EXIT Keys EXIT ENTER Model 6220 menu navigation After entering a menu structure use the editing keys as follows Selecting menu items 1 Use the Cursor Keys to place the blinking cursor on a menu item to be opened or selected 2 Press the ENTER key to select an item or open a sub menu 3 Use the EXIT key to cancel a change or back out of the menu structure Setting a value There are two ways to adjust a value value adjust or numeric entry Both methods use the following editing techniques To set a value to zero press the 0000 numeric entry key To toggle the polarity of a value pre
404. pics 9 4 Limit Test and Digital I O Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 9 2 Limit test fail pattern values Value Out 4 Out 3 Out 2 Out 1 0 L L L L 1 L L L H 2 L L H L 3 L L H H 4 L H L L 5 L H L H 6 L H H L 7 L H H H 8 H L L L 9 H L L H 10 H L H L 11 H L H H 12 H H L L 13 H H L H 14 H H H L 15 H H H H L Grounded gt 3 Return to Section 9 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Limit Test and Digital O 9 5 Digital I O port Digital I O connector The Model 622x Digital I O port is a male DB 9 connector located on the rear panel The port location and pin designations are shown in Figure 9 2 The four active low digital output lines and one input line are used to control external circuitry Figure 9 2 Digital I O port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 123465 Digital Output 1 Digital Output 2 Digital Output 3 Digital Output 4 6789 VEXT DIGITAL I O SOT 5V Fused Not Used Start of Test SOT provides Alternate Digital Ground Method of Triggering See Section 8 Typical applications for the digital I O port include the following External device control Each digital output can be used as a control switch for an external device i e relay circuit Each output line can sink up to 500mA Drive voltage is provided by an external source 5V to 33V to pin 5 VEXT Logic Control The four digital outputs can be used as inputs to logic devi
405. pics 10 12 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Programming syntax The following paragraphs cover syntax for both common commands and SCPI commands For more information see the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter NRf required RST No parameter used DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Parameter lt b gt required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used Put at least one space between the command word and the parameter Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brackets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in the program message For example INITiate IMMediate These brackets indicate that IMMediate is implied optional and does not need to be used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways INITiate or INITiate IMMediate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional command words in your program do not include the brackets Parameter types The following are some of the common parameter types b Boolean Used to enable or disable an instrument opera tion 0 or OFF disables the operation and 1 or ON enables the operation DISPlay ENABle ON Enab
406. plitude to 25mA SOUR WAVE OFFS 0 Set offset to 0 SOUR WAVE PMAR STAT OFF Turn off phase marker SOUR WAVE DUR TIME 20 20 second duration SOUR WAVE RANG BEST Select best fixed source range Arm and trigger the waveform turn on output SOUR WAVE ARM Arm waveform SOUR WAVE INIT Turn on output trigger waveform To stop generating the waveform and turn the source output off before the duration elapses send this command SOUR WAVE ABOR Stop generating waveform Return to Section 7 topics 7 26 Wave Functions 6221 Only Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Programming an externally triggered waveform 1 Restore defaults with this command RST Configure the desired waveform using one of the procedures previously described for a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform Configure the low jitter external trigger mode Examples The following commands configure the selected waveform to be output following each pulse received on trigger link line 1 Ifa subsequent trigger pulse is received while the waveform is being output the Model 6221 will immediately terminate the current wave and restart the waveform In between waveforms the unit will output zero current SOUR WAVE EXTR ENAB ON Turn on external trigger mode SOUR WAVE EXTR ILIN 1 Use TLINK Line 1 as input trigger SOUR WAVE EXTR IGN OFF Restart wave on retrigger attempts SOUR WAVE EXTR IVAL 0 00 Outputzero current between waves
407. ponse message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the output queue The response message is sent from the output queue to the computer Return to Section 10 topics 10 18 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple command messages on page 10 16 the multiple response messages for all the queries are sent to the computer when the Model 622x is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order that the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by commas The following example shows the response message for a program message that contains four single item query commands 0 I 1 0 Response Message Terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The following example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 Always tell the Model 622x what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instru ment to the computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the Model 622x to talk GPIB only Rule2 The complete response message must be received by the computer
408. ques tionable calibration constant was detected during the power up sequence This error will clear after successful calibration of the Model 622x Error status code 610 Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 17 Figure 11 7 Questionable event status Cal Power B15 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Cal Power Questionable Event B15 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Questionable Condition Register Register 9 To Questionable Cal Power Questionable Summary Bit of xm 12 5 Event Enable Status QSB B15 B9 8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Register Byte Register Cal Questionable Calibration amp Logical AND Power Questionable Power OR Logical OR Condition registers As Figure 11 1 shows each status register set except the standard event register set has a condition register A condition register is a real time read only register that continuously updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instru ment For example while the Model 622x is in the idle state bit B10 Idle of the operation condition register will be set When the instrument is taken out of idle bit B10 clears The commands to read the condition registers are listed in Table 11 4 For details on reading registers see Reading registers on page 11 6 Table 11 4 Common and SCPI commands condition registers Command
409. r 2 2 2 AvgCurr Where AvgCurr is the Average Current corresponding to a given Differential Conductance reading X Y and Z are the three current levels for the Differential Conductance reading With Average Voltage and Average Current known calculated by the Model 622x power is then calculated as follows Power AvgVolt x AvgCurr Configuration settings Differential Conductance settings from the front panel are described as follows These parameters are set from the DIFF CONDUCTANCE menu that is accessed by pressing the CONFIG key and then the COND key The equivalent remote programming commands to configure Differential Conduc tance are summarized in Table 5 5 Step The step size specifies the size increment for each step of the sweep In Figure 5 14 the 10pA steps are shown by the dashed line If the step size is set to be larger than the start stop interval the step size will be readjusted to provide a 100 point Differential Conductance sweep Step is a magnitude and is therefore always set as a positive value Step can be set from 0 to 105mA The default step size is 1 Start The start level for the sweep applies to the middle step of the first cycle As shown in Figure 5 14 the start level is actually the second step of the sweep The start level can be set from 105mA to 105mA The default start level is 10UA Stop The stop level for the sweep applies to the mi
410. r Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlisten instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the trans fer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credibility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active controller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen 2 The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 Thelistener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for the next byte of data Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview C 3 Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is also referred to as the GPIB General Purpose Inter face Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer without using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines t
411. r Test DUT One way to avoid compliance overshoot is to set a compliance that is at least 2V above the expected static output voltage For example if the normal operating voltage across the load is 10V set the compliance to at least 12V Additional details on compliance overshoot and Compliance overshoot preven tion are provided on page E 11 Output power source or sink The maximum power output of the Model 622x is 11W The bipolar current source provides four quadrant source or sink operation When connected to a passive DUT the Model 622x operates as a source When connected to an active load e g external source capacitor the Model 622x can operate as a source or sink When operating as a source current is delivered to a test circuit The polarity of the current and the voltage seen at the output are the same both positive or both negative Return to Section 3 topics 3 4 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual When operating as a sink the Model 622x is dissipating power rather than sourc ing it The polarity of the current and voltage seen at the output is opposite one positive one negative An external source or an energy storage device such as a capacitor can force operation into the sink region Figure 3 1 shows examples of the Model 622x connected to an external source where it can operate as a source or sink For both examples the Model 622x is programmed to output 10mA When conne
412. r setup Restoring PRESet or RST default setups The SYSTem PRESet command returns Model 622x to the PRESET defaults and the RST command returns it to the RST defaults SYSTem PRESet Restore PRESET default setup RST Restore RST default setup Selecting power on setup The SYSTem POSetup command is used to select which setup to return to on power up SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup lt name gt RST PRESet SAVO SAV1 SAV2 SAV3 or SAVA Table 1 1 Front panel default settings Setting PRESET and RST Default Address ADDR No effect 12 at factory Amplitude AMPL 1 0mA Averaging Filter AVG Disabled Type Moving Count 10 Beeper Enabled Communications COMM No effect GPIB and address 12 See Section 10 for details set at factory Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 1 1 cont Front panel default settings Getting Started Setting PRESET and RST Default DELTA Unarmed I High 1mA I Low 1mA Delay 0 002s Count Infinite Compliance Abort No Differential Conductance COND Unarmed Start 10A Stop 10 Step 1 Delta 1 Delay 0 002s Cmpl Abort No Display DISP Enabled FILTER Disabled Frequency FREQ 1000 Hz MATH MX B disabled and M X B M Value 1 0 B Value 0 0 OUTPUT Off Response 6221 Fast Preset PRES 0 0mA disabled Pulse De
413. rd weblinks are a Please save orien are on premises or connected to the Current Test File Test file description and comments a Enter details to remember about this test here It will be saved with your test file Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 37 Figure 10 12 Typical instrument connection setup wizard File Edit Operate Tools Window Help Instrument Selection Select the current source model number si Select the nanovoltmeter model number Connection Configuration Select the interface you will be using Input instrument IP Address 1010 11 127 Select Network Card number default to zero v Make this instrument setup my default configuration Return to Section 10 topics 10 38 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 10 13 Typical virtual front panel File Edit Operate Tools Window Help se weBUPDATES TERRY ES Instrument Comn Pulsed Measurements 6220 Virtual Front Panel 6220 Virtual Instrument Front Panel First dick Take Control of Instrument Then use buttons and knobs below as vou would from the instrument front panel Connection uses settings on Instrument Communication Panel Return to Section 10 topics 11 Status Structure Section 11 topics Overview page 11 2 Clearing registers an
414. ree pulses low high and low are generated on the posi tive going edges of the first three power line cycles For the remaining power line cycles in the interval the output remains at the I Low level Figure 5 10 Pulse timing lt Interval 5 PLC One Pulse Delta Cycle 5 6 i Pulse i Width3 I High 4 Pulse Pulse Width Width 3 Low High Low E dL ES i One Line Cycle One Line Cycle i Power i Line gt Line Cycle One Line Cycle One Line Cycle Voltage Notes 1 I High can be set from 105mA to 105mA default is 1mA 2 l Low can be set from 105mA to 105mA default is OmA 3 Pulse Width can be set from 50us to 12ms default is 11045 4 One 60Hz power line cycle 16 667ms 1 60 One 50Hz power line cylce 20ms 1 50 5 With Interval set to 5 PLC power line cycles 60Hz One Pulse Delta cycle 83 33ms 5 60 50Hz One Pulse Delta cycle 100ms 5 50 6 Interval can be set from 5 to 999999 PLC default is 5 PLC Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 37 Sweep output The sweep feature of the Model 6221 can be used to output a series of pulses that allow the use of different levels for the high pulses Each high pulse returns to the programmed low pulse level The low level is the same for all pulses Like the Fixed output shown in Figure 5 1
415. rence Manual Getting Started 1 19 Models 6220 and 6221 CONFIG gt SWP opens CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu Section 4 CONFIG gt COND opens DIFF CONDUCTANCE menu Section 5 CONFIG gt DELTA opens CONFIGURE DELTA menu Section 5 CONFIG gt TRIG opens CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu Section 8 CONFIG gt RECALL opens CLEAR BUFFER menu Section 6 CONFIG gt MATH opens CONFIGURE MATH menu Section 6 Model 6221 only CONFIG gt PULSE opens CONFIG PULSE DELTA menu Section 5 CONFIG gt WAVE opens CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu Section 7 CONFIG gt OUTPUT opens OUTPUT RESPONSE menu Section 3 Direct access menus NOTE All of the following keys to open direct access menus except RECALL can also be opened by first pressing the CONFIG key Models 6220 and 6221 COMM opens COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu page 1 22 ADDR opens ADDRESS value menu for GPIB UNITS opens READING UNITS menu Section 3 RECALL opens menu for stored readings and statistics Section 6 SAVE opens SAVED SETUP MENU page 1 25 SETUP opens RESTORE SETUP menu page 1 25 TRIAX opens CONFIGURE TRIAX menu Section 2 MENU opens MAIN MENU see MAIN menu below Model 6221 AMPL opens menu to set AMPL value Section 7 FREQ opens menu to set FREQ frequency Section 7 MAIN menu The MAIN MENU is a direct access menu that is opened by pressing the MENU key Menu items include CAL TEST SERIAL and BEEPER Calibration CAL is cov
416. rent 2 10 Line frequency 1 14 Line power connection 1 14 Linear staircase sweep 4 4 LLO local lockout 10 23 LO banana jack 2 3 Logarithmic staircase sweep 4 5 Long form and short form versions 10 14 Math Commands 6 10 mX b and mX b 6 9 Measure action 8 6 Measurement event status 11 14 Measurement units 5 16 Menu navigation 1 20 Menus 1 18 CONFIG 1 18 Direct access 1 19 Multiple command messages 10 16 Multiple response messages 10 18 Q NAND 9 8 Network Interface Card 10 30 Operating boundaries 3 4 Operation event status 11 12 Optional command words 1 29 Output configurations 2 5 Output connectors 2 2 Output power 3 3 Output queue 11 20 Output response 3 5 Output triggers 8 7 Password 1 22 10 6 Phone number 1 3 Power module 1 12 Power switch 1 9 Power on setup 1 25 1 26 Power up 1 14 Sequence 1 15 PRESet default setup 1 25 Primary address 10 21 Program Message Terminator PMT 10 17 Program messages 10 15 Pulse Delta 5 2 5 32 Arming process 5 42 Configuration 5 39 Duty Cycle 5 39 Fixed output 5 36 Measurement units 5 34 Operation 5 44 Pulse Delta process 5 32 Setup commands 5 49 Sweep output 5 37 Triggering sequence 5 43 Query commands 1 29 10 14 Questionable event status 11 16 Queues 11 20 Rack mount kits 1 6 Read commands 5 14 5 15 Buffer 5 16 Compliance test result 5 15 Post math 5 15 Pre math 5 15 Rear panel summaries 1 7 Reference manual 1 7 REN remote enable 10
417. rigger Link Serial communications In order to perform Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance measure ments the Model 622x must communicate to the Model 2182 21824 over the serial RS 232 interface With serial communications properly configured and connected the Model 622x will automatically send setup commands to the Model 2182 2182A when Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is armed The Arming process is explained on page 5 11 Also readings from the Model 2182 21824 are automatically sent to the Model 622x to be processed into Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance read ings that are then stored in the buffer Return to Section 5 topics 5 6 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Figure 5 2 Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual System configurations for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance A Stand alone system front panel operation Keithley 622x Keithley GPIB or null modem 2182 2182A Ethernet 6221 RS 232 On ee Trigger Link Nanovoltmeter Current Source B PC control of 6220 21 IEEE 488 or Ethernet 6221 Keithley 622x Keithley 2182 2182A RS 232 On null modem GPIB or Ethernet 6221 Trigger Link Nanovoltmeter Current Source System connections WARNING Before making or breaking system connections the Models 622x and 2182 2182A and the PC must be turned off and the line cords must be disconne
418. rived from an instrument s pri mary address The primary address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set by rear panel DIP switches or programmed in from the front panel of the instrument The actual listen address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 For example if the primary address is 12 the actual listen address is 32 32 12 20 In a similar manner the talk address is obtained by ORing the primary address with 40 With the present example the talk address derived from a primary address of 12 would be 52 52 12 40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary addressing Secondary addresses lie in the range of 60 7F Note however that many devices including the Model 622x do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example if the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appro priate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location Return to Appendix topics C 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Figure C 1 IEEE 488 bus configuration Device 1 able to talk listen and control computer Device 2 able to talk and listen 622x Device 3 oy able to isten printer Device 4 only able to talk Bus lines Model
419. round Always make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating information and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with the same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock lfa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The A symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the documentation The A symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The N symbol on an instrument shows that the surface may be hot Avoid personal contact to preve
420. rrect Model 622x connector sure that a shorting connector is connected to the INTERLOCK connec tor or you will not be able to turn on the output for calibration See Section 2 for details on the interlock Make sure the test equipment and Model 622x calibration settings are correct Calibration procedures Front panel calibration Using the calibration menu Table 17 2 summarizes the main calibration menu To enter the menu press the MENU key select CAL then press ENTER Note that the calibration menus for the Models 6220 and 6221 are almost identical except that the Model 6221 menu has a WAVE calibration selection to calibrate the waveform generator while the Model 6220 does not Return to Section 17 topics 17 6 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 17 2 Calibration menu Menu selection Description UNLOCK Unlock calibration using PASSWORD Default password 006220 or 006221 EXECUTE Execute calibration steps SOURCE Calibrate current source for each range COMPLIANCE Calibrate voltage compliance GUARD Calibrate guard circuit WAVE Calibrate 6221 waveform generator VIEW DATES View next calibration and last calibration dates SAVE Save calibration constants and dates LOCK Lock out calibration CHANGE PASSWORD Change calibration password Front panel calibration procedure Step 1 Prepare for calibration 1 With the power off connect the DMM to the Model 62
421. rror and Status Messages Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Model Code Description Register Bit Reference 000 No error 4101 OPC Operation complete Standard BO page 11 11 4111 Output Interlock Asserted Measurement B1 11 14 112 Temperature limit exceeded Measurement B2 page 11 14 114 Source in compliance Measurement 11 14 121 Device calibrating Operation BO page 11 12 122 Sweep done Operation B1 page 11 12 4123 Sweep aborted Operation B2 page 11 12 124 Device sweeping Operation B3 page 11 12 4125 Wave started Operation B4 page 11 12 4126 Wave stopped Operation B7 page 11 12 171 Waiting in trigger layer Operation B5 11 12 172 Waiting in arm layer Operation B6 page 11 12 174 Re entering the idle layer Operation B10 page 11 12 180 Filter settled Operation B8 page 11 12 301 Reading overflow Measurement BO 11 14 306 Reading available event Measurement B5 page 11 14 307 Buffer user selectable event Trace Notify Measurement B6 page 11 14 308 Buffer available Measurement B7 11 14 309 Buffer half full Measurement B8 page 11 14 310 Buffer full Measurement B9 page 11 14 312 Buffer one quarter full Measurement B12 page 11 14 313 Buffer three quarters full Measurement B13 page 11 14 401 Not allowed with sweep armed Standard
422. rs would add only 4V of additional drop The Model 622x will still accurately drive the programmed current through the DUT The only difference required is that the voltage compliance would need to be set to a higher value to accommodate the additional voltage drops However keep in mind that in an open load condition the voltage on the DUT test leads will rise to the higher set compliance voltage The flexibility of adding a wide range of resistor and capacitor values in addition to the ferrite provides a wide range of options for a DUT and settling time require ments to aid in the overall reduction of noise Suggested filter circuit components Filter test box Pomona Electronics manufactures several different connection boxes suitable for the filter enclosure The examples in this application use the Model 2417 enclosure Another alternative enclosure that comes with two BNC Coax connectors is the Model 3231 This could be used for non guarded configura tions where high impedances are not used Use the Keithley Model 7078 TRX GND triax to BNC adapter to use this enclosure with the Model 622x Triax connectors Keithley Model 7078 TRX TBC bulkhead triax connectors can be used with the 2417 enclosure Of course any suitable panel mount triax connectors could be used Ferrite inductors Fair Rite Products Corp manufactures a wide range of prod ucts suitable for this application One specific part number used is Fair Rite Par
423. run 1 to 65536 or INF INFinity Query Delta count Return to Section 14 topics 14 10 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 6 cont Source command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI CABort lt b gt Enable to abort test on compliance ON or OFF OFF CABort Query compliance sweep abort state CSWitch lt b gt Enable cold switching mode ON or OFF OFF CSWitch Query cold switching state ARM Arm Delta ARM Query arm 1 Delta armed 0 not armed PDELta Pulse Delta operation 5 NVPResent Query connection to 2182A 1 yes 0 no HIGH lt NRf gt Set high pulse value amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 1e3 HIGH Query high pulse value LOW lt NRf gt Set low pulse value amps 105e 3 to 105e 3 0 LOW Query low pulse value WIDTh lt NRf gt Set pulse width seconds 50e 6 to 12e 3 110e 6 WIDTh Query pulse width SDELay lt NRf gt Set source delay seconds 16e 6 to 11 966e 3 16e 6 SDELay Query source delay COUNt lt NRf gt Set number of Pulse Delta readings to perform INF 1 to 65636 or INFinity COUNt Query Pulse Delta count RANGing lt NRf gt Select fixed pulse source range BEST or FlXed BEST RANGing Query fixed pulse source range lt NRf gt Set interval in PLCs for each pulse cycle 5 to 5 999999 INTerval Query interval SWEep Pulse Delta Sweep output STATe
424. s eene 10 7 Unprotected commands and queries sese 10 11 General bus commands ek ibas 10 22 RS 232 CONMECLOL pinout EEk EE 10 27 PC serial port pinout 10 28 hn amp d EERE E E A ER 10 34 Status Structure Common and SCPI commands reset registers and clear queues 11 4 SCPI command data formats for reading status registers 11 6 Common commands status byte and service request enable registers 11 10 Common and SCPI commands condition registers 222 2 11 17 Common and SCPI commands event registers sese 11 18 Common and SCPI commands event enable registers 11 19 SCPI commands error queue seen 11 21 Common Commands IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries sess 12 2 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes Display commands eseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne ennt nere enne 13 2 Format commands re aese te tee rie eiie eee qd 13 4 SCPI Reference Tables Calculate command summary 2 14 3 Display command summary sese nennen 14 5 Format command summary essere nennen mener 14 6 Output command summary
425. s performance The Model 622x must be operating in an environment where the ambient temperature does not exceed 50 C Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 13 CAUTION prevent damaging heat build up and thus ensure specified performance adhere to the following precautions The heat sink must be kept free of dust dirt and contami nates since its ability to dissipate heat could become impaired The cooling vents must be kept free of any obstructions DO NOT place any objects on the top cover Even partial blockage could impair proper cooling DO NOT position any devices adjacent to the Model 622x that force air heated or unheated into or onto its cooling vents or surfaces This additional airflow could compro mise accuracy performance For bench top use the Model 622x can be placed on a hard surface that is at ambient temperature The feet of the Model 622x will raise the chassis off the surface to allow adequate ventilation under the unit DO NOT use the Model 622x on a soft compliant surface like a carpet The Model 622x can be set on top of another instrument that is dissipating heat but additional spacing is required In order to maintain full power capability 1 75 of spacing is required The feet of the Model 622x only provide 0 625 5 8 of spacing Rack mounting requires 1U of vertical spacing at the top and bottom of the Model 622x 1U is a standard verti
426. s available for download at www keithley com Figure E 5 BJT collector family curves Ic Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Applications 7 External user supplied filter Based on load impedance and response time requirements a user supplied filter can be effective at reducing high frequency noise generated by the Model 622x current source This high frequency noise can drive the user s DUT Device Under Test in the 1MHz to 20MHz range and higher The filter circuitry is to be wired into a metal box that has two triax connectors mounted on it for input and output An example of such a filter box is shown Figure E 6 The input of the filter box is connected to the output of the Model 622x and the output of the filter box is connected to the DUT Figure E 6 Example filter box A Exterior view of filter box a B Interior view of filter box filter circuit wired in Return to Appendix topics E 8 Applications Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Typical filter circuits The basic passive components for a filter circuit are capacitors inductors resis tors and ferrites A ferrite inductor exhibits higher resistance at higher noise fre quencies Figure E 7A shows a typical filter circuit when using the Model 622x with output low connected to the inner shield of the triax connector Figure E 7B shows a typi cal filter circuit when using the Model 622x with Cable Guard connected to the in
427. s sent the Model 622x performs the following opera tions 1 Returns Model 622x to the RST default conditions see Default column of SCPI tables 2 Cancels all pending commands 3 Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC com mands E TRG trigger Send bus trigger to Model 622x Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to the Model 622x It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation The Model 622x reacts to this trigger if BUS is the programmed arm control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem Details on triggering are covered in Section 8 Return to Section 12 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Common Commands 12 5 Programming example Assuming the Models 622x and 2182A are configured to perform Delta measurements as explained in Section 5 the following com mand sequence will select the bus control source arm Delta and send the trigger command to start Delta measurements ARM SOUR BUS Selects the bus control source SOUR DELTa ARM Arms Delta INIT IMM Takes 622x out of idle TRG Triggers start of Delta measurements F TST self test query Run self test and read result Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the output queue When the Model 622x is addressed to talk the coded result is sent from the o
428. s set by the programmed number of sweep points or delta measurement points cycles Error status code 313 Return to Section 11 topics 11 16 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 11 6 Measurement event status Measurement Condition BQF BFL BHF BAV 55 omp Temp Int ROF Register qu B11 B10 T B M B7 55 B4 B3 B2 ji Measurement BFL n 95 omp Temp Int ROF Event Register 15 14 813 B12 9 n B4 B3 B2 B1 BO To 2X eee ummary Bit pou MSB of Stat Byte Register 1 2 Measurement Register B15 B14 513 812 B11 B10 89 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 cag B2 B1 BO B3QF Buffer 3 4 Full RAV Reading Available amp Logical AND BQF Buffer Quarter Full Comp Compliance OR Logical OR BFL Buffer Full Temp Over Temperature BHF Buffer Half Full Int Interlock asserted BAV Buffer Available ROF Reading Overflow TN Trace Notify Questionable event status The used bits of the questionable event register Figure 11 7 are described as follows Bit B4 Questionable Power Set bit indicates that a questionable power reading was calculated for Pulse Delta See Pulse Delta power calculation restriction on page 5 35 Error status code 611 Bit B8 Questionable Calibration Cal Set bit indicates that a
429. s that Differ ential Conductance is armed A 0 indicates that Differential Conductance is not armed If the Model 6221 is already armed for another action e g Delta or Pulse Delta the Differential Conductance arm command will un arm the other action and arm Differential Conductance 4 During the arming process the Model 622x acquires the offset voltage V zero value of the Model 2182 2182A The Model 622x factors this value into the calculation for Differential Conductance voltage See Voltage offset compensation on page 5 57 for more information Return to Section 5 topics 5 66 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 5 topics 6 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Section 6 topics Averaging filter page 6 2 Averaging filter characteristics page 6 2 Filter setup and control page 6 8 Remote programming Averaging filter page 6 8 Math page 6 11 mX b and m X b reciprocal page 6 9 Configuring and controlling mX b and m X b page 6 9 Remote programming Math page 6 10 Buffer page 6 11 Buffer characteristics page 6 12 Storing readings page 6 14 Recall page 6 14 Remote programming Buffer page 6 15 NOTE This section only applies to a Model 622x that is being used with a Model 2182 2182A to perform Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance measurements 6 2 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference
430. se Delta and Differential Conductance 5 29 Examples The following commands demonstrate proper syntax for sending commands and returning responses to queries over the serial port SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG 2 Select 2V range for 2182 2182A SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG Send range query SYST COMM SER ENT Return response to query SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT NPLC 1 Set rate to 1PLC for 2182 2182A SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT NPLC Send rate query SYST COMM SER ENT Return response to query 4 Set measurement units Volts are the default units for the Model 622x but can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Sie mens reading see Measurement units on page 5 16 for details The commands to set measurement units are listed in Table 5 1 The following example shows the command to select ohms measurement units UNIT OHMS Select ohms measurement units 5 Set up arm and run Delta Details on the commands to set up and arm Delta are provided in Table 5 3 The following example demonstrates the proper sequence to set up arm and run Delta RST Restores 622x defaults SOUR DELT HIGH 1 3 Sets high source value to 1mA SOUR DELT DELay 100e 3 Sets Delta delay to 100ms SOUR DELT COUN 1000 Sets Delta count to 1000 SOUR DELT CAB ON Enables Compliance Abort TRAC POIN 1000 Sets buffer to 1000 points SOUR DELT AR
431. select ranging BEST FIXED or AUTO When finished use the EXIT key to return to the normal dis play state Set the measurement units The basic Pulse Delta reading is in volts which is the default units setting However it can instead be expressed and displayed as an Ohms Watts or Siemens reading With Watts as the selected units the reading can be a Peak power reading or an Average power reading See Measurement units on page 5 16 for details To set the measurement units press the UNITS key to display the READING UNITS menu Select VOLTS OHMS WATTS or SIEMENS When WATTS is selected you will then be prompted to select the power units type AVERAGE or PEAK Measurement units can be changed while Pulse Delta is running On the Model 622x press the PULSE key to arm Pulse Delta Details on the Arming process are provided on page 5 42 The Model 622x is armed when the message PULSE MODE ARMED Press TRIG to start or PULSE SWEEP ARMED Press TRIG to start is displayed briefly and the ARM annunciator turns on On the Model 6221 press the TRIG key to start taking Pulse Delta readings and send them to the buffer Return to Section 5 topics 5 46 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual If a finite Pulse Delta count is being used the Pulse Delta measurements will stop after the last Pulse Delta measurement is performed However Pulse Delta remains armed and can be run
432. shield that is connected to a safety Earth Ground see Safety shield con nections on page 2 16 Figure 2 10 Floating the Model 622x current source Chassis Md 622x dmA l source Output Low NOT connected to Earth Ground floating 5 622x chassis screw gt i to Earth Ground HOV e connected to safety 10 V source chassis connected to Earth Ground through the power cord Earth Ground Chassis NOTE Earth Ground and Chassis are essentially at the same ground potential The difference between these two ground points is shown in Figure 2 1 Return to Section 2 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Output Connections 2 15 Connections to DUT WARNING To prevent electric shock all power must be removed from the test system before making or breaking connections Turn off all instruments and external sources and disconnect their power cords Supplied triax cable The Model 237 ALG 2 triax cable is supplied with the Model 622x This 6 6ft 2m cable mates to the OUTPUT triax connector and is terminated with alligator clips that are covered with color coded boots Terminal identification for the cable depends on the triax connector configuration see Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 WARNING The Model 237 ALG 2 triax cable can allow exposed voltages when used in certain applications This triax cable is intended for use only by qualified personnel who recognize s
433. sing the repeating filter with Differ ential Conductance the actual step size run for the test is the programmed step size divided by the filter count Step Size repeating filter Programmed Step Size Filter Count For example assume the programmed step size is 10A and the Filter Count is 10 When the Differential Conductance test is run the actual step size will be 1 10pA 10 Model 2182 2182A measurement rate The speed rate setting of the Model 2182 21824 is queried If the NPLC speed setting is not an integer value it will be changed to 1 PLC examples of non inte ger values are 0 1 1 3 and 17 5 Voltage offset compensation Disabling Front Autozero on the Model 2182 21824 results in high voltage offset for voltage measurements To compensate for this offset the Model 622x per forms the following action The Model 622x acquires the voltage offset V zero value from the Model 2182 21824 and will factor it into the calculations for Differential Conductance voltage This technique effectively compensates for Model 2182 21824 offset voltage During V zero acquisition the message Acquiring V Zero will be briefly displayed Depending on the integration time for the Model 2182 21824 it may take several seconds for the Model 622x to acquire the V zero value With the Model 2182 2182A set for 5 PLC V zero acquisition will take approximately three seconds Configuration checks The Model 622x performs a number
434. source range error 221 Settings Conflict occurs if Pulse Delta is armed while on a source range that is too small Select a higher source range before arming Pulse Delta Armed messages One of the following messages is displayed briefly when Pulse Delta is armed and ready to run Message for Pulse Delta with sweep disabled PULSE MODE ARMED Press TRIG to start Message for Pulse Delta with sweep enabled PULSE SWEEP ARMED Press TRIG to start Aborting Pulse Delta While Pulse Delta is armed or running the test can be aborted by pressing the EXIT key or sending SOUR SWE ABOR The current source will set to zero and turn off Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 43 Triggering sequence The Trigger Link is used to synchronize source measure triggering operations of the Models 6221 and 2182A See System connections on page 5 6 for details on Trigger Link connections As previously explained Model 6221 output pulses are synchronized to the fre quency of the power line voltage A low or high pulse is generated on the positive going edge of each line cycle The triggering sequence for the 3 point measurement method two lows mea sured is shown in Figure 5 12 and is explained as follows Note that this diagram assumes that the trigger delays for both the Model 6221 and 2182A are set to zero Since the trigger delays are zero they are not shown
435. ss the numeric entry key Value adjust method 1 Use the Cursor Keys to place the blinking cursor on the digit to be edited 2 Usethe Value Adjust Keys to increment or decrement the value of the digit Digit s to the left may also change as the edited value is changed past 9 or under 0 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as needed to set the desired value 4 Press ENTER to select the value Pressing EXIT will cancel the change Return to Section 1 topics 1 22 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Numeric entry method 1 Use the Cursor Keys to place the blinking cursor on the most significant digit to be edited 2 Keyin a digit by pressing a Numeric Entry Key 0 to 9 The cursor moves to the next digit on the right 3 Repeat step 2 as needed to set the desired value 4 Press ENTER to select the value Pressing EXIT will cancel the change Model 6221 menu navigation Editing for the Model 6221 is basically the same as editing for the Model 6220 except for the following differences Cursor control is provided by the Cursor Keys located under the rotary knob When menu level that requires an item to be selected the Rotary Knob can also be used for cursor control Turn the knob clockwise to move the cursor to the right and turn it counter clockwise to move the cursor to the left With a value displayed value adjust can be performed using the Rotary Knob Turn it clockwise to increment a digi
436. state by the UNT command Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmit ted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that are particular to each device on the bus These commands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consortium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted Return to Appendix topics C 12 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Command codes Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summa rized in Table C 2 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various com mands are listed in Table C 3 Table C 3 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Decimal Command Hex value value GTL 01 1 SDC 04 4 GET 08 8 LLO 11 17 DCL 14 20 SPE 18 24 SPD 19 25 LAG 20 3F 32 63 TAG 40 5F 64 95
437. strument to idle and halt the sweep The IFC SDC and DCL commands can be executed under any cir cumstance while operating within the trigger model They will abort any other command or query The following commands can be executed while operating within the trigger model ABORt e SYSTem PRESet TRG or GET RST e lt NRf gt NOTE For fastest response use SDC or DCL to return to idle see Section 12 for details on general bus commands Return to Section 8 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Triggering 8 5 Event detectors and control sources A control source holds up operation until the programmed event occurs and is detected Note that there are four detector bypasses two of which are one time bypasses A bypass around a detector is only enabled if the appropriate TLink control source is selected See TLink control source Arm In and Trigger In as follows for details Arm In source Arm In control sources which control entire sweeps are explained as follows IMMEDIATE ARM SOURce IMMediate Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied immediately allowing operation to continue into the trigger layer GPIB ARM SOURce BUS Event detection for the arm layer is satisfied when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received by the Model 622x Note that GET is a general bus command see Section 10 and not a three letter command word TIMER ARM SOURce Event detect
438. sure the voltage across a 19 DUT using a constant 10mA current source and a voltmeter Ideally the measured voltage would be 10mV V I x R However due to a 10uV thermal EMF in the test leads the volt meter actually reads 10 01mV 0 1 error due to EMF The error contributed by EMF can be eliminate by using Delta Assume the square wave output of the Model 622x is set to 10mA high and 10mA low and the following Model 2182 2182A measurement conversions A Ds are made for the first Delta cycle A D 10 01mV A D B 9 99mV A D C 2 10 01mV The first Delta reading is calculated as follows A 2B C 0 c ae mV 2 9 99mV 10 01 mV oi 4 Delta fom 4 10 The 10mV Delta reading effectively cancelled the 10uV EMF to provide a more accurate measurement Measurement units The fundamental measurement for Delta is voltage Volts V However the voltage reading can converted into a conductance Siemens S resistance Ohms or power Watts W reading See page 5 16 for details on selecting Measurement units With Ohms Siemens or Watts measurement units selected the reading is calcu lated as follows V I S I V W IxV Return to Section 5 topics 5 24 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Configuration settings Delta settings from the front panel are described as follows These parameters are set from the CONFIGURE DELTA menu t
439. t Number 2743001112 This device has an impedance of about 40Q at 20MHz making it suitable for higher current applications when using the mA ranges of the Model 622x Resistors Any suitable metal film resistor capable of handling the power needed for the specific application will work well A specific device that works well for this application is the Vishay Dale Model CMF55 series of resistors Capacitor The capacitor is probably the most critical component since it shunts the output of the current source It must have extremely low leakage when sourc ing pA level currents For reasonable time response it should also have low dielectric absorption A specific device that works well for this application is the Vishay BC components KP46x series of polypropylene capacitors Return to Appendix topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Applications E 11 Compliance overshoot prevention Depending on range and load impedance step changes in current could cause the output voltage to briefly overshoot its set compliance level by as much as 2V This compliance voltage glitch will settle to the expected output voltage within the settling time specification for the selected range This voltage glitch will typi cally not overheat a DUT but a few microseconds of overshoot could be enough to damage a voltage sensitive DUT Overshoot is due to the current source overshooting its desired value If the source does not go into voltag
440. t and turn it counter clockwise to decrement a digit Pressing the ROTARY KNOB performs the same function as the ENTER key Press the knob to select or open a menu item or to select a displayed value Password For remote programming a user defined password can be used to disable protected commands Most Model 622x commands are protected From the front panel the password can be cleared using the following key press sequence Press COMM gt Select PASSWORD gt Select YES to clear the password See Section 10 for details on password Interface selection The following summarizes interface selection for the Model 6221 Details on the interfaces are provided in Section 10 220 Language emulation mode DDC commands are only valid for GPIB communications Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 23 Use the editing controls for Menu navigation page 1 20 to select a different interface and or language GPIB and language 1 Press COMM to open the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu 2 Select the GPIB interface NOTE If a different interface was being used the Model 622x will reboot when GPIB is selected If a reboot occurs repeat steps 1 and 2 and then proceed to step 3 3 Setthe GPIB address 0 to 30 and press ENTER 4 Select the desired language SCPI or 220 The SCPI language uses SCPI commands to control the instrument The 220 language uses Model 220 e
441. t NRf gt Parameters ll akwon o ll Model 6220 key Range up arrow Source down arrow Cursor left arrow MENU SWP DISP SETUP LOCAL AUTO Cursor right arrow EXIT COND TRIG TRIAX FILT CONFIG Range down arrow ENTER DELTA UNITS AVG PRES COMM OUTPUT On OFF Source up arrow RECALL MATH DC ADDR SAVE error 222 error 222 error 222 error 222 error 222 Return to Section 13 topics I Model 6221 key Range up arrow WAVE AMPL MENU SWP DISP SETUP LOCAL AUTO FREQ 2 EXIT COND TRIG TRIAX FILT CONFIG Range down arrow ENTER DELTA UNITS AVG PRES COMM OUTPUT On Off PULSE RECALL MATH DC ADDR SAVE Push Rotary Knob CURSOR right arrow CURSOR left arrow Turn Rotary Knob left Turn Rotary Knob right 13 10 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Notes 1 When in a menu AMPL operates as Cursor left arrow 2 When in a menu FREQ operates as Cursor right arrow 3 Not used by the Model 6220 Error 222 Parameter Data Out of Range Keycodes 25 32 34 38 41 42 and 44 are not valid and gener ate error 220 Parameter Error This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select the DC function send the following command to simulate pressing the DC key
442. t as follows DMM RDG 100 0000mA Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt I CAL Press ENTER to Output 000 00mA Press ENTER to output the zero value for the present range The following prompt will be displayed DMM RDG 000 0000mA Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading then adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value Press ENTER The display will prompt I CAL Press ENTER to Output 100 00mA Press ENTER to output the negative full range value for the present range The following prompt will be displayed DMM RDG 100 0000mA Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT Note the DMM reading adjust the Model 6220 6221 display to agree with that value then press ENTER to complete calibration for the present range Repeat steps 2 through 13 above for each current range see Table 17 3 page 17 8 For the 2nA and 20nA ranges connect the Model 6220 6221 to the picoammeter input and use the picoammeter reading at the DMM read ing prompt Figure 17 2 Return to Section 17 topics 17 8 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual 15 For the Model 6221 only a Disconnect the DMM from the Model 6221 OUTPUT jack b From the main calibration menu select WAVE then press ENTER to perform calibration of the Model 6221 waveform generator Figure 17 1 Connections for current sour
443. t eerte odores enero creo 13 9 SYSTem KEY it aaa 13 9 SCPI Reference Tables General NOTES EE 14 2 KI 220 Language TAME QU TO n eter 15 2 Notesi 15 3 Performance Verification IntEodUC ton esaa ei vestre 16 2 Test requimements eren mend tel e 16 3 Environmental conditions esses enne enne nennen 16 3 Warm p period 2 5 aimer e ORE RUE 16 3 DAME le HMM 16 3 17 Recommended test equipment 16 4 Test equipment connections sessesseseeeeeeeneeeeeee eren eene en 16 4 Calculating test Limits che oie due 16 4 Example limit calculation sess 16 4 Restoring factory defaults eise tee regere debacle ed 16 5 Test summary and considerations 16 5 ra dele Does PS Nude en 16 5 Test considerations oiei bs eu at iraa enirir 16 5 Verification proced res basan anui 16 6 DC current output accuracy sssseeeeeeeeeeneeneeeneenee nenn
444. t reset by STATus PRESet or CLS Send the 0 parameter value with ESE to reset all bits of that enable register to 0 see Status byte and service request SRQ on page 11 7 2 STATus PRESet has no effect on the error queue 3 Use either of the two clear commands to clear the error queue Return to Section 11 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Status Structure 11 5 Programming and reading registers Programming enable registers The only registers that can be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status structure are read only registers The following explains how to ascertain the parameter values for the various commands used to program enable registers The actual commands are covered later in this section Table 11 3 through Table 11 6 A command to program an event enable register is sent with a parameter value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register An enable register can be programmed using any of the following data formats for the parameter value binary decimal hexadecimal or octal The bit positions of the register Figure 11 1 indicate the binary parameter value For example if you wish to sets bits B4 B3 and B1 the binary value would be 11010 where B4 1 B3 1 B1 1 and all other bits are 0 When you use one of the other formats convert the binary number to its decimal hexadecimal or octal equivalent Binary 11010 Dec
445. t the SAVE menu item 4 Enter the desired memory location 0 through 4 and press ENTER To restore any setup 1 Press SETUP to open the RESTORE SETUP menu 2 Select USER PRESET or RST USER Enter the desired value 0 to 4 and press ENTER PRESET Press ENTER to return to the PRESET defaults RST Press ENTER to return to RST defaults To select power on setup 1 Press the SAVE key to open the SAVED SETUP MENU 2 Select the POWER ON menu item 3 Select BENCH GPIB or USER SETUP NUMBER e PRESET Press ENTER to select the PRESET defaults RST Press ENTER to select the RST defaults USER SETUP NUMBER Key in the desired user setup number and then press ENTER Remote operation setups Saving and restoring user setups The SAV and RCL commands are used to save and recall user setups SAV lt NRf gt Save present setup in memory RCL lt NRf gt Recall saved user setup from memory lt NRf gt 20 1 2 3 or 4 Return to Section 1 topics 1 26 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual NOTE User setups cannot be saved or recalled while Wave Sweep Delta Pulse Delta or Differential Conductance is armed or running The SAV and RCL commands will gen erate error 413 Not allowed with mode armed A custom list sweep cannot be saved as a user setup Attempting to do so will generate error 528 Cannot save CUSTOM sweep setup Source preset values are not aved aspart of a use
446. t will be changed to 1 PLC examples of non integer values are 0 1 1 3 and 17 5 Armed message The following message is displayed briefly when Delta is armed and ready to run DELTA ARMED Press TRIG to start Aborting Delta After Delta is armed or running it can be aborted by pressing the EXIT key or sending the SOUR SWE ABOR command Triggering sequence The Trigger Link is used to synchronize source measure triggering operations of the Models 622x and 2182 21824 See System connections on page 5 6 for details on Trigger Link connections The triggering sequence for the first Delta cycle is shown in Figure 5 8 and is explained as follows Model 622x When Delta is started from the Model 622x it outputs the high I High current level After its Delta Delay expires an output trigger pulse is sent to the Model 2182 21824 to start its operations Model 2182 2182A After its Trigger Delay expires the Model 2182 2182A performs a measurement conversion A D 1 An output trigger pulse is then sent back to the Model 622x Model 622x The Model 622x outputs the programmed low I Low current level After the Delta Delay expires an output trigger is sent back to the Model 2182 21824 The Delta Delay is used to allow the current source to settle after a polarity change Return to Section 5 topics 5 26 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Model 2182 2182A Aft
447. t will turn off after the currently set duration period has expired If the duration is set to infinite press the EXIT key to stop gen erating the waveform and turn the output off Return to Section 7 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Wave Functions 6221 Only 7 17 Generating a square wave 1 If you intend to use fixed ranging manually set the range high enough to accommodate both the amplitude and offset setting 2 Configure the waveform as follows a pu Press CONFIG then WAVE to enter the wave function configuration menu Select TYPE then press ENTER Select SQUARE then press ENTER to choose a square wave To add a DC offset select OFFSET from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the offset as desired To set the duty cycle select DUTY CYCLE from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu then set the duty cycle as desired To use the phase marker select PHASE MARKER set the STATE to ON use OUTPUT POINT to set the phase setting and OUTPUT LINE to set the trigger line Again from the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu choose RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED or FIXED as desired From the CONFIGURE WAVEFORM menu select DURATION then set the desired waveform duration Press EXIT to return to normal display 3 Set frequency and amplitude a b Press the FREQ key then set the frequency to the desired value Press the AMPL key then set the amplitude as required 4 Generate waveform a b
448. ta operation will abort if the current source goes into compliance By default Compliance Abort is disabled NO Cold Switching Mode By enabling YES Cold Switching Delta operation will zero the current source before leaving the trigger layer prior to sequential trigger model iterations By default Cold Switching is disabled NO NOTE Jitter For Delta step to step timing may jitter as much as 1ms This jitter can be eliminated by disabling the front pan el For details see Step to step timing jitter on page 1 18 Arming process After Delta is configured the test is armed by pressing the DELTA key or sending SOUR DELT ARM During the arming process the Model 622x establishes com munications with the Model 2182 2182A and performs a series of operations Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 25 Communications setup commands and sweep table The Model 622x performs a communications test and sends setup com mands to the Model 2182 21824 These operations are explained in Com munications test and setup commands on page 5 12 The Model 622x builds a sweep table of source values to be used for the Differential Conductance test For details see Internal sweep table on page 5 12 Model 2182 2182A measurement rate The speed rate setting of the Model 2182 21824 is queried If the NPLC speed setting is not an integer value i
449. tate to OFF Starting another sweep after the SOUR SWEep ABORt command will require re arming Note that this command is also used to exit Differential Conductance or Delta mode and resume normal current source operation SOUR SWE SPAC lt name gt Select sweep type This command chooses the LINear staircase LOGarithmic staircase or LIST custom sweep type See Table 4 5 and following notes for details on custom sweep commands SOUR SWE POIN lt n gt Set sweep points Use this command to set the number of sweep points for staircase sweeps 65 535 maximum The number of points in a custom sweep is determined by the LIST parameters see Table 4 5 SOUR SWE RANG lt name gt Set source ranging for sweeps Selects how the source range will be handled with sweeps AUTO selects the best source range at each point and FlXed leaves the source at the range the unit was on when the sweep started Error 221 Settings Conflict will occur if the sweep is started from a source range that is too low BEST causes the source range to be set to the correct range for the highest point in the sweep SOUR SWE CAB lt b gt Abort sweep on compliance When set to ON terminates any sweep in progress when compliance is detected during a sweep The source value is set to zero and the operate state is set to OFF SOUR SWE COUN lt gt Set sweep count Use this command to set the number of sweeps to run An INFinite sweep count will select
450. te must be set to an integer value 1 2 3 up to 50 or 60 If some other rate is selected it will automatically be changed to 1PLC by Model 622x during the arming pro cess For front panel operation use the RANGE keys to select the measurement range To set the integration rate use the RATE key Commands from the PC to control the Model 2182 2182A are addressed to the Model 622x Each command is then routed through the Model 622x out the serial port RS 232 to the Model 2182 21824 The following command word is used for this communication process SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SEND data Where data is a valid Model 2182 2182A command The following query command is used to return the response to a query command sent over the serial port SYSTem COMMunicate SERial ENTer When communicating over the serial port there are no errors reported if a Model 2182 21824 is not connected to the serial port Examples The following commands demonstrate proper syntax for sending commands and returning responses to queries over the serial port SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG 2 Select 2V range for 2182 2182 SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT RANG Send range query SYST COMM SER ENT Return response to query SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT NPLC 1 Set rate to 1PLC for 2182 2182A SYST COMM SER SEND VOLT NPLC Send rate query SYST COMM SER ENT Return response to query Return to Se
451. te of local lockout ETHernet Ethernet interface 6221 only ADDRess lt string gt Set IP address n n n n ADDRess Query IP address MASK string Set subnet mask n n n n MASK Query subnet mask GATeway lt string gt Set Ethernet gateway n n n n GATeway Query Ethernet gateway DHCP lt b gt Enable or disable DHCP DHCP Query state on or off of DHCP SAVE Saves Ethernet setting changes KEY lt n gt Simulate key press 115 See SYSTem key press codes on page 13 9 Return to Section 14 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI Reference Tables 14 15 Table 14 8 cont System command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI KEY Query last pressed key KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable key click ON 1 KCLick Query state of key click BEEPer Beeper STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper ON 1 STATe Query state of beeper PRES et Return 622x to PRESET default setup 1 POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet SAVO 1 SAV1 SAV2 SAV3 or SAV4 POSetup Query power on setup ERRor Query the latest error code and message 11 CLEar Clears error code and message from Error 11 Queue TSTamp System timestamp 13 RESet Reset timestamp to zero seconds RNUMber System reading number RESet Reset reading number to zero VERSion Query revision level of SCPI standard ABOard Analog board 1 SNUMber Q
452. th the 1GQ DUT effectively making a current divider As a result 99nA is sourced to the DUT 1 error The higher the impedance of the DUT the higher the source error Guarded triax cable example inner shield connected to Cable Guard For high impedance DUT guarding the triax cable greatly reduces leakage current and the effects of cable capacitance The example in Figure 2 7 illustrates the principle of triax cable guarding Output high and guard are at nearly the same potential in this case 100V This potential is applied to both sides of resistor and capacitor C 4 This makes the voltage drop across the capacitor OV Therefore the capacitor does not charge and is effectively removed from the test circuit The response at the DUT is much faster and is determined by the output response settings of the Model 622x see Output response on page 3 5 for details The voltage drop across resistor is also OV Therefore no current flows through the resistor 4 With resistor R 4 effectively removed from the test circuit virtually all the current 100nA flows through the DUT Notice that a leakage current will flow from guard to output low via resistor gt and capacitor C 2 but it will not affect the current sourced to the DUT Figure 2 6 Unguarded triax cable inner shield connected to Output Low see Figure 2 4 Cu R I T RCu 100pF 100GQ II 1GQ 0 99GO x 100pF 0 999
453. the Model 6220 6221 OUTPUT jack as shown in Figure 17 1 Also connect the short ing connector to the INTERLOCK connector see Section 2 for interlock connections Turn on the Model 6220 6221 and calibration equipment and allow them to warm up for one hour before proceeding Send these commands to restore defaults unlock calibration and turn on the output RST Restore defaults CAL PROT CODE KI006220 Unlock cal 6220 default shown use 006221 as 6221 default OUTP ON Turn on output Step 2 Calibrate current source 1 2 Select the DMM DC current function with auto range enabled Send these commands in order to calibrate the 100mA current source range using the DMM Reading parameter actual digital multimeter reading for each step SOUR CURR RANG 0 1 Select 100mA range SOUR CURR 0 1 Output 100mA CAL PROT SOUR lt DMM_Reading gt Calibrate 100mA using reading SOUR CURR 0 Output OMA CAL PROT SOUR DMM Reading Calibrate OMA using reading SOUR CURR 0 1 Output 100mA CAL PROT SOUR DMM Reading Calibrate 100mA using reading Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 15 3 Repeat step 2 for each range as listed in Table 17 4 page 17 16 noting the following sure to set the correct range using the RANG command Each range is calibrated with three values FS positive full scale 0 and FS negative full sca
454. the trigger layer Examples The following commands configure the trigger link as the trigger input source select line 2 on the trigger link for input select line 4 as output and enable triggers after both source and delay phases of the device action block TRIG SOUR TLIN Select Tlink for input trigger TRIG ILIN 2 Set trigger input to line 2 TRIG OLIN 4 Set trigger output to line 4 TRIG OUTP SOUR DEL Output trigger after source delay Configure and run your sweep as outlined in SCP commands triggering on page 8 10 With the above configuration a TRG or GET is required to start the sweep and an external trigger pulse applied to line 2 of the trigger link is required to trigger each sweep step Return to Section 8 topics 8 10 Triggering Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual SCPI commands triggering Triggering commands are listed in Table 8 2 Additional information for each com mand is provided in notes that follow the tables Table 8 2 Trigger commands Command Description Default INITiate Initiate one trigger cycle OFF ABORt Reset trigger system Arm layer commands ARM SOURce lt name gt Select event detector control source IMM name IMMediate TIMer BUS TLINk NSTest PSTest NSTest or MANual ARM SIGNal Bypass ARM control source ARM TIMer n Set timer interval 0 to 99999 99 sec 0 1 1 msec resolution ARM DIRection name Control ARM source bypass 6 A
455. thernet Cable TD RJ 45 male to male Return to Section 10 topics 10 32 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual RJ 45 connector status LEDs The female RJ 45 connector shown in Figure 10 10 has two status LEDs located at the top of the connector These LEDs provide the following status LED State Ethernet status Link Act Off Network is NOT connected Link Act On Network is connected Link Act Blinking Traffic is traversing the port 100bT Off 10 mb s network speed 100bT On 100 mb s network speed Figure 10 10 Model 6221 Ethernet connector Model 6221 WARI IG no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY mm bros JA SAN INTERLOCK GUARD 105Vpk 250Vpk OETA 9 as 250Vpk 7 OUTPUT 1 1 as CATI DIGITAL LINE FUSE SLOWBLOW 1 6A 250V IEEE 488 LINE RATING CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS ETHERNET Ad WITH FRONT PANEL MENU 10 100 BaseT TRIGGER 450VA MAX E 9 oum X CAUTION Fof CONTINUED PROTECTION NGS FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING ETHERNET 10 100 BaseT Link Act 100bT 10bT status LED 100bT status LED Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 33 Ethernet settings Ethernet settings include the following Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP
456. ting output current and range 4 Verify that the output current limits are within the range shown in Table 16 2 page 16 7 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all ranges listed in Table 16 2 For the 2nA and 20nA ranges change the test connections as shown in Figure 16 2 to the picoammeter input jack 6 After testing all ranges first turn off the output then disconnect the test equipment Figure 16 1 Connections for DC current output accuracy 200nA to 100mA ranges Digital Multimeter Measure DC Current High 6220 6221 Amps Output Low Input Return to Section 16 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 16 2 Connections for DC current output accuracy 2nA and 20nA ranges High Performance Verification Picoammeter Measure DC Current Table 16 2 DC current output limits Output Output current limits Range current 1 year 18 to 28 C 100mA 100 000mA 99 850 to 100 150mA 20mA 20 000mA 19 980 to 20 020mA 2mA 2 0000mA 1 9980 to 2 0020mA 200 200 00uA 199 80 to 200 20uA 20 20 000 19 980 to 20 020uA 2 2 0000 1 9970 to 2 0030uA 200nA 200 00nA 199 30 to 200 70nA 20nA 20 000nA 19 930 to 20 070nA 2nA 2 0000nA 1 9900 to 2 0100nA Return to Section 16 topics 16 7 16 8 Performance Verification Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Compliance accuracy Follow these steps in order to test Model 6220 6221 compliance accuracy 1 With the power off connect the d
457. tion source The custom list sweep function allows a user defined list of current source values to be stored in memory During the calibration process each cur rent source level is output in the order that it appears in the list For example assume calibration of a picoammeter requires the following current levels to be sourced in this order 1nA 1nA 10nA 10nA 100 100 1mA 1 The nine point custom sweep is configured as follows P00000 OnA P00001 1nA P00002 1nA P00003 10nA P00004 10nA P00005 100nA P00006 100nA P00007 1mA P00008 1mA For a manually controlled calibration system the TRIG key of the Model 622x can be used to control the current source output Each press of the TRIG key will out put the next sweep point For an automated calibration system the program can control the current source output using GET or TRG commands Each time a GET or TRG command is received by the Model 622x the next sweep point will be output If the device to be calibrated supports external triggering the Trigger Link can be used to control triggering between the two instruments While sourcing the first sweep point level the Model 622x outputs a trigger to the external device triggering it to perform the calibration When the external device is finished with the calibration it will send a trigger to the Model 622x triggering it to output the next sweep point This back and forth trig
458. tly selected interface dis ables Select the interface from the COMM menu structure access by pressing the COMM key while in local Select the desired interface RS 232 GPIB or ETHERNET for the 6221 by placing the cursor on your selection Press ENTER to save the change You can also select the interface using the SYST COMM SEL command see Table 10 2 NOTE When the interface is changed the unit will per form a power on reset Using the communications menu To access the communications menu press COMM and then choose the desired interface and selections as shown in Table 10 1 As indicated earlier if you change to a different interface the Model 622x will perform a power on reset and you must re enter the menu to configure the selected interface Return to Section 10 topics 10 4 Remote Operations Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 10 1 Communications menu Menu item Description GPIB Select configure GPIB interface ADDRESS Set primary address 0 30 default 12 SELECT LANGUAGE Select SCPI or KI 220 language RS 232 Select configure RS 232 interface BAUD Set baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K or 115 2K TERMINATOR Select terminator lt CR gt lt CR LF gt lt LF gt or lt LF CR gt FLOW CTRL Select flow control NONE XON XOFF ETHERNET Select configure Model 6221 Ethernet interface MAC Display MAC address Typical 123 456 789 012 345 678 IP Set vi
459. to return to the normal display state Remote programming triax output low Commands for output low connection OUTPut LTEarth Query connection for output low OUTPut LTEarth b Enable or disable triax output low connection to Earth Ground lt b gt ON Earth Ground OFF Floating Example Disconnects floats triax output low from Earth Ground OUTPut LTEarth OFF Guard overview The Model 622x provides two guards Triax Cable Guard and banana jack Guard Cable Guard This guard provides a voltage that is at essentially the same potential as Output High of the Model 622x Guarding may greatly reduce leakage current and capacitance in the test circuit Effective guarding requires that the triax Cable Guard configuration be used for the triax cable and a guard plate be used for the Devide Under Test DUT For details on Triax Cable Guard refer to page 2 9 Banana Jack Guard This guard is similar to cable guard in it provides a voltage that is essentially the same potential as Output High 1mV accuracy typical This guard should not be used to guard a triax cable Rather banana jack guard is designed for use with a voltmeter to make measurements on a high impedance DUT This guard serves as a x1 buffer amplifier to eliminate loading errors that may occur as the impedance of the DUT approaches the voltmeter input imped ance For details see Banana Jack Guard on page 2 12 The differences between th
460. to the metal mounting plate now called Metal Guard Plate Since output high and guard are at nearly the same potential the voltage drop across resistor capacitor C4 will be almost OV With such a minimal voltage drop leakage current through R is greatly reduced and the charging current through is minimized Resistor 2 and capacitor C are effectively removed from the test circuit Virtu ally all the current flows through the DUT Return to Section 2 topics 2 12 Output Connections Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 2 8 DUT mounting plate unguarded and guarded A Unguarded circuit inner shield connected to Output Low 15 It High ls OutputN Is Sourced current DUT current IL Leakage current Insulated terminal post 1 of 2 B Guarded circuit inner shield connected to Cable Guard Ip ls High AXAU Is Is Sourced current Ip DUT current Banana Jack Guard A typical test for the Model 622x is to source a current to a DUT and then use a voltmeter to measure the voltage across the DUT When using a voltmeter that has low input impedance a more accurate voltage reading may be obtained by taking the voltage measurement at the banana jack Guard terminal Figure 2 9A shows how the conventional voltage measurement method can result in loading error when using a low impedance voltmeter As shown a 10MQ impedance voltmeter results in 50 loading err
461. trigger anodel terme iei hr Pea Rente enean eene cg 8 3 Trigger model op ration a egere 8 4 Front panel trigger operation 8 7 Using the trigger configuration menu sese 8 7 Configuring triggering M 8 8 Remote trigger operation 2202224 0 11 00 8 9 Programming triggering 0 0 8 9 SCPI commands triggering 2 8 10 External M 8 13 External trigger Connector weenie 8 13 Input trigger requirements oo ee ee sese eene 8 13 Output trigger specifications eee cece 8 14 External trigger example 8 15 9 Limit Test and Digital I O TEST s 9 2 oisi HE ROG A 9 2 Programming limit 9 2 SCPI commands limit testing eese 9 3 Digital W O port 9 5 Digital T O connector 5 eee ere ES aes HER aOR 9 5 ccu 9 5 SOT Ine arte dip te eee eee 9 6 Simplified schematic esee 9 6 Sink mode controlling external devices see 9 6 Source mode logic 9 8 Setting digital output
462. trument automatically selects the optimum lowest range for the sweep step Delay Sweep delay defines the Pulse Delta cycle time period in seconds The time period is the same for all Pulse Delta cycles Sweep delay can be set from 1ms to 999999 999s Return to Section 5 topics 5 42 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Arming process After Pulse Delta Fixed output or Sweep output is configured the test is armed by pressing the PULSE key or sending SOUR PDEL ARM During the arming pro cess the Model 6221 establishes communications with the Model 2182A and per forms a series of operations Communications setup commands sweep table and moving filter The Model 6221 performs a communications test and sends setup commands to the Model 2182A These operations are explained in Communications test and setup commands on page 5 12 The Model 6221 builds a sweep table of source values to be used for the Pulse Delta test For details see Internal sweep table on page 5 12 f using a Model 2182 error 410 Model 2182A required occurs when trying to arm Pulse Delta Pulse Delta using a Sweep output Only the moving average filter can be used if enabled If the repeating average filter is enabled the filter type will change to moving when Pulse Delta is armed See Section 6 for details see on the moving average filter Fixed source range When using the FIXED
463. tting also shows the current range The bottom line values are delay in seconds and compliance Before entering this display you should use the POINTS menu to select the number of sweep points The editing for the custom sweep point adjust menu will not accept values above the number of points selected As the point number is changed the current delay and compliance values will change to reflect the settings for the new point Move the cursor to the right to edit the current value Continued movement to the right will highlight the range prefix A right arrow keypress then takes the editing into the bottom line for the delay value Continued right arrow key presses take you into the compliance value Values can be freely entered but they do not take effect for that point until ENTER is pressed After pressing ENTER the cursor is set back at the point index Of course you can also use the left arrow keys to freely move back and forth between the different values until you have adjusted the source level delay and compliance to their desired values If however you change the point number without having pressed ENTER then any values you entered for source compli ance and delay are lost and must be reentered Using auto copy with custom sweeps Editing a custom sweep of more than a few points can be cumbersome especially if you must constantly enter the compliance and delay values for each point Therefore an auto copy feature is
464. tus model events page 4 23 Custom sweeps page 4 6 Setting sweep parameters page 4 8 Custom sweep editing page 4 8 Using auto copy with custom sweeps page 4 8 Source ranging page 4 9 Sweep delay page 4 9 Sweep count page 4 9 Front panel sweep operation page 4 10 Using the sweep configuration menu page 4 10 Performing a linear staircase sweep page 4 11 Performing a log staircase sweep page 4 12 Performing a custom sweep page 4 13 4 2 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Overview Section overview Following a brief Sweep overview of the three types of sweeps linear staircase logarithmic staircase and custom the documentation in this section provides detailed information on characteristics front panel operation and SCPI command programming for each type of sweep as follows Linear staircase sweeps page 4 4 Logarithmic staircase sweeps page 4 5 Custom sweeps page 4 6 Front panel sweep operation page 4 10 Remote sweep operation page 4 14 Sweep overview As shown in Figure 4 1 the Model 622x Current Source can generate three types of DC current sweeps Linear staircase sweep With this sweep type the current increases or decreases in specific steps beginning with a start current and ending with a stop current Figure 4 1A shows an increasing linear staircase sweep from a start current to a 5mA stop current in 1mA steps The bias current is the fixed current setting
465. uals Return to Section 1 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Getting Started 1 5 Options and accessories Input cables connectors and adapters 237 TRX BAR Barrel Adapter This is a barrel adapter that allows you to connect two triax cables together Both ends of the adapter are terminated with 3 lug female triax connectors Model 237 ALG 2 Triax Cable This 2m 6 6 ft low noise triax cable termi nated with three slot male triax connector on one end and 3 alligator clips on the other This cable is also a supplied item with the Model 622x Model 237 TRX T Adapter This is a 3 slot male to dual 3 lug female triax tee adapter for use with 7078 TRX triax cables Model 237 TRX TBC Connector This is 3 lug female triax bulkhead con nector with cap for installation on test fixtures and boxes Model 2187 4 Input Cable Low thermal input cable for the Model 2182 2182A Terminated with a LEMO connector on one end and four banana plugs on the other The banana plugs allow connection to the Model 622x for banana jack Guard voltage measurements Models 7078 TRX 3 7078 TRX 10 and 7078 TRX 20 Triax Cables These are low noise triax cables terminated at both ends with 3 slot male triax con nectors The 3 model is 3 ft 0 9m in length the 10 model is 10 ft 3m in length and the 20 model is 20 ft 6m in length Model 7078 TRX TBC Connector This is a 3 lug female triax bulkhead connector with cap for installat
466. uch as 1ms This jitter can be eliminated by disabling the front panel For details see Step to step timing jitter on page 1 18 Linear staircase sweeps As shown in Figure 4 2 this sweep type steps from a start current value to an ending stop current source value Programmable parameters include the start stop and step current source levels When this sweep is triggered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start source current level The output will then change in equal steps until the stop current level is reached The current output remains at the last point when the sweep is done The sweep delay parameter determines the time duration of each Sweep step For linear staircase sweeps the sweep delay period is the same for all steps Figure 4 2 Linear staircase sweep lt Delay gt lt Stop Sweep delay is the Bias gt same for each step OmA Return to Section 4 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Sweeps 4 5 Logarithmic staircase sweeps Current mA This sweep is similar to the linear staircase sweep The steps however are done on a logarithmic scale as shown in the example sweep in Figure 4 3 This exam ple is a 5 point log sweep from 1mA to 10mA The sweep delay parameter deter mines the time period for each step As with the linear staircase sweep the sweep delay period is the same for all steps Figure 4 3 Logarithmic staircase sweep example 5 p
467. uery forms of these commands will return the year month and day delimited by commas for example 2004 12 22 5 CAL PROT COUN Query calibration count This query requests the number of times the unit was calibrated The count variable will be incremented by 1 each time the Model 6220 6221 is cali brated 6 CAL PROT SOUR lt NRf gt Calibrate active source range This command calibrates the active current source range from DMM reading values Note that this command is sent three times positive full scale 0 and negative full scale See the complete procedure in Step 2 Calibrate current source on page 17 14 Table 17 6 page 17 22 summarizes allowed ranges for each parameter Note that Parameter steps for each range may be per formed in any order but all three parameter steps for each range must be completed 7 CAL PROT SENS lt NRf gt Calibrate voltage compliance This command calibrates the voltage compliance from a number DMM read ing values See the complete procedure in Step 3 Calibrate compliance on page 17 18 Table 17 7 page 17 22 summarizes allowed ranges for each parameter 8 CAL PROT GUAR STEP1 NHf Calibrate guard step 1 CAL PROT GUAR STEP2 lt NRf gt Calibrate guard step 2 CAL PROT GUAR STEP1 INIT Set up unit for guard cal step 1 CAL PROT GUAR STEP2 INIT Set up unit for guard cal step 2 These commands calibrate the Model 6220 6221 guard circuit The INIT com mands set up the un
468. uery serial number of analog board REVision Query revision level of analog board DBOard Digital board 1 SNUMber Query serial number of digital board REVision Query revision level of digital board PASSword Password 10 ENABIe lt b gt Enable or disable the use of password ENABle Query state of password usage CDISable lt string gt Disables protected commands lt string gt password CENable lt string gt Enables protected commands lt string gt password STATe Query state of password Returns 0 if password protected commands are disabled Returns 1 if enabled NEW string Set new password lt string gt password Return to Section 14 topics 14 16 SCPI Reference Tables Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 14 9 Trace command summary Command Description Default Sec SCPI TRACe Commands to control buffer Note 1 6 CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query memory bytes available in buffer POINts lt n gt Specify buffer size number of readings to store Note 2 y 1 to 65536 ACTual Query number readings stored in the buffer POINts Query buffer size y NOTify lt NRf gt Specify number of stored readings that will set the Note 3 Trace Notify bit B6 of the measurement event register Must be less than the TRACe POINts value 1 to TRAC POIN 1 NOTify Query trace notify value FEED lt name gt Select source feed for buffer readings SENS1
469. ues The first press of the EDIT key selects the editing mode for the I source field EDIT annunciator turns on Each subsequent press toggles between the source field and the compliance field The flashing digit indicates which reading source or compliance is presently selected for editing The unit will exit the editing mode if an editing action is not performed within six seconds To re enter the edit mode do one of the following For the Model 6220 press a Value Adjust Key or a Cursor Key to re enter the edit mode for the last selected field For the Model 6221 press a Cursor Key or the Rotary Knob to re enter the edit mode for the last selected field For both models press the EDIT key to re enter the edit mode for the source field You cannot set a digit to a value that exceeds the maximum allowable set ting For the l source field the largest allowable value is limited by the selected range e g 2 1000mA for the 2mA source range For the l compliance field the largest allowable value is 105 00V When editing the source value the output is updated immediately allowing you to adjust the source value while the output is on To exit the edit mode allow it to time out or press ENTER or EXIT When editing the compliance value compliance is not updated until the edit mode is allowed to time out or when ENTER or EXIT is pressed Return to Section 3 topics 3 12 DC Current Source Operation Model 6220 6221 Refer
470. uffer fills the asterisk annunciator turns off NEVer Disables the buffer 4 TRACe TSTamp FORMat lt name gt parameters ABSolute Each timestamp is referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer DELTa Timestamps provide the time between each buffer reading Note that the timestamp will only appear in a buffer reading is TSTamp is one of the selected data format elements See Section 13 for details on Format 5 Buffer read commands TRACe DATA Use this read command to return all stored buffer readings The data elements that are included for each buffer reading depends on the selected elements for FORMat ELEMents command see Section 13 for details TRACe DATA TYPE Use this query command to determine what kind of readings are stored in the buffer It returns NONE no reading in buffer DELT Delta readings DCON Differential Conductance readings or PULS Pulse Delta readings Return to Section 6 topics 6 18 Averaging Filter Math and Buffer Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual TRACe DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt With this read command you can specify a list of consecutive buffer readings to return Two parameters are required for this command lt start gt and lt count gt The first reading in the buffer is Rdg 0 Example To return the first 20 readings in the buffer send the fol lowing command TRACe DATA SELected 0 20 6 Buffer data elements The following seven data eleme
471. un ciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state REM does not necessarily indicate the state of the REM line as the instru ment must be addressed to listen with REM true before the REM indicator turns on When the instrument is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key and OUTPUT OFF are locked out When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel operation is restored TALK This indicator is on when the instrument is in the talker active state Place the unit in the talk state by addressing it to talk with the correct MTA My Talk Address command TALK is off when the unit is in the talker idle state Place the unit in the talker idle state by sending a UNT Untalk command addressing it to listen or sending the IFC Interface Clear com mand LSTN This indicator is on when the Model 622x is in the listener active state which is activated by addressing the instrument to listen with the cor rect MLA My Listen Address command LSTN is off when the unit is in the listener idle state Place the unit in the listener idle state by sending UNL Unlisten addressing it to talk or sending the IFC Interface Clear com mand over the bus You can program the instrument to generate a service request SRQ when one or more errors or conditions occur When this indicator is
472. up for at least one hour before conducting the pro cedures If the instrument has been subjected to temperature extremes those outside the ranges stated above allow additional time for the instrument s internal tempera ture to stabilize Allow one extra hour to stabilize a unit that is 10 C 18 F outside the specified temperature range Also allow the test equipment to warm up for the minimum time specified by the manufacturer Line power The Model 622x requires a line voltage of 100V to 240V and a line frequency of 50Hz to 60Hz Return to Section 16 topics 16 4 Performance Verification Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Recommended test equipment Table 16 1 summarizes recommended test equipment specifications as well as typ ical suitable models Ideally test equipment uncertainty should be at least four times better than equivalent Model 6220 or 6221 specifications However the equipment listed for the 2nA and 20nA ranges does not quite meet that requirement Table 16 1 Recommended test equipment Description Key specifications Manufacturer model Digital Multimeter Measure 200nA to 100mA DC 100ppm Agilent 3458A Measure 10V and 100V DC 100ppm Measure 100mA AC 1kHz and 100kHz Picoammeter Measure 2nA and 20nA DC 2000ppm Keithley 6487 Frequency Counter Measure 1kHz sine wave within 25ppm Any suitable Test Resistor 500 1 2W composition Any suitable 1 Equipment used to test o
473. urce Operation Output boundaries source and sink sese 3 5 Source and compliance editing Model 6220 sss 3 10 Source and compliance editing Model 6221 sss 3 12 Sweeps Comparison of sweep types 2 4 3 Linear staircase Sweep ee eee rone 4 4 Logarithmic staircase sweep example 5 point sweep from 1mA to 10mA 4 5 Custom sweep example 1mA to 10mA arbitrary steps 4 7 5 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 7 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 8 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance measurements 5 3 System configurations for Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 5 System connections stand alone operation sese 5 7 System connections PC control of Model 622x sss 5 8 Guarded test Connections uscite eee tite ete b toe 5 10 Data flow and read commands sse 5 14 D
474. urned off and the line cords must be disconnected from AC line power DUT test connections are shown in Figure 5 5 This connection scheme uses guarding and an earth grounded test fixture that is equipped with an interlock switch Guarding The purpose of guarding is to eliminate the effects of leakage current and cable capacitance that exist between output high and output low In the absence of guard leakage and cable capacitance can adversely affect the performance of the Model 622x Guarding can be used for all DUT testing and is most effective when sourcing low current and or testing high impedance DUT In order to use guarding as shown in Figure 5 5 the driven guard must be con nected to the inner shield of the OUTPUT connector of the Model 622x Use the following procedure to connect the inner shield to Guard Return to Section 5 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance 5 9 Inner shield connection for OUTPUT NOTE By default the inner shield of the OUTPUT connec tor of the Model 622x is connected to output low For details on the inner shield connections for the OUTPUT connector see Section 2 The inner shield of the Model 622x OUTPUT connector can be connected to the driven guard or to output low as follows 1 On the Model 622x press the TRIAX key to display the menu for the INNER SHIELD 2 Using the CURSOR controls place the blinking cursor on GUARD or OUTPUT
475. us Structure 11 9 Serial polling and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set bit B6 and generate an SRQ service request In a test program the status byte can be periodically read to check if an SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for example branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request Typically SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the Model 622x If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the status byte register will remain cleared and the program will proceed normally after the serial poll is performed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the status byte register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the status byte register This allows subsequent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all status byte summary bits are reset SPE SPD serial polling The SPE SPD general bus command is used to serial poll the Model 622x Serial polling obtains the serial poll byte status byte Typically serial polling is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service
476. utput connector Note that the actual digital output value assumes active high logic which cannot be changed so sending 12 binary 1100 will result in bits 0 and 1 low and bits 2 and 3 high Digital I O port values are shown in Table 9 4 Return to Section 9 topics 9 10 Limit Test and Digital I O Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 9 4 Digital I O port values Value Out 4 Out 3 Out 2 Out 1 0 L L L L 1 L L L H 2 L L H L 3 L L H H 4 L H L L 5 L H L H 6 L H H L 7 L H H H 8 H L L L 9 H L L H 10 H L H L 11 H L H H 12 H H L L 13 H H L H 14 H H H L 15 H H H H L Grounded H gt 4 43V Return to Section 9 topics 10 Remote Operations Section 10 topics Selecting and configuring an interface page 10 2 Interfaces page 10 2 Languages page 10 3 Interface selection and configuration page 10 3 Programming syntax page 10 12 Command words page 10 12 Program messages page 10 15 Response messages page 10 17 GPIB interface reference page 10 19 GPIB bus standards page 10 19 GPIB bus connections page 10 19 Primary address page 10 21 General IEEE 488 bus commands page 10 22 Front panel GPIB operation page 10 24 RS 232 interface reference page 10 25 Sending and receiving data page 10 24 RS 232 settings page 10 25 RS 232 connections page 10 27 Ethernet interface reference page 10 29 Ethernet standards page 10 29 Typical Ethernet systems page 10 29 Ethernet connecti
477. utput current and compliance accuracy of both 6220 and 6221 2 Equipment used to test wave functions of 6221 only Test equipment connections For the sake of clarity only actual signal lines are shown in test equipment con nection drawings in this section To ensure measurement integrity be sure to use appropriate triax cables or where appropriate coax cables for all connections Calculating test limits The test limits stated in this section have been calculated using only the Model 622x one year accuracy specifications and they do not include test equip ment uncertainty If a particular measurement falls slightly outside the allowable range recalculate the new limits based on both Model 622x specifications and pertinent calibration equipment specifications Example limit calculation The following is an example of how test limits have been calculated Assume you are testing the 20mA range using 20mA output current Using 0 05 104A accuracy the calculated limits are Output current limits 20mA 20mA 0 05 10uA Output current limits 2 19 980 to 20 020mA Return to Section 16 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Performance Verification 16 5 Restoring factory defaults Before performing each procedure restore the instrument to its factory defaults as follows 1 Press SETUP 2 Select PRESET then restore the factory default conditions by pressing ENTER Test summary and considerations Test sum
478. utput queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed G WAI wait to continue Wait until previous commands are completed Effectively the WAI command is a No Op no operation for the Model 622x and thus does not need to be used Two types of device commands exist Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to finish before the next command is executed Overlapped commands A command that allows the execution of sub sequent commands while device operations of the overlapped command are still in progress The WAI command is used to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for sequential commands Return to Section 12 topics 12 6 Common Commands Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 12 topics 13 DISPlay FORMat and SYSTem Key Press Codes Section 13 topics DISPlay subsystem page 13 2 FORMat subsystem page 13 4 SYSTem key press codes page 13 9 13 2 DISPlay FORMat SYSTem Key Press Codes Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual DISPlay subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to control the display remotely and are listed Table 13 1 Table 13 1 Display commands Command Description Default DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Enable disable display a
479. ver that if you send the query twice while the sweep is on the same point the second query will not show the bit set because the first query cleared it and the bit will not be reset until the next point in the sweep The Sweep Aborted event occurs whenever a sweep is aborted before being allowed to finish and the Sweep Done event occurs after the requested number of sweeps SOUR SWE COUN or SOUR DELT COUN has completed For the purposes of these events Delta and Differential Conductance Section 5 are also considered sweeps and will set these events and bits accordingly Pulse Delta is not considered a sweep unless you have enabled Pulse Sweeps SOUR PDEL SWE STAT ON Model 6221 Arbitrary waveforms Section 7 are not considered sweeps and do not affect these status events Return to Section 4 topics 4 24 Sweeps Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 4 topics o Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Section 5 topics Part 1 page 5 2 Part 2 page 5 20 Overview page 5 2 Delta page 5 20 Section overview page 5 2 Operation overview page 5 2 Test systems page 5 4 Keithley instrumentation requirements page 5 4 System configurations page 5 4 System connections page 5 6 DUT test connections page 5 8 Configuring communications page 5 10 Arming process page 5 11 Interlock page 5 13 Data flow and read commands page 5 13 Data flow page 5 13 Read commands page 5 15 Measure
480. will set For details see Section 11 Status Structure Pulse Delta outputs Pulse Delta output is made up of one or more Pulse Delta cycles Each cycle is made up of three output pulses low high and low The time period for a cycle is adjustable and is the same for all cycles The output pulses have an adjustable pulse width which is the same for all pulses There are two basic Pulse Delta output types Fixed output and Sweep output For Fixed output all high and low pulses are fixed for all Pulse Delta cycles in the test For Sweep output the sweep SWP function of the Model is used to output a staircased logarithmic or user specified custom pulse sweep Return to Section 5 topics 5 36 Delta Pulse Delta and Differential Conductance Fixed output Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Figure 5 10 shows one Pulse Delta cycle for a Fixed output As shown the Model 6221 outputs a low pulse a high pulse and then another low pulse during every Pulse Delta cycle The pulse width is adjustable and is the same for all high and low pulses The cycle interval is also adjustable and is based on the set number of power line cycles The Pulse Delta interval shown in Figure 5 10 is set for 5 PLC power line cycles which is the default setting After the set interval expires the next Pulse Delta cycle starts if pulse count is gt 1 Pulses are synchronized to the frequency of the power line voltage When Pulse Delta is started the th
481. with the SRQ line Status byte and service request commands The commands to program and read the status byte register and service request enable register are listed in Table 11 3 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers on page 11 5 and Reading regis ters on page 11 6 To reset the bits of the service request enable register to 0 use 0 as the parame ter value for the SRE command i e SRE 0 Return to Section 11 topics 11 10 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Table 11 3 Common commands status byte and service request enable registers Command Description Default STB Read status byte register SRE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the service request enable register Note lt NDN gt Bxx x Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hx Hexadecimal format x 0 to FF Octal format x 0 to 377 lt NRf gt 0 255 Decimal format Read the service request enable register Note CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect on the service request enable register Programming example set MSS B6 when error occurs The first command of the following sequence enables EAV error available When an invalid command is sent line 4 bits B2 EAV and B6 MSS of the status byte register set to 1 The last command reads the status byte register using the binary format which directly indicates which bits are set The command
482. www keithley com Model 6220 DC Current Source Model 6221 AC and DC Current Source Reference Manual 622x 901 01 Rev C October 2008 KEITHLEY A GREATER MEASURE OF CONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments Inc warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from date of shipment Keithley Instruments Inc warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment probes cables software rechargeable batteries diskettes and documentation During the warranty period Keithley Instruments will at its option either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective To exercise this warranty write or call your local Keithley Instruments representative or contact Keithley Instruments headquarters in Cleveland Ohio You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions Send the product transportation prepaid to the indicated service facility Repairs will be made and the product returned transportation prepaid Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period or at least 90 days LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley Instruments express written consent or misuse of any product or part This warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from
483. x recognizes X ON and X OFF sent from the controller An X OFF will cause the Model 622x to stop out putting characters until it sees an X ON Incoming commands are processed after the CR character is received from the controller If NONE is the selected flow control then there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the Model 622x Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready The default setting is NONE NOTE For RS 232 operation OPC or OPC should be used with slow responding commands See Sec tion 12 Even with X ON X OFF selected the computer may still lose data from the Model 622x if the re turn string is large 230 000 characters and one of the higher baud rates is selected With no flow control NONE selected the error occurs with a much smaller return string Use some type of er ror checking in your program to avoid these situ ations Hardware flow control Hardware handshaking can be used instead for flow control The RS 232 inter face provides two control lines RTS and CTS for this purpose see Figure 10 4 and Table 10 5 When the Model 622x is ready to send RTS data it will transmit when it receives the clear to send CTS signal from the computer Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 27 RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port can be connected to the serial port of a computer using a straight through
484. xecuted without retyp ing the entire command path Example Stat oper enab NRf enab After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third com mand level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be entered without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not included in the program message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root level and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur Command path rules Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional If the root is optional treat a command word on the next level as the root The colon at the beginning of a program message is optional and need not be used Stat pres stat pres When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next com mand level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which is used to separate commands within the program message When the path pointer detects a colon that immediately follows a semi colon it resets to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Exe cuting a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Return to Section 10 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Remote Operations 10 17 Using common commands and SCPI commands in the
485. y 2 Select CAL and press ENTER The main calibration menu will be dis played 3 Select UNLOCK then press ENTER Enter the present password at the prompt then press ENTER to unlock calibration Return to Section 17 topics Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Calibration 17 25 4 From the main calibration menu select CHANGE PASSWORD and press ENTER The instrument will display NEW PWD 006220 Use 4 gt A ENTER or EXIT 5 Enter the new password then press ENTER 6 Use the LOCK selection to lock out calibration when finished Remote password To change the password via remote send these queries first with the old pass word then the new password CAL PROT CODE KI006220 Unlock cal with present password CAL PROT CODE KI CAL Send new password CAL PROT LOCK Lock out password Note that you will not be able to unlock calibration from the front panel if you change the first two characters to something other than KI Return to Section 17 topics 17 26 Calibration Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 17 topics Specifications BRUNING 40 21 62198 SBG 6220 Programmable Current Source SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Range 5 over range Accuracy 1 Year 23 5 Programming Resolution 0 4 2pA 0 3 10pA 0 3 100pA 0 1 InA 0 05 10nA 0 05 100nA 0 05 0 05 10 0 1 SOLA 100fA 1 10 100pA 10nA 100nA 10uA
486. y bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely dependent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the standard event register is Return to Section 11 topics 11 8 Status Structure Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will reset the ESB bit in the status byte register The bits of the status byte register are described as follows Bit BO Measurement Status MSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Error Available EAV Set summary bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the error queue Bit B3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled questionable event has occurred Bit B4 Message Available MAV Set summary bit indicates that a response message is present in the output queue Bit B5 Event Summary Bit ESB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred Bit B6 Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Set bit indicates that an enabled summary bit of the status byte register is set Bit B7 Operation Summary OSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred Depending on how it is used bit B6 of the status byte register is either the request for service RQS bit or the master summary status MSS bit
487. y may NOT include optional command words and most query commands Optional command words and query commands are sum marized as follows Optional command words In order to be in conformance with the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards the Model 622x accepts optional command words Any command word that is enclosed in brackets is optional and need not be included in the program message Query commands Most command words have a query form A query command is identified by the question mark that follows the command word A query command requests queries the programmed status of that command When a query command is sent and the Model 622x is addressed to talk the response message is sent to the computer Return to Section 1 topics 1 30 Getting Started Model 6220 6221 Reference Manual Return to Section 1 topics 2 Output Connections Section 2 topics Output connectors page 2 2 Triax connector page 2 2 Ground points page 2 3 LO and GUARD banana jacks page 2 3 INTERLOCK page 2 4 Output configurations page 2 5 Triax inner shield page 2 7 Triax output low page 2 7 Guards page 2 8 Guard overview page 2 8 Triax Cable Guard page 2 9 Banana Jack Guard page 2 12 Floating the current source page 2 13 Connections to DUT page 2 15 Supplied triax cable page 2 15 Basic connections page 2 15 Shields and guarding page 2 16 Banana Jack Guard connections page 2 19 Floating current source connections

to get the file

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents